BEGIN:VCALENDAR VERSION:2.0 PRODID:-//wp-events-plugin.com//7.2.3.1//EN TZID:Europe/London X-WR-TIMEZONE:Europe/London BEGIN:VEVENT UID:9280@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251201T103000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251201T113000 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/little-tigers/ SUMMARY:Little Tigers DESCRIPTION: \;\nYou will need to be Registered and Added your Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk You will also of had to be gr aded to see what level you are with us and then you will be able to see wh at availability we have\n\n\n\n\nIntroducing our younger riders &\; rid ers that need additions support!\nCome along to Bank Farm Riding School an d meet our friendly ponies who just can't wait to be pampered and petted b y you.\n\nEach session lasts 1hour. The session includes a short ride on a pony\, or just a sit on\, for those that want.\n\nWork through a Little T igers Syllabus and receive a Certificate upon completion - fun way for chi ldren and adults to learn more about ponies\n\nblock booking discount same day per week Courses will be on Mondays 10.30am-11.30am\, Thursdays 1pm-2 pm &\; Fridays 10.30am-11.30am\n\nParents/carer/guardian will be requir ed to assist their rider - the instructor will go through everything with you on the day please wear a shoe\, boot or wellie with a slight heal noth ing flat soled. leggings or jogging bottoms\, no skirts or shorts\n\n\n\n\ n END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:11172@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251202T160000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251202T180000 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/horse-care-ride/ SUMMARY:Horse Care & Ride DESCRIPTION: \;\nYou will need to be Registered and Added your Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk You will also of had to be gr aded to see what level you are with us and then you will be able to see wh at availability we have\n\n\n\n\nHorse Care &\; Ride (Stable management &\; riding course)\n \;\n\n90mins Sessions (can be booked as a mo nth or individual dates) OPEN TO AGES FROM 6 YEARS OLD AND ALL ABILITIES\n \nWorking through our stable management syllabus's and riding syllabus's\n \n \;\n\nBadges will be applied on the ecpro upon completion and notes added so we are going to run the following levels together under a bronze \, silver and gold Ecpro Badge Scheme\n\n \;\n\nYELLOW  Level 1 &\ ; BLUE Level 2 Stable Management together and upon passing each you will r eceive a yellow &\; blue certificate but on EPRO you will Receive a BR ONZE BADGE\n\nGREEN  Level 2 &\; ORANGE Level 3 Stable Management toge ther and upon passing each you will receive a green &\; orange certifi cate but on EPRO you will Receive a SILVER BADGE\n\nPURPLE Level 5 &\; RED Level 6 Stable Management together and upon passing each you will rece ive a red &\; purple certificate but on EPRO you will Receive a GOLD BA DGE\n\n \;\n\nBRONZE BADGE \n\nThings covered in the Yellow &\; Bl ue Syllabus's\n\n Name basic points of the Horse\n Assist a Rider Mounti ng \n Give a Leg Up \n Fit a Hat to a Rider \n Adjust Stirrups from the ground \n Show a rider how to hold their reins \n Able to check &a mp\; tighten a girth before mounting\n Yard Safety \n Name different pa rts of the Bridle \n Name different parts of the Saddle \n Name the di fferent items of the grooming kit \n Lead a pony in-hand \n Correct wa y to give a pony an apple/carrot \n Approach &\; Handle a pony correc tly \n Catch a pony &\; Put a head collar on \n Demonstrate awarene ss off safety rules &\; hazards \n Tie up a pony correctly\n Able to tie a haynet up correctly \n Pick up &\; pick out feet \n Know the Principles of watering &\; feeding \n How to stop a car \n How to say 'thank-you'\n How to cross a road \n Know which side of the road yo u should ride on\n Understand the simple 'green cross code' \n Know it is safer to ride on the road with adults or parents \n Demonstrate Mucki ng Out\n Bed down \n Demonstrate watering the horse \n Put on and Rem ove  Aa head collar correctly\n Name &\; Describe different types of bedding \n Be able to Put on a Saddle \n Be able to put on a Bridle \ n Name different horses colours \n Name different Markings\n Name diff erent Rugs \n Know the importance of ill-fitting rugs \n Know how to f it a rug \n Know how to care for &\; clean saddlery \n Have knowled ge of correctly fitting tack \n Be able to identify Poisonous Plants\n Untack correctly\n Communicate with Riders &\; Instructors when assist ing \n How to ride along a road\n How to signal Right &\; Left\n Sh ow an awareness of dangers while riding on a road\n\n \;\n\nSILVER BAD GE\n\nCovered in the Green &\; Orange Syllabus’s\n\n Horse &\; Ri der 1st Aid Kit\n Field Safety (shelter\, fencing\, poisonous plants\, ma intenance)\n Treatment of minor Cuts &\; Abrasions\n Correct handling of ponies’ legs\n Correct grooming of ponies’ feet &\; legs\n Ta ck up &\; Un-tack Unaided &\; put away correctly\n Basic feeding\n clean &\; assemble tack\n catch a pony &\; turn it away in the fie ld\n know that water must always be available\n know the structure of th e horse’s foot\n know the names of the farrier’s tools\n identify si gns of ill health\n understand the importance of roughage\n requirements to plaiting a horse\n plaiting a horse\n different mouth pieces &\; their actions\n arena safety – rules of the arena\n yard jobs (&\; safety)\n how to lead a pony along a road on foot\n how to slow a car do wn\n care &\; working of a pony off grass\n elementary feeding\, wate ring &\; cleanliness of the pony\n know when a pony needs shoeing\n k now what to look for in a newly shod foot\n know the main indications for health in the pony\n recognise when a pony is lame\n know how to load & amp\; un-load a pony\n understand the importance &\; the means of prot ecting les while travelling\n put a rug\, roller\, tail bandage &\; Ne w Zealand on\n know what equipment is needed for lunging\n know reasons for lunging\n skeleton of the horse\n know different bandages &\; app ly them\n knowledge of ill-fitting bandages\n show knowledge of hay & \; haylage\n understand the importance of roughage\n knowledge of stabli ng-ventilation-lights-drainage-shelter &\; warmth\n take a horse’s t emperature\n weigh a horse\n understand the reasons for equipment a hors e is wearing\n how to lead a pony along a road while mounted \;\n\nA Parent/Guardian is to attend to drop children off for stable management an d pick them up again\n\nUpon completing each syllabus you will receive a c ertificate once you receive your certificate ONCE YOU HAVE COMPLETED THE B ADGE you can then move on to the next BADGE levels\n\nThis means: if there are no badges displayed\, they are at level 1+2\, working towards Bronze. \n\nIf a Bronze badge is displayed\, they have completed level 1+2 and now working towards Silver (level 3+4) and so on.\n\nTo access this you will have to go on to you account via web link https://bankfarmridingschool.ec pro.co.uk and go on to MY ACCOUNT and then on to RIDERS you will see on t here NOTES/PROGRESS and BADGES EARNED\, simply click on RIDER NOTES and ev erything will be displayed.\n\nAnyone wishing to attend the yard either af ter school or at weekend has to be actively doing our stable management se ssions and have to have of completed level 2 to continue coming on the yar d but do not have to progress to level 3 if not wishing too (However if th e child is under 12years old for insurance purposes there is a charge for them to be here for the day to stay at the yard)\n\nYOU HAVE TO BOOK ON TH E BOOKING SYSTEM FOR ANYONE WANTING TO STAY AND HELP\n\n \;\n\nThey wi ll require\npaper\nfolder\npens\nriding hat for when around and handling h orses\ngloves for when handling horses\nAccess to a printer to print off S HEETS required which can be found on our google drive please follow the li nk https://drive.google.com/drive/folders/1gyFxnlXmtlMmrK_mIGG-8HuX6gHAEPF C?usp=sharing\n\nIf you have no access to a printer please let us know and we will print you a pack off at an additional charge\n\nNON REFUNDABLE\n\ nIF YOU WOULD LIKE A FOLDER MADE UP PLEASE LET LINDSEY KNOW AND THIS WILL BE AN ADDITIONAL CHARGE\n\n \;\n\nNONE DISCOUNTABLE\n\n\n\n\n END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:9018@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251203T180000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251203T190000 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/mixed-level-group-lesson-3/ SUMMARY:Mixed Level Group Lesson DESCRIPTION: \;\nYou will need to be Registered and Added your Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk You will also of had to be gr aded to see what level you are with us and then you will be able to see wh at availability we have\nLevel Three\n1. Explain prepare to Canter\n(CHECK POSTIION\, SHORTEN REINS SLIGHTLY\, HALF HALT BUT KEEP LEG ON\, SITTING T ROT\, ASK AS GOING IN TO THE CORNER\, INSIDE BEND FOR CORRECT CANTER LEAD) \n 2. Explain &\; Use Aids to canter\n(SITTING TROT –\n\nLITTLE BIT MORE WEIGHT ON THE INSIDE SEAT BONE YOUR SEAT DRAWS UP THE HIND LEG STRONG RHYTHM -–\n\nINSIDE LEG ON THE GIRTH ASKS FOR MILD BEND TO PREPARE THE INSIDE LEAD &\; HELPS WITH BALANCE-\n\nINSIDE REIN DOES VERY LITTLE ACT S AS A NECK REIN IT SITS THERE AND PREVENTS HORSE DRIFTING OUT –\n\n1 TO 3 HALF HALTS BEFORE TRANSITION TO BALANCE WEIGHT TO THE HIND END KEEP LEG S ON FOR IMPULSION AFTER THE HALF HALTS —\n\nOUTSIDE LEG SLIGHTLY BACK B EHIND THE GIRTH TELLS THEM WHICH LEAD BEHIND\n\nOUTSIDE REIN HELP TO CONTR OL SPEED AND KEEP THEM OUT ON THE TRACK)\n3. Figure of 8s\n(2 20M CIRCLES PUT TOGETHER – NO STRAIGHT LINES)\n4. Serpentines\n(NO STRAIGHT LINES bu t when starting to learn a serpentine it is best to rid the straight line then the loop will become better with practice\, LOOPS\, EACH TIME CROSS O VER THE CENTER LINE SHOULD CHANGE DIAGONAL\, LOOPS EQUAL) (3 LOOP\, 4 LOOP \, 5 LOOPS ECT)\n\n(diagrams are 3 loops serpentine)\n5. Trot 20m circles from E &\; B \n6. Balance Canter\n 7. Understand &\; Explain Cant er Lead\n(HORSES FRONT INSIDE LEG SHOULD STRIKE OUT FURTHER FORWARD THAN T HE OUTSIDE FRONT LEG\n\nTHEY TAKE OFF WITH THERE OUTSIDE BACK LEG AND LEAD WITH THERE INSIDE FRONT\n\n(THEY CAN BE CORRECT WITH FRONT LEGS AND INCOR RECT WITH BACK LEGS WHICH IS CALLED MANY NAMES BUT WE USE THE TERM DIS-UNI TED THIS USUALLY FEELS AWFUL\, BUMPY &\; OFF BALANCE. BACK TO TROT AND ASK AGAIN)\n\n(IF THE HORSE IS INCORRECT IN FRONT BACK TO TROT ASK AGAIN)\ n 8. Check Canter Lead Whilst mounted\n 9. Walk without stirrups\n 10 . Trot without stirrups\n 11. Adjust Own Stirrups\n 12. Understand bea ts of Pace\, Walk\, Trot &\; Canter\n\n WALK IS 4 BEAT EACH FOOT HITS THE GROUND INDEPENDENTLY\n\nThe footfall sequence is:\n\nLeft Hind – Lef t Front – Right Hind – Right Front.\n\n TROT IS A 2 BEAT FEET GO IN D IAGONAL PAIRS\n\nThe footfall sequence is:\n\nLeft Hind + Right Front – Suspension – Right Hind + Left Front – Suspension\n\n CANTER IS A 3 B EAT 1 PAIR OF FEET STRIKE AND THE OTHER 2 LAND INDEPENDENTLY\n\nRight Lead Canter\n\nLeft Hind – Right Hind + Left Front – Right Front – Suspe nsion\n\nLeft Lead Canter\n\nRight Hind – Left Hind + Right Front – Le ft Front – Suspension\n\n DON’T NEED TO KNOW GALLOP BUT IF THEY WANT TO KNOW IT IS 4 BEAT SEQUENCE\n\nRight Lead Gallop\n\nLeft Hind – Right Hind – Left Front – Right Front – Suspension\n\nLeft Lead Gallop\n\n Right Hind – Left Hind – Right Front – Left Front – Suspension\n13 .  Position for Level 3\n(VERTICAL LINE EAR- SHOULDER- HIP – HEEL\, EYE S UP AND AHEAD\, STRAIGHT LINE FROM ELBOWS SOFT WITH SLIGHT BEND – HAND DOWN THE REIN TO THE HORSES MOUTH\, THUMBS ON TOP POINTING TOWARDS HORSES EARS\, SIT EQUALLY ARCROSS BOTH SEAT BONES\, RELAX SEAT\, HIPS &\; PELV IS\, KNEE &\; THIGH REST LIGHTLY AGAINS SADDLE NOT GRIPPING)\n 14.   Understand Aids (Natural &\; Artificial)\n\n COMMUNICATION BETWEEN RID ERS AND HORSE)\n ARTIFICIAL AIDS- MAINLY WHIPS &\; SPURS\n NATURAL AI DS- VOICE\, HANDS\, LEGS\, BODY\, SEAT\n\n(HANDS – COMMUNICATION THROUGH REINS TO THE BIT\, SHOULD BE LIGHT FLEXIBLE- USE OF HAND AID MUST BE USED WITH SEAT\, LEG AIDS- ABOVE HORSES WITHERS LEVEL WITH EACH OTHER\n\n TUR NING – GENTLE SQUEEZING THE REIN ASKS THE HORSE TO TURN HEAD IN THAT DIR ECTION\n HALTING –PRESSURE ON BOTH REINS WITH SEAT AND LEG PROVEDING EN ERGY A HALT WILL PRODUCED\n\n(VOICE – WORD\, TONE &\; LENGTH OF TIME THE WORD IS HELD FOR INDICATES UPWARDS/DOWNWARDS TRANSITIONS\n\n UPWARD T RANSITION – EMPHASIS THE LETTER WITH RISE IN TONE TOWARDS END OF WORD\n DOWNWARD TRANSITION – LOWER TONE TOWRDS END OF WORD STRETCH THE WORD OU T\n COLLECTION – CALM\n\n(SEAT – COLLECTION\, BALANCE\, STEERING\, FO RWARD MOVEMENT\, CONTROL\, STABILITY\n\n SEAT – CENTRAL IN SADDLE\, EVE N DISTRIBUTION OF WEIGHT OFN SEAT BONES\, ALTER WHEN ASK HORSE TO MOVE DIR ECTION\, DO NOT COLLAPSE THROUGH HIP\n HIPS –LEVEL AT ALL TIMES\, SUPPL E TO ALLOW MOVEMENT ABSORBED THROUGH SEAT\n PELVIS – ABSORD MOVEMENT\, HELPS CONTROL CENTRE OF GRAVITY\, ENCOURANGES HORSE TO ACCELERATE\n\n(LEGS – USED WITH SEAT &\; HAND TO COMMUNICATE – DIRECTION\, GAIT\, LEVE L OF ACTIVITY\, UPWARD DOWNWARD TRANSITIONS\, LATERAL MOVEMENTS\n\n ON TH E GIRTH – PRODUCES ENERGY/FORWARD MOVEMENT – BOTH LEGS ON THE GIRTH FO RWARD/STRAIGHT\, 1 LEG BEHIND THE GIRTH WILL ASK EITHER CHANGE DIRECTION O R CANTER DEPENDING ON LEVEL OF PRESSURE\n LOWER LEG BEHIND THE GIRTH – ABOUT 2-3 INCHES MORE CONTROL OVER HINDQUARTERS- FORWARD\, BACKWARD\, DIAG ONALLY OR SIDEWAYS MOVEMENTS\, UPWARD TRANSITIONS EG CANTER OR LATERAL MOV EMENT EG LEG YIELD\, BOTH LEGS BEHIND THE GIRTH CORRECT USE WITH SEAT AND LEGS WILL AID REIN BACK\n\n(WHIP – INSIDE HAND USED TO BACK UP RIDERS LE G AND ENCOURAGE HORSE TO MOVE FORWARD)\n\n(SPURS – ON THE RIDERS HEEL TO GIVE PRECISE LEG AID ONLY WORN BY EXPERIENCED RIDERS)\n 15. Balance\n16 . Check Girth\nLevel Four\n1. Continue working on Balanced Cantering \n2. Trotting Pole without stirrups \n3. 7 phases of jumping\n\n (TURN -APPR OARCH-TAKE OFF-FLIGHT-LAND-GET-AWAY- TURN)\n REMAIN BALANCED\n IMPULSION \n POSITION – OPEN SHOULDERS ON TURN \n 1. TURN  – ACCURATELY – LINE UP WITH CENTRE – SIT UP – LOOK AHEAD – RIDE LEG TO HAND – KE EP BALANCED RHYTHM – IMPULSION\n  2. APPROACH  – CENTRE OF JUMP – SIT UP – LOOK AHEAD CHANNELING HORSE FORWARD – BETWEEN HAND &\; LEG TO MAINTAIN STRAIGHT LINE – MAINTAIN IMPULSION &\; BALANCE\n 3. TAKE OFF – POINT WHICH HORSE GATHERS HINDLEGS UNDERNEATH ITS BODY & \; STARTS TO LIFT FOREHAND – LOWER LEG SECURELY WRAPPED ROUND – MAINTA IN ENERGY &\; FORWARDNESS – HANDS FOLLOW MOVEMENT OF HORSES HEAD NECK BUT MAINTAIN CONTACT THROUGH REIN – LOOK AHEAD\n 4. FLIGHT – IN THE AIR – FOREHAND WELL LIFTED\, BACK WELL ROUNDED\, FORELEGS &\; HINDLEG S TUCKED UP – FOLDED IN TO JUMPING POSITION\, UPPER BODY LOWERED\, SEAT SLIPPED TO BACK OF SADDLE – HANDS ALLOW STRETCH THE NECK\, BACK &\; B ODY GIVES FREEDOM OF MOVEMENT\, WHILE MAINTAINING LIGHT CONTACT – LOWER LEG STAYS SECURELY WRAPPED AROUND MAINTAIN BALANCE\n 5. LAND – HORSE STRETCHES OUT &\; EXTENDS FORELEGS READY TO LAND – HORSE SHOULD LAND ON FORELEG WANTING THE CANTER LEAD ON – UPPER BODY COMES BACK UP – MAI NTAIN CONTACT – LEGS REMAIN IN POSTION – LOOK AHEAD\n 6. GET AWAY   ­­- MOVING AWAY FROM THE JUMP TO THE NEXT – MAKE SURE HORSE IS BALAN CED\, PLENTY OF ENERGY &\; IMPULSION- CORRECT CANTER LEAD – LEGS SECU RE\n 7. TURN –  TURNS AWAY FROM ONE FENCE TO ANOTHER THIS STAGE STAR TS ALL OVER AGAIN OR IF SINGLE FENCE STAY STRAIGHT\n\n4/5. Able Ride A Dem i Voltes &\; Reverse Demi Voltes\n\n DEMI VOLTE – ½ 10 MENTRE CIRCL E TO THE CENTRE LINE THEN A DIAGONAL LINE BACK TO THE TRACK TO CHANGE THE REIN\n REVERSE DEMI VOLTE – DIAGONAL LINE TO CENTRE LINE LETTER THEN ½ 10 METRE CIRCLE BACK TO THE TRACK TO CHANGE THE REIN \n\n6. 2X ½ 10 met re Circles to change the rein  \n7. Turn on the Forehand\n\n HALT\, TO STOP FORWARD MOVEMENT APPLY STEADY PRESSURE ON REINS – SIT UP STRAIGHT  \n PRESSURE PLACED 3-4 INCHS BEHIND THE GIRTH WITH YOUR OUTSIDE LEG – H ORSE WILL MOVE AWAY FROM THE PRESSURE\, HORSES HIND LEGS WILL MOVE IN FRON T &\; ACROSS THE OTHER HIND LEG\, THE OPPOSITE FRONT LEG TO YOUR PRESSU RE LEG WILL ALSO MOVE AROUND THE OTHER FRONT LEG WILL STAY STILL \n YOUR OTHER LEG (INSIDE) SHOULD BE KEPT STEADY SO TO KEEP YOUR BALANCE AND STOP THE HORSE TRYING TO TURN TOO QUICKLY \n REINS TO CONTROL FRONT OF HORSE – GOOD CONTROL PREVENTS YOUR HORSE MOVING FORWARDS – OUTSIDE HAND LIF T UP AND BACK TO FLEX HORSES NECK SLIGHTLY IN THE DIRECTION OF TURN\, FLEX UNTIL YOU CAN SEE CORNER OF EYE – USE OTHER REIN FOR SUPPORT TO KEEP HO RSE FROM MOVING FORWARDS\, OUTSIDE REIN CLOSE TO NECK   \n HALF HALT E ACH STEP UNTIL COMPLETE TURN 180 DEGREES – POSITVIE PRAISE AFTER \n TU RNING RIGHT RIGHT LEG BACK – RIGHT REIN FLEX \n TURNING LEFT LEFT LEG BACK – LEFT REIN FLEX\n\n8. 15m circles in walk  (A&\;C)\n9. 10m ci rcles in walk (A&\;C)  \n10. Lighten seat \nINVOLVES STANDING ON YOU R OWN 2 FEET WHILE WORKING YOUR HORSE – BALANCE YOURSELF\, NO LEANING\, HOLDING ON CROUCHING DOWN ON NECK – CLEARANCE BETWEEN BOTTOM AND SADDLE – ALLOWS HORSE TO MOVE MORE FREELY – IMPROVES BALANCE\, FITNESS AND CO ORDINATION- FEET CORRECTLY POSITIONED IN STIRRUP\, ALLOWS ANKLES\, KNEES & amp\; HIPS BECOME MORE EFFECTIVE SHOCK ABSORBERS – ENGAGE YOUR CORE (TUM MY MUSCLES) – STRAIGHT BACK – HANDS &\; ARMS INDEPENDENT KEEP CONTA CT\n11. Jumping Position \nTHIS INVOLVES THE RIDER CENTERED OVER HIS/HER FEET – STIRRUP LEATHERS 90 DEGREE ANGLE TO THE GROUND\, CONTINUING A LIN E UPWARDS FROM THE STIRRUP LEATHERS- THE HEAD\, SHOULDERS &\; KNEES FAL L IN FRONT OF THE LINE – HIPS FALL BEHIND IT\n\n LEG HANG DOWNSIDE EVEN CONTACT ALONG WHOLE LENGTH – INNER THIGH\, KNEE &\; CALF – WEIGHT ALONG BACK OF LEG INTO HEEL FLEXIBLE ANKLE \n SEAT\, HIPS &\; THIGHS –WEIGHT TOWARDS PELVIS\, ENOUGH WEIGHT IN STIRRUP TO SUSPEND IN THE AIR OVER THE SADDLE – HIPS NOT TOO FAR FORWARD IT CHANGES THE BALANCE –HIP S\, FLEXIBLE\, MOVE BACKWARDS\, BETWEEN FENCES THE THIGHS TAKE UP WEIGHT O F RIDER NOT THE SEAT BONES\n UPPER BODY\, SHOULDERS\, HEAD\, TRUNK – LO OK UP IN DIRECTION YOU ARE GOING – BACK FLAT – OPEN CHEST – SHOULDER S OPEN \n RELEASE – GRAB MANE OR SLIDE HANDS UP CREST AS TAKE OFF\n\n1 2. Single Fence Jumping  \n13. Be able to check &\; adjust girth whi le mounted  \n14. Understand &\; Explain Impulsion\nMOVEMENT OF HOES E – FORWARD AND CONTROLLED POWER – EFFECTIVE USE OF POWER IN THE HIND QUARTERS – TO ACHIEVE A HORSE MUST NOT USE SPEED BUT USE MUSCLUAR CONTRO L – HORSE RELAXED BACK WILL ALLOW HINDQUARTERS TO COME WELL UNDER ITS BO DY AND THIS IS CALLED “ENGAGED”.\n15. Understand Half halt &\; whe n Used \n(A SPONGE EFFECT ON THE REIN(S))\n16. Trotting Poles \n17. Cant er Poles\n18. Raised Trotting Poles \nTO BUILD UP MUSCLE ON TOP LINE SHOU LDERS AND BACK – MORE FLEXIBLE – ENCOURAGES LEGS TO LIFT OVER JUMPS\n1 9. Balance for Level 4\n20. Position for Level 4\n21. More Changes of Rein s &\; Other Movements  \n22. Continue Perfecting school movements and changes of reins learnt in previous Levels \n23. Canter 20m Circles\n2 4. Start Strides\n25. 15m circles in Trot (A&\;C)\n26. 10m circles in  Trot (A&\;C)\n27. Canter without Stirrups\n28. Acute Transitions\n29. Confidence\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\ n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n&nb sp\;\nLevel Five\n1. Jump combinations \n2. Gird work \n3. Knowledge of strides &\; Jumping Strides\n \;\n4. 15m circles in trot\n \;\n 5. 10m circles in trot\n6. Shallow loops\n7. Poles in canter\n\n\n\nGait\n Feet\nBoot Lengths\nSteps\n\n\nWalk\n2.5′ – 3′\n3 – 4\n1 normal\n\ n\nTrot\n3.5′ – 4′\n4.5 – 5\n1 large\n\n\nCanter\n9′ – 12′\n 12 – 16\n3 normal steps\n(9′ stride)or4 normal steps\n(12′ stride)\n \n\n\n8. Rein Back \nESTABLISH HALT – SEAT REMAIN IMMOBILE – LEGS ASK HORSE TO KEEP CONTACT WITH BIT – KEEP REIN CONTACT SOFT – MOVE BOTH L EGS BACK FROM HIP – KEEP WEIGH DOWN THROUGH BACK AND SEAT – ASK TO MOV E BACK\, LEG\, SEAT &\; REIN – WITH SEAT PRESS BACKWARDS\, UPPER BODY STAYS TALL THIS ASKS THE HORSE TO LOWER HIS CROUP AND MOVE BACK – LEG A ND REIN WORK IN ALTERNATE PAIRS\, LEG REIN 1 SIDE ASK THEN THE OTHER SIDE\ , HORSE WILL MOVE BACK IN DIAGONAL PAIRS – RELEASE PRESSURE AND THEN ASK THEM TO MOVE FORWARDS AGAIN\n9. Aids of a circle\n\n INSIDE LEG — ON G IRTH — KEEPS IMPULSION – ENGAGES INSIDE HIND LEG – ASKS FOR BEND \n OUTSIDE LEG – SLIGHTLY BEHIND THE GIRTH – CONTROLS HINDQUARTERS STOP S THEM FALLING OUT – GENERATES FORWARD MOVEMENT \n INSIDE HAND – BEN D THROUGH HORSES NECK \n OUTSIDE HAND – CONTROLS PACE – PREVENTS NEC K OVER BENDING – PREVENTS HORSE FALLING OUT THROUGH SHOULDERS\n HIPS &a mp\; SHOULDERS PARALLEL WITH HORSES SHOULDERS – BODY UPRIGHT – LOOK AH EAD ROUND THE CIRCLE\n\n10. Canter without Stirrups \n11. Continue Perfe cting Jumping Position \n12. Continue Perfecting Lighten Seat \n13. Leg Yield\nEASIEST WAY FROM ¾ LINE BACK TO THE TRACK – HELPS DEVELOP FEEL & amp\; COORDINAITON — FORWARD &\; SIDEWAYS – BODY REMAINS STRAIGHT –INSIDE FEET STEP REGULARLY &\; EVENLY INFRONT &\; ACROSS THE OUTS IDE FEET— RIDING ON 2 TRACKS\n\n TURN ON TO ¾ LINE – FEW STEPS STRAI GHT\n MOVE WEIGHT IN TO INSIDE SEAT BONE \n\n\n INSIDE LEG SLIGHTLY BEH IND THE GIRTH –PUSH THE HORSES QAURTERS FORWARDS &\; SIDWAYS TOWARDS THE TRACK \n OUTSIDE LEG ON THE GIRTH BUT IF THE HORSE STARTS TO LEAD WI TH ITS QUARTERS MOVE THE OUTSIDE LEG BACK A LITTLE ALSO HELPS KEEP MOVING FORWARDS \n INSIDE REIN – SLIGHT FLEXION TO INSIDE \n OUTSIDE REIN K EEPS HORSE STRAIGHT – PREVENTS TOO MUCH NECK BEND – CONTROL OUTSIDE SH OULDER\n AS HIT THE TRACK – REMOVE FLEXION AND MAKE HORSE STRAIGHT  \ n\n14. Shoulder In \nHIND LEGS ON LINE OF TRAVEL\, SHOULDERS DISPLACED I NSIDE — 3 TRACKS – OUTSIDE HIND LEG TRACKS ALONG WALL\, INSIDE HIND LE G &\; OUTSIDE FORELEG ON SAME TRACK PARALLEL TO WALL\, INSIDE FORELEG O N INNER TRACK PARALLEL TO WALL — BENDING BODY AROUND RIDERS INSIDE LEG W ITH POLL FLEXED TO THE INSIDE – AWAY FROM THE DIRECTION OF TRAVEL) KEEP RHYTHMIC\, RELAXED\, CONNECTED &\; WITH SOME IMPULSION – UNDERSTANDE AIDS FOR LEG YEILDING — HORSE MUST BEND CORRECTLY ON A 10M CIRCLE ASWEL L \n\n Start with a 10-meter circle\n Inside rein leads the shoulders ( and neck) off the wall while the inside leg pushes the rib cage and inside hind into the outside rein\, which catches the shoulder and produces the half halt. The outside leg behind the girth keeps the haunches from fallin g out.\n Weight equal on both sides\,Horse follows your weight. If you si t to the inside too much\, the horse might move in that direction and off the wall.\n Your shoulders and hips should be turned inside slightly para llel to the horse’s shoulders so the outside hip and shoulder move forwa rd\n Horses shoulders should be on the wall at the end of the movement fr om the inside leg. Don’t stay in the shoulder-in for too long. There is no test that has the exercise ridden for more than half the long side (30 meters).\n\n15. Dressage tests \n16. Course work\n17. Flying Changes \ n\n\n\n\n\n\nASKING FOR LEFT FLYING CHANGE \n\n SEAT – RIGHT SEAT BONE FORWARDS TOWARDS HORSES RIGHT EAR \n RIGHT LEG – CLOSE RIGHT LEG ON G IRTH ASK HORSE TO GO FORWARDS DURING CHANGE \n LEFT LEG – MOVE LEFT LE G BEHIND THE GIRTH SIGNAL NEW OUTSIDE HIND LEG TO STRIKE OFF INTO NEW LEAD – QUICK AID \n LEFT REIN – CLOSE LEFT HAND IN A FIST TO KEEP LEFT H IND LEG ON GROUND AND MAINTAIN UPHILL BALANCE \n RIGHT REIN – SOFTEN R IGHT REIN SO NOT TO BLOCK NEW INSIDE FRONT LEG FROM COMING FORWARD\n\n18.  Turn on the Forehand\n\n HALT\, TO STOP FORWARD MOVEMENT APPLY STEADY P RESSURE ON REINS – SIT UP STRAIGHT \n PRESSURE PLACED 3-4 INCHS BEHIND THE GIRTH WITH YOUR OUTSIDE LEG – HORSE WILL MOVE AWAY FROM THE PRESSUR E\, HORSES HIND LEGS WILL MOVE IN FRONT &\; ACROSS THE OTHER HIND LEG\, THE OPPOSITE FRONT LEG TO YOUR PRESSURE LEG WILL ALSO MOVE AROUND THE OTH ER FRONT LEG WILL STAY STILL \n YOUR OTHER LEG (INSIDE) SHOULD BE KEPT S TEADY SO TO KEEP YOUR BALANCE AND STOP THE HORSE TRYING TO TURN TOO QUICKL Y \n REINS TO CONTROL FRONT OF HORSE – GOOD CONTROL PREVENTS YOUR HORS E MOVING FORWARDS – OUTSIDE HAND LIFT UP AND BACK TO FLEX HORSES NECK SL IGHTLY IN THE DIRECTION OF TURN\, FLEX UNTIL YOU CAN SEE CORNER OF EYE – USE OTHER REIN FOR SUPPORT TO KEEP HORSE FROM MOVING FORWARDS\, OUTSIDE R EIN CLOSE TO NECK   \n HALF HALT EACH STEP UNTIL COMPLETE TURN 180 DEG REES – POSITVIE PRAISE AFTER \n\n\n TURNING RIGHT RIGHT LEG BACK – R IGHT REIN FLEX \n TURNING LEFT LEFT LEG BACK – LEFT REIN FLEX \n\n19.  Outline\nCORRECT OUTLINE IS OUTCOME OF BUILD UP OF CORRECT MUSCLE – BE NEFITS OF BEING RIDDEN IN THIS FRAME\, NEEDS TO BE WORKING CORRECTLY\, MOV E FREELY IN CONTACT\, BACK RAISED &\; SUPPLE\, NECK EXTEND IN LIGHT ARC H FROM WITHER TO POLL WITH NOSE JUST IN FRONT OF THE VERTICAL.\n\nBalance\ n\n Aim to maintain a light rein contact to encourage the horse to stay i n balance. Horse who is unbalanced and in particular heavy on their foreha nd will lean on the bit and the reins pulling the rider’s arms forward.\ n\nStretching\n\n When the rider moves their hands in a forward direction combined with the use of their leg and seat pushing\, the horse to remain engaged through their hindquarters and light on the bit thereby allowing the rider to open out the horses neck and frame.\n Stretching can be used when asking for free walk on a long rein or when opening the horses strid e out\, for example when riding lengthened strides.  \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\ n\n\n20. Footfall \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n2 1. Acute Transitions\n22. Balance  \n23. Position\n24. Self Confidence  \n25. Helping the Horse\n26. Confidence and ALL horses within the Riding S chool   \n\nLevel Six\n1. More work on Strides\n\n\n\n \n12hh\n15hh\n17 hh\n\n\nTrot to Bounce\n7-8ft\n9-10ft\n11-12ft\n\n\nCanter to Bounce\n8-9f t\n10-11ft\n12-13ft\n\n\nTrot Double 1 stride\n14-16ft\n17-19ft\n20-22ft\n \n\nCanter Double 1 stride\n17-19ft\n20-22ft\n23-25ft\n\n\nTrot Double 2 s tride \n23-25ft\n27-29ft \n31-33ft\n\n\nCanter Double 2 stride\n26-28ft\ n30-32ft\n34-36ft \n\n\nTreble – usually 1st part 1 stride\, 2nd part 2 strides \n\n\n\n2. More Grid work\n3. Aids to Canter\n4. Aids on a Cir cle\n5. more combination work\n6. Flying Change on Figure of 8\n7. Outline \n8. Turn on the Haunches\n9. Acute Transitions\n10. Canter Leg Yield\n11. Balance\n12. Position\n13. Fluent over course\n14. Drill work\n15. Flying change on straight\n16. Continue perfecting everything you have learnt ov er the levels – Keep going you never stop learning and improving \n17. Lunging/Groundwork\n\n\n\n END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:9803@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251204T130000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251204T140000 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/little-tigers-2/ SUMMARY:Little Tigers DESCRIPTION: \;\nYou will need to be Registered and Added your Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk You will also of had to be gr aded to see what level you are with us and then you will be able to see wh at availability we have\n\n\n\n\nIntroducing our younger riders &\; rid ers that need additions support!\nCome along to Bank Farm Riding School an d meet our friendly ponies who just can't wait to be pampered and petted b y you.\n\nEach session lasts 1hour. The session includes a short ride on a pony\, or just a sit on\, for those that want.\n\nWork through a Little T igers Syllabus and receive a Certificate upon completion - fun way for chi ldren and adults to learn more about ponies\n\nblock booking discount same day per week Courses will be on Mondays 10.30am-11.30am\, Thursdays 1pm-2 pm &\; Fridays 10.30am-11.30am\n\nParents/carer/guardian will be requir ed to assist their rider - the instructor will go through everything with you on the day please wear a shoe\, boot or wellie with a slight heal noth ing flat soled. leggings or jogging bottoms\, no skirts or shorts\n\n\n\n\ n END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:6036@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251204T180000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251204T190000 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/mixed-level-group-lesson-3/ SUMMARY:Mixed Level Group Lesson DESCRIPTION: \;\nYou will need to be Registered and Added your Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk You will also of had to be gr aded to see what level you are with us and then you will be able to see wh at availability we have\nLevel Three\n1. Explain prepare to Canter\n(CHECK POSTIION\, SHORTEN REINS SLIGHTLY\, HALF HALT BUT KEEP LEG ON\, SITTING T ROT\, ASK AS GOING IN TO THE CORNER\, INSIDE BEND FOR CORRECT CANTER LEAD) \n 2. Explain &\; Use Aids to canter\n(SITTING TROT –\n\nLITTLE BIT MORE WEIGHT ON THE INSIDE SEAT BONE YOUR SEAT DRAWS UP THE HIND LEG STRONG RHYTHM -–\n\nINSIDE LEG ON THE GIRTH ASKS FOR MILD BEND TO PREPARE THE INSIDE LEAD &\; HELPS WITH BALANCE-\n\nINSIDE REIN DOES VERY LITTLE ACT S AS A NECK REIN IT SITS THERE AND PREVENTS HORSE DRIFTING OUT –\n\n1 TO 3 HALF HALTS BEFORE TRANSITION TO BALANCE WEIGHT TO THE HIND END KEEP LEG S ON FOR IMPULSION AFTER THE HALF HALTS —\n\nOUTSIDE LEG SLIGHTLY BACK B EHIND THE GIRTH TELLS THEM WHICH LEAD BEHIND\n\nOUTSIDE REIN HELP TO CONTR OL SPEED AND KEEP THEM OUT ON THE TRACK)\n3. Figure of 8s\n(2 20M CIRCLES PUT TOGETHER – NO STRAIGHT LINES)\n4. Serpentines\n(NO STRAIGHT LINES bu t when starting to learn a serpentine it is best to rid the straight line then the loop will become better with practice\, LOOPS\, EACH TIME CROSS O VER THE CENTER LINE SHOULD CHANGE DIAGONAL\, LOOPS EQUAL) (3 LOOP\, 4 LOOP \, 5 LOOPS ECT)\n\n(diagrams are 3 loops serpentine)\n5. Trot 20m circles from E &\; B \n6. Balance Canter\n 7. Understand &\; Explain Cant er Lead\n(HORSES FRONT INSIDE LEG SHOULD STRIKE OUT FURTHER FORWARD THAN T HE OUTSIDE FRONT LEG\n\nTHEY TAKE OFF WITH THERE OUTSIDE BACK LEG AND LEAD WITH THERE INSIDE FRONT\n\n(THEY CAN BE CORRECT WITH FRONT LEGS AND INCOR RECT WITH BACK LEGS WHICH IS CALLED MANY NAMES BUT WE USE THE TERM DIS-UNI TED THIS USUALLY FEELS AWFUL\, BUMPY &\; OFF BALANCE. BACK TO TROT AND ASK AGAIN)\n\n(IF THE HORSE IS INCORRECT IN FRONT BACK TO TROT ASK AGAIN)\ n 8. Check Canter Lead Whilst mounted\n 9. Walk without stirrups\n 10 . Trot without stirrups\n 11. Adjust Own Stirrups\n 12. Understand bea ts of Pace\, Walk\, Trot &\; Canter\n\n WALK IS 4 BEAT EACH FOOT HITS THE GROUND INDEPENDENTLY\n\nThe footfall sequence is:\n\nLeft Hind – Lef t Front – Right Hind – Right Front.\n\n TROT IS A 2 BEAT FEET GO IN D IAGONAL PAIRS\n\nThe footfall sequence is:\n\nLeft Hind + Right Front – Suspension – Right Hind + Left Front – Suspension\n\n CANTER IS A 3 B EAT 1 PAIR OF FEET STRIKE AND THE OTHER 2 LAND INDEPENDENTLY\n\nRight Lead Canter\n\nLeft Hind – Right Hind + Left Front – Right Front – Suspe nsion\n\nLeft Lead Canter\n\nRight Hind – Left Hind + Right Front – Le ft Front – Suspension\n\n DON’T NEED TO KNOW GALLOP BUT IF THEY WANT TO KNOW IT IS 4 BEAT SEQUENCE\n\nRight Lead Gallop\n\nLeft Hind – Right Hind – Left Front – Right Front – Suspension\n\nLeft Lead Gallop\n\n Right Hind – Left Hind – Right Front – Left Front – Suspension\n13 .  Position for Level 3\n(VERTICAL LINE EAR- SHOULDER- HIP – HEEL\, EYE S UP AND AHEAD\, STRAIGHT LINE FROM ELBOWS SOFT WITH SLIGHT BEND – HAND DOWN THE REIN TO THE HORSES MOUTH\, THUMBS ON TOP POINTING TOWARDS HORSES EARS\, SIT EQUALLY ARCROSS BOTH SEAT BONES\, RELAX SEAT\, HIPS &\; PELV IS\, KNEE &\; THIGH REST LIGHTLY AGAINS SADDLE NOT GRIPPING)\n 14.   Understand Aids (Natural &\; Artificial)\n\n COMMUNICATION BETWEEN RID ERS AND HORSE)\n ARTIFICIAL AIDS- MAINLY WHIPS &\; SPURS\n NATURAL AI DS- VOICE\, HANDS\, LEGS\, BODY\, SEAT\n\n(HANDS – COMMUNICATION THROUGH REINS TO THE BIT\, SHOULD BE LIGHT FLEXIBLE- USE OF HAND AID MUST BE USED WITH SEAT\, LEG AIDS- ABOVE HORSES WITHERS LEVEL WITH EACH OTHER\n\n TUR NING – GENTLE SQUEEZING THE REIN ASKS THE HORSE TO TURN HEAD IN THAT DIR ECTION\n HALTING –PRESSURE ON BOTH REINS WITH SEAT AND LEG PROVEDING EN ERGY A HALT WILL PRODUCED\n\n(VOICE – WORD\, TONE &\; LENGTH OF TIME THE WORD IS HELD FOR INDICATES UPWARDS/DOWNWARDS TRANSITIONS\n\n UPWARD T RANSITION – EMPHASIS THE LETTER WITH RISE IN TONE TOWARDS END OF WORD\n DOWNWARD TRANSITION – LOWER TONE TOWRDS END OF WORD STRETCH THE WORD OU T\n COLLECTION – CALM\n\n(SEAT – COLLECTION\, BALANCE\, STEERING\, FO RWARD MOVEMENT\, CONTROL\, STABILITY\n\n SEAT – CENTRAL IN SADDLE\, EVE N DISTRIBUTION OF WEIGHT OFN SEAT BONES\, ALTER WHEN ASK HORSE TO MOVE DIR ECTION\, DO NOT COLLAPSE THROUGH HIP\n HIPS –LEVEL AT ALL TIMES\, SUPPL E TO ALLOW MOVEMENT ABSORBED THROUGH SEAT\n PELVIS – ABSORD MOVEMENT\, HELPS CONTROL CENTRE OF GRAVITY\, ENCOURANGES HORSE TO ACCELERATE\n\n(LEGS – USED WITH SEAT &\; HAND TO COMMUNICATE – DIRECTION\, GAIT\, LEVE L OF ACTIVITY\, UPWARD DOWNWARD TRANSITIONS\, LATERAL MOVEMENTS\n\n ON TH E GIRTH – PRODUCES ENERGY/FORWARD MOVEMENT – BOTH LEGS ON THE GIRTH FO RWARD/STRAIGHT\, 1 LEG BEHIND THE GIRTH WILL ASK EITHER CHANGE DIRECTION O R CANTER DEPENDING ON LEVEL OF PRESSURE\n LOWER LEG BEHIND THE GIRTH – ABOUT 2-3 INCHES MORE CONTROL OVER HINDQUARTERS- FORWARD\, BACKWARD\, DIAG ONALLY OR SIDEWAYS MOVEMENTS\, UPWARD TRANSITIONS EG CANTER OR LATERAL MOV EMENT EG LEG YIELD\, BOTH LEGS BEHIND THE GIRTH CORRECT USE WITH SEAT AND LEGS WILL AID REIN BACK\n\n(WHIP – INSIDE HAND USED TO BACK UP RIDERS LE G AND ENCOURAGE HORSE TO MOVE FORWARD)\n\n(SPURS – ON THE RIDERS HEEL TO GIVE PRECISE LEG AID ONLY WORN BY EXPERIENCED RIDERS)\n 15. Balance\n16 . Check Girth\nLevel Four\n1. Continue working on Balanced Cantering \n2. Trotting Pole without stirrups \n3. 7 phases of jumping\n\n (TURN -APPR OARCH-TAKE OFF-FLIGHT-LAND-GET-AWAY- TURN)\n REMAIN BALANCED\n IMPULSION \n POSITION – OPEN SHOULDERS ON TURN \n 1. TURN  – ACCURATELY – LINE UP WITH CENTRE – SIT UP – LOOK AHEAD – RIDE LEG TO HAND – KE EP BALANCED RHYTHM – IMPULSION\n  2. APPROACH  – CENTRE OF JUMP – SIT UP – LOOK AHEAD CHANNELING HORSE FORWARD – BETWEEN HAND &\; LEG TO MAINTAIN STRAIGHT LINE – MAINTAIN IMPULSION &\; BALANCE\n 3. TAKE OFF – POINT WHICH HORSE GATHERS HINDLEGS UNDERNEATH ITS BODY & \; STARTS TO LIFT FOREHAND – LOWER LEG SECURELY WRAPPED ROUND – MAINTA IN ENERGY &\; FORWARDNESS – HANDS FOLLOW MOVEMENT OF HORSES HEAD NECK BUT MAINTAIN CONTACT THROUGH REIN – LOOK AHEAD\n 4. FLIGHT – IN THE AIR – FOREHAND WELL LIFTED\, BACK WELL ROUNDED\, FORELEGS &\; HINDLEG S TUCKED UP – FOLDED IN TO JUMPING POSITION\, UPPER BODY LOWERED\, SEAT SLIPPED TO BACK OF SADDLE – HANDS ALLOW STRETCH THE NECK\, BACK &\; B ODY GIVES FREEDOM OF MOVEMENT\, WHILE MAINTAINING LIGHT CONTACT – LOWER LEG STAYS SECURELY WRAPPED AROUND MAINTAIN BALANCE\n 5. LAND – HORSE STRETCHES OUT &\; EXTENDS FORELEGS READY TO LAND – HORSE SHOULD LAND ON FORELEG WANTING THE CANTER LEAD ON – UPPER BODY COMES BACK UP – MAI NTAIN CONTACT – LEGS REMAIN IN POSTION – LOOK AHEAD\n 6. GET AWAY   ­­- MOVING AWAY FROM THE JUMP TO THE NEXT – MAKE SURE HORSE IS BALAN CED\, PLENTY OF ENERGY &\; IMPULSION- CORRECT CANTER LEAD – LEGS SECU RE\n 7. TURN –  TURNS AWAY FROM ONE FENCE TO ANOTHER THIS STAGE STAR TS ALL OVER AGAIN OR IF SINGLE FENCE STAY STRAIGHT\n\n4/5. Able Ride A Dem i Voltes &\; Reverse Demi Voltes\n\n DEMI VOLTE – ½ 10 MENTRE CIRCL E TO THE CENTRE LINE THEN A DIAGONAL LINE BACK TO THE TRACK TO CHANGE THE REIN\n REVERSE DEMI VOLTE – DIAGONAL LINE TO CENTRE LINE LETTER THEN ½ 10 METRE CIRCLE BACK TO THE TRACK TO CHANGE THE REIN \n\n6. 2X ½ 10 met re Circles to change the rein  \n7. Turn on the Forehand\n\n HALT\, TO STOP FORWARD MOVEMENT APPLY STEADY PRESSURE ON REINS – SIT UP STRAIGHT  \n PRESSURE PLACED 3-4 INCHS BEHIND THE GIRTH WITH YOUR OUTSIDE LEG – H ORSE WILL MOVE AWAY FROM THE PRESSURE\, HORSES HIND LEGS WILL MOVE IN FRON T &\; ACROSS THE OTHER HIND LEG\, THE OPPOSITE FRONT LEG TO YOUR PRESSU RE LEG WILL ALSO MOVE AROUND THE OTHER FRONT LEG WILL STAY STILL \n YOUR OTHER LEG (INSIDE) SHOULD BE KEPT STEADY SO TO KEEP YOUR BALANCE AND STOP THE HORSE TRYING TO TURN TOO QUICKLY \n REINS TO CONTROL FRONT OF HORSE – GOOD CONTROL PREVENTS YOUR HORSE MOVING FORWARDS – OUTSIDE HAND LIF T UP AND BACK TO FLEX HORSES NECK SLIGHTLY IN THE DIRECTION OF TURN\, FLEX UNTIL YOU CAN SEE CORNER OF EYE – USE OTHER REIN FOR SUPPORT TO KEEP HO RSE FROM MOVING FORWARDS\, OUTSIDE REIN CLOSE TO NECK   \n HALF HALT E ACH STEP UNTIL COMPLETE TURN 180 DEGREES – POSITVIE PRAISE AFTER \n TU RNING RIGHT RIGHT LEG BACK – RIGHT REIN FLEX \n TURNING LEFT LEFT LEG BACK – LEFT REIN FLEX\n\n8. 15m circles in walk  (A&\;C)\n9. 10m ci rcles in walk (A&\;C)  \n10. Lighten seat \nINVOLVES STANDING ON YOU R OWN 2 FEET WHILE WORKING YOUR HORSE – BALANCE YOURSELF\, NO LEANING\, HOLDING ON CROUCHING DOWN ON NECK – CLEARANCE BETWEEN BOTTOM AND SADDLE – ALLOWS HORSE TO MOVE MORE FREELY – IMPROVES BALANCE\, FITNESS AND CO ORDINATION- FEET CORRECTLY POSITIONED IN STIRRUP\, ALLOWS ANKLES\, KNEES & amp\; HIPS BECOME MORE EFFECTIVE SHOCK ABSORBERS – ENGAGE YOUR CORE (TUM MY MUSCLES) – STRAIGHT BACK – HANDS &\; ARMS INDEPENDENT KEEP CONTA CT\n11. Jumping Position \nTHIS INVOLVES THE RIDER CENTERED OVER HIS/HER FEET – STIRRUP LEATHERS 90 DEGREE ANGLE TO THE GROUND\, CONTINUING A LIN E UPWARDS FROM THE STIRRUP LEATHERS- THE HEAD\, SHOULDERS &\; KNEES FAL L IN FRONT OF THE LINE – HIPS FALL BEHIND IT\n\n LEG HANG DOWNSIDE EVEN CONTACT ALONG WHOLE LENGTH – INNER THIGH\, KNEE &\; CALF – WEIGHT ALONG BACK OF LEG INTO HEEL FLEXIBLE ANKLE \n SEAT\, HIPS &\; THIGHS –WEIGHT TOWARDS PELVIS\, ENOUGH WEIGHT IN STIRRUP TO SUSPEND IN THE AIR OVER THE SADDLE – HIPS NOT TOO FAR FORWARD IT CHANGES THE BALANCE –HIP S\, FLEXIBLE\, MOVE BACKWARDS\, BETWEEN FENCES THE THIGHS TAKE UP WEIGHT O F RIDER NOT THE SEAT BONES\n UPPER BODY\, SHOULDERS\, HEAD\, TRUNK – LO OK UP IN DIRECTION YOU ARE GOING – BACK FLAT – OPEN CHEST – SHOULDER S OPEN \n RELEASE – GRAB MANE OR SLIDE HANDS UP CREST AS TAKE OFF\n\n1 2. Single Fence Jumping  \n13. Be able to check &\; adjust girth whi le mounted  \n14. Understand &\; Explain Impulsion\nMOVEMENT OF HOES E – FORWARD AND CONTROLLED POWER – EFFECTIVE USE OF POWER IN THE HIND QUARTERS – TO ACHIEVE A HORSE MUST NOT USE SPEED BUT USE MUSCLUAR CONTRO L – HORSE RELAXED BACK WILL ALLOW HINDQUARTERS TO COME WELL UNDER ITS BO DY AND THIS IS CALLED “ENGAGED”.\n15. Understand Half halt &\; whe n Used \n(A SPONGE EFFECT ON THE REIN(S))\n16. Trotting Poles \n17. Cant er Poles\n18. Raised Trotting Poles \nTO BUILD UP MUSCLE ON TOP LINE SHOU LDERS AND BACK – MORE FLEXIBLE – ENCOURAGES LEGS TO LIFT OVER JUMPS\n1 9. Balance for Level 4\n20. Position for Level 4\n21. More Changes of Rein s &\; Other Movements  \n22. Continue Perfecting school movements and changes of reins learnt in previous Levels \n23. Canter 20m Circles\n2 4. Start Strides\n25. 15m circles in Trot (A&\;C)\n26. 10m circles in  Trot (A&\;C)\n27. Canter without Stirrups\n28. Acute Transitions\n29. Confidence\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\ n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n&nb sp\;\nLevel Five\n1. Jump combinations \n2. Gird work \n3. Knowledge of strides &\; Jumping Strides\n \;\n4. 15m circles in trot\n \;\n 5. 10m circles in trot\n6. Shallow loops\n7. Poles in canter\n\n\n\nGait\n Feet\nBoot Lengths\nSteps\n\n\nWalk\n2.5′ – 3′\n3 – 4\n1 normal\n\ n\nTrot\n3.5′ – 4′\n4.5 – 5\n1 large\n\n\nCanter\n9′ – 12′\n 12 – 16\n3 normal steps\n(9′ stride)or4 normal steps\n(12′ stride)\n \n\n\n8. Rein Back \nESTABLISH HALT – SEAT REMAIN IMMOBILE – LEGS ASK HORSE TO KEEP CONTACT WITH BIT – KEEP REIN CONTACT SOFT – MOVE BOTH L EGS BACK FROM HIP – KEEP WEIGH DOWN THROUGH BACK AND SEAT – ASK TO MOV E BACK\, LEG\, SEAT &\; REIN – WITH SEAT PRESS BACKWARDS\, UPPER BODY STAYS TALL THIS ASKS THE HORSE TO LOWER HIS CROUP AND MOVE BACK – LEG A ND REIN WORK IN ALTERNATE PAIRS\, LEG REIN 1 SIDE ASK THEN THE OTHER SIDE\ , HORSE WILL MOVE BACK IN DIAGONAL PAIRS – RELEASE PRESSURE AND THEN ASK THEM TO MOVE FORWARDS AGAIN\n9. Aids of a circle\n\n INSIDE LEG — ON G IRTH — KEEPS IMPULSION – ENGAGES INSIDE HIND LEG – ASKS FOR BEND \n OUTSIDE LEG – SLIGHTLY BEHIND THE GIRTH – CONTROLS HINDQUARTERS STOP S THEM FALLING OUT – GENERATES FORWARD MOVEMENT \n INSIDE HAND – BEN D THROUGH HORSES NECK \n OUTSIDE HAND – CONTROLS PACE – PREVENTS NEC K OVER BENDING – PREVENTS HORSE FALLING OUT THROUGH SHOULDERS\n HIPS &a mp\; SHOULDERS PARALLEL WITH HORSES SHOULDERS – BODY UPRIGHT – LOOK AH EAD ROUND THE CIRCLE\n\n10. Canter without Stirrups \n11. Continue Perfe cting Jumping Position \n12. Continue Perfecting Lighten Seat \n13. Leg Yield\nEASIEST WAY FROM ¾ LINE BACK TO THE TRACK – HELPS DEVELOP FEEL & amp\; COORDINAITON — FORWARD &\; SIDEWAYS – BODY REMAINS STRAIGHT –INSIDE FEET STEP REGULARLY &\; EVENLY INFRONT &\; ACROSS THE OUTS IDE FEET— RIDING ON 2 TRACKS\n\n TURN ON TO ¾ LINE – FEW STEPS STRAI GHT\n MOVE WEIGHT IN TO INSIDE SEAT BONE \n\n\n INSIDE LEG SLIGHTLY BEH IND THE GIRTH –PUSH THE HORSES QAURTERS FORWARDS &\; SIDWAYS TOWARDS THE TRACK \n OUTSIDE LEG ON THE GIRTH BUT IF THE HORSE STARTS TO LEAD WI TH ITS QUARTERS MOVE THE OUTSIDE LEG BACK A LITTLE ALSO HELPS KEEP MOVING FORWARDS \n INSIDE REIN – SLIGHT FLEXION TO INSIDE \n OUTSIDE REIN K EEPS HORSE STRAIGHT – PREVENTS TOO MUCH NECK BEND – CONTROL OUTSIDE SH OULDER\n AS HIT THE TRACK – REMOVE FLEXION AND MAKE HORSE STRAIGHT  \ n\n14. Shoulder In \nHIND LEGS ON LINE OF TRAVEL\, SHOULDERS DISPLACED I NSIDE — 3 TRACKS – OUTSIDE HIND LEG TRACKS ALONG WALL\, INSIDE HIND LE G &\; OUTSIDE FORELEG ON SAME TRACK PARALLEL TO WALL\, INSIDE FORELEG O N INNER TRACK PARALLEL TO WALL — BENDING BODY AROUND RIDERS INSIDE LEG W ITH POLL FLEXED TO THE INSIDE – AWAY FROM THE DIRECTION OF TRAVEL) KEEP RHYTHMIC\, RELAXED\, CONNECTED &\; WITH SOME IMPULSION – UNDERSTANDE AIDS FOR LEG YEILDING — HORSE MUST BEND CORRECTLY ON A 10M CIRCLE ASWEL L \n\n Start with a 10-meter circle\n Inside rein leads the shoulders ( and neck) off the wall while the inside leg pushes the rib cage and inside hind into the outside rein\, which catches the shoulder and produces the half halt. The outside leg behind the girth keeps the haunches from fallin g out.\n Weight equal on both sides\,Horse follows your weight. If you si t to the inside too much\, the horse might move in that direction and off the wall.\n Your shoulders and hips should be turned inside slightly para llel to the horse’s shoulders so the outside hip and shoulder move forwa rd\n Horses shoulders should be on the wall at the end of the movement fr om the inside leg. Don’t stay in the shoulder-in for too long. There is no test that has the exercise ridden for more than half the long side (30 meters).\n\n15. Dressage tests \n16. Course work\n17. Flying Changes \ n\n\n\n\n\n\nASKING FOR LEFT FLYING CHANGE \n\n SEAT – RIGHT SEAT BONE FORWARDS TOWARDS HORSES RIGHT EAR \n RIGHT LEG – CLOSE RIGHT LEG ON G IRTH ASK HORSE TO GO FORWARDS DURING CHANGE \n LEFT LEG – MOVE LEFT LE G BEHIND THE GIRTH SIGNAL NEW OUTSIDE HIND LEG TO STRIKE OFF INTO NEW LEAD – QUICK AID \n LEFT REIN – CLOSE LEFT HAND IN A FIST TO KEEP LEFT H IND LEG ON GROUND AND MAINTAIN UPHILL BALANCE \n RIGHT REIN – SOFTEN R IGHT REIN SO NOT TO BLOCK NEW INSIDE FRONT LEG FROM COMING FORWARD\n\n18.  Turn on the Forehand\n\n HALT\, TO STOP FORWARD MOVEMENT APPLY STEADY P RESSURE ON REINS – SIT UP STRAIGHT \n PRESSURE PLACED 3-4 INCHS BEHIND THE GIRTH WITH YOUR OUTSIDE LEG – HORSE WILL MOVE AWAY FROM THE PRESSUR E\, HORSES HIND LEGS WILL MOVE IN FRONT &\; ACROSS THE OTHER HIND LEG\, THE OPPOSITE FRONT LEG TO YOUR PRESSURE LEG WILL ALSO MOVE AROUND THE OTH ER FRONT LEG WILL STAY STILL \n YOUR OTHER LEG (INSIDE) SHOULD BE KEPT S TEADY SO TO KEEP YOUR BALANCE AND STOP THE HORSE TRYING TO TURN TOO QUICKL Y \n REINS TO CONTROL FRONT OF HORSE – GOOD CONTROL PREVENTS YOUR HORS E MOVING FORWARDS – OUTSIDE HAND LIFT UP AND BACK TO FLEX HORSES NECK SL IGHTLY IN THE DIRECTION OF TURN\, FLEX UNTIL YOU CAN SEE CORNER OF EYE – USE OTHER REIN FOR SUPPORT TO KEEP HORSE FROM MOVING FORWARDS\, OUTSIDE R EIN CLOSE TO NECK   \n HALF HALT EACH STEP UNTIL COMPLETE TURN 180 DEG REES – POSITVIE PRAISE AFTER \n\n\n TURNING RIGHT RIGHT LEG BACK – R IGHT REIN FLEX \n TURNING LEFT LEFT LEG BACK – LEFT REIN FLEX \n\n19.  Outline\nCORRECT OUTLINE IS OUTCOME OF BUILD UP OF CORRECT MUSCLE – BE NEFITS OF BEING RIDDEN IN THIS FRAME\, NEEDS TO BE WORKING CORRECTLY\, MOV E FREELY IN CONTACT\, BACK RAISED &\; SUPPLE\, NECK EXTEND IN LIGHT ARC H FROM WITHER TO POLL WITH NOSE JUST IN FRONT OF THE VERTICAL.\n\nBalance\ n\n Aim to maintain a light rein contact to encourage the horse to stay i n balance. Horse who is unbalanced and in particular heavy on their foreha nd will lean on the bit and the reins pulling the rider’s arms forward.\ n\nStretching\n\n When the rider moves their hands in a forward direction combined with the use of their leg and seat pushing\, the horse to remain engaged through their hindquarters and light on the bit thereby allowing the rider to open out the horses neck and frame.\n Stretching can be used when asking for free walk on a long rein or when opening the horses strid e out\, for example when riding lengthened strides.  \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\ n\n\n20. Footfall \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n2 1. Acute Transitions\n22. Balance  \n23. Position\n24. Self Confidence  \n25. Helping the Horse\n26. Confidence and ALL horses within the Riding S chool   \n\nLevel Six\n1. More work on Strides\n\n\n\n \n12hh\n15hh\n17 hh\n\n\nTrot to Bounce\n7-8ft\n9-10ft\n11-12ft\n\n\nCanter to Bounce\n8-9f t\n10-11ft\n12-13ft\n\n\nTrot Double 1 stride\n14-16ft\n17-19ft\n20-22ft\n \n\nCanter Double 1 stride\n17-19ft\n20-22ft\n23-25ft\n\n\nTrot Double 2 s tride \n23-25ft\n27-29ft \n31-33ft\n\n\nCanter Double 2 stride\n26-28ft\ n30-32ft\n34-36ft \n\n\nTreble – usually 1st part 1 stride\, 2nd part 2 strides \n\n\n\n2. More Grid work\n3. Aids to Canter\n4. Aids on a Cir cle\n5. more combination work\n6. Flying Change on Figure of 8\n7. Outline \n8. Turn on the Haunches\n9. Acute Transitions\n10. Canter Leg Yield\n11. Balance\n12. Position\n13. Fluent over course\n14. Drill work\n15. Flying change on straight\n16. Continue perfecting everything you have learnt ov er the levels – Keep going you never stop learning and improving \n17. Lunging/Groundwork\n\n\n\n END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:9281@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251205T103000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251205T113000 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/little-tigers/ SUMMARY:Little Tigers DESCRIPTION: \;\nYou will need to be Registered and Added your Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk You will also of had to be gr aded to see what level you are with us and then you will be able to see wh at availability we have\n\n\n\n\nIntroducing our younger riders &\; rid ers that need additions support!\nCome along to Bank Farm Riding School an d meet our friendly ponies who just can't wait to be pampered and petted b y you.\n\nEach session lasts 1hour. The session includes a short ride on a pony\, or just a sit on\, for those that want.\n\nWork through a Little T igers Syllabus and receive a Certificate upon completion - fun way for chi ldren and adults to learn more about ponies\n\nblock booking discount same day per week Courses will be on Mondays 10.30am-11.30am\, Thursdays 1pm-2 pm &\; Fridays 10.30am-11.30am\n\nParents/carer/guardian will be requir ed to assist their rider - the instructor will go through everything with you on the day please wear a shoe\, boot or wellie with a slight heal noth ing flat soled. leggings or jogging bottoms\, no skirts or shorts\n\n\n\n\ n END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:6559@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251205T170000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251205T180000 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/jumping-lesson/ SUMMARY:Multi Discipline Lesson DESCRIPTION:Multi Discipline Lesson\n\nwill change on a weekly basis\n\ncov ering - Jumping\, Ridden &\; In Hand Showing\, Dressage &\; more\n\n different discipline from week to week\n\n(Have a Practice at jumping comb inations and having a go a fillers\, broaden you knowlegde on approach\, t urns\, landing\, get away and prep for your upcoming fence)\n\nMAX OF 5 RI DERS (if only 1 person this will change to a 30min private)\n\nThis activi ty requires a high level of teamwork between horse and rider\, while testi ng the rider’s skill and the horse or pony’s power\, scope\, speed\, a thleticism\, and carefulness.  \n\nWith training and practice\, competit ors work together with their team mate to accomplish their goals.  END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:3669@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251206T090000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251206T144500 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/level-5-6-group-lesson-2/ SUMMARY:Level 5/6 Group Lesson DESCRIPTION: \;\nLevel 5/6 Group Lesson\n\n\n\nYou will need to Registe r Add your Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk \nYou will of had to of been graded to see what level lessons you can book \nand the n you will be able to see what availability we have\n \;\n\n\n\n\n\nLe vel Five\n1. Jump combinations \n2. Gird work \n3. Knowledge of strides &\; Jumping Strides\n \;\n4. 15m circles in trot\n \;\n5. 10m c ircles in trot\n6. Shallow loops\n7. Poles in canter\n\n\n\nGait\nFeet\nBo ot Lengths\nSteps\n\n\nWalk\n2.5′ – 3′\n3 – 4\n1 normal\n\n\nTrot\ n3.5′ – 4′\n4.5 – 5\n1 large\n\n\nCanter\n9′ – 12′\n12 – 1 6\n3 normal steps\n(9′ stride)or4 normal steps\n(12′ stride)\n\n\n\n8. Rein Back \nESTABLISH HALT – SEAT REMAIN IMMOBILE – LEGS ASK HORSE T O KEEP CONTACT WITH BIT – KEEP REIN CONTACT SOFT – MOVE BOTH LEGS BACK FROM HIP – KEEP WEIGH DOWN THROUGH BACK AND SEAT – ASK TO MOVE BACK\, LEG\, SEAT &\; REIN – WITH SEAT PRESS BACKWARDS\, UPPER BODY STAYS T ALL THIS ASKS THE HORSE TO LOWER HIS CROUP AND MOVE BACK – LEG AND REIN WORK IN ALTERNATE PAIRS\, LEG REIN 1 SIDE ASK THEN THE OTHER SIDE\, HORSE WILL MOVE BACK IN DIAGONAL PAIRS – RELEASE PRESSURE AND THEN ASK THEM TO MOVE FORWARDS AGAIN\n9. Aids of a circle\n\n INSIDE LEG — ON GIRTH — KEEPS IMPULSION – ENGAGES INSIDE HIND LEG – ASKS FOR BEND \n OUTSID E LEG – SLIGHTLY BEHIND THE GIRTH – CONTROLS HINDQUARTERS STOPS THEM F ALLING OUT – GENERATES FORWARD MOVEMENT \n INSIDE HAND – BEND THROUG H HORSES NECK \n OUTSIDE HAND – CONTROLS PACE – PREVENTS NECK OVER B ENDING – PREVENTS HORSE FALLING OUT THROUGH SHOULDERS\n HIPS &\; SHO ULDERS PARALLEL WITH HORSES SHOULDERS – BODY UPRIGHT – LOOK AHEAD ROUN D THE CIRCLE\n\n10. Canter without Stirrups \n11. Continue Perfecting Ju mping Position \n12. Continue Perfecting Lighten Seat \n13. Leg Yield\nE ASIEST WAY FROM ¾ LINE BACK TO THE TRACK – HELPS DEVELOP FEEL &\; CO ORDINAITON — FORWARD &\; SIDEWAYS – BODY REMAINS STRAIGHT –INSIDE FEET STEP REGULARLY &\; EVENLY INFRONT &\; ACROSS THE OUTSIDE FEET — RIDING ON 2 TRACKS\n\n TURN ON TO ¾ LINE – FEW STEPS STRAIGHT\n M OVE WEIGHT IN TO INSIDE SEAT BONE \n\n\n INSIDE LEG SLIGHTLY BEHIND THE GIRTH –PUSH THE HORSES QAURTERS FORWARDS &\; SIDWAYS TOWARDS THE TRAC K \n OUTSIDE LEG ON THE GIRTH BUT IF THE HORSE STARTS TO LEAD WITH ITS Q UARTERS MOVE THE OUTSIDE LEG BACK A LITTLE ALSO HELPS KEEP MOVING FORWARDS  \n INSIDE REIN – SLIGHT FLEXION TO INSIDE \n OUTSIDE REIN KEEPS HOR SE STRAIGHT – PREVENTS TOO MUCH NECK BEND – CONTROL OUTSIDE SHOULDER\n AS HIT THE TRACK – REMOVE FLEXION AND MAKE HORSE STRAIGHT  \n\n14.  Shoulder In \nHIND LEGS ON LINE OF TRAVEL\, SHOULDERS DISPLACED INSIDE — 3 TRACKS – OUTSIDE HIND LEG TRACKS ALONG WALL\, INSIDE HIND LEG & \; OUTSIDE FORELEG ON SAME TRACK PARALLEL TO WALL\, INSIDE FORELEG ON INNE R TRACK PARALLEL TO WALL — BENDING BODY AROUND RIDERS INSIDE LEG WITH PO LL FLEXED TO THE INSIDE – AWAY FROM THE DIRECTION OF TRAVEL) KEEP RHYTH MIC\, RELAXED\, CONNECTED &\; WITH SOME IMPULSION – UNDERSTANDE AIDS FOR LEG YEILDING — HORSE MUST BEND CORRECTLY ON A 10M CIRCLE ASWELL \n\ n Start with a 10-meter circle\n Inside rein leads the shoulders (and ne ck) off the wall while the inside leg pushes the rib cage and inside hind into the outside rein\, which catches the shoulder and produces the half h alt. The outside leg behind the girth keeps the haunches from falling out. \n Weight equal on both sides\,Horse follows your weight. If you sit to t he inside too much\, the horse might move in that direction and off the wa ll.\n Your shoulders and hips should be turned inside slightly parallel t o the horse’s shoulders so the outside hip and shoulder move forward\n Horses shoulders should be on the wall at the end of the movement from the inside leg. Don’t stay in the shoulder-in for too long. There is no tes t that has the exercise ridden for more than half the long side (30 meters ).\n\n15. Dressage tests \n16. Course work\n17. Flying Changes \n\n\n\ n\n\nASKING FOR LEFT FLYING CHANGE \n\n SEAT – RIGHT SEAT BONE FORWARD S TOWARDS HORSES RIGHT EAR \n RIGHT LEG – CLOSE RIGHT LEG ON GIRTH ASK HORSE TO GO FORWARDS DURING CHANGE \n LEFT LEG – MOVE LEFT LEG BEHIND THE GIRTH SIGNAL NEW OUTSIDE HIND LEG TO STRIKE OFF INTO NEW LEAD – QUI CK AID \n LEFT REIN – CLOSE LEFT HAND IN A FIST TO KEEP LEFT HIND LEG ON GROUND AND MAINTAIN UPHILL BALANCE \n RIGHT REIN – SOFTEN RIGHT REI N SO NOT TO BLOCK NEW INSIDE FRONT LEG FROM COMING FORWARD\n\n18. Turn on the Forehand\n\n HALT\, TO STOP FORWARD MOVEMENT APPLY STEADY PRESSURE O N REINS – SIT UP STRAIGHT \n PRESSURE PLACED 3-4 INCHS BEHIND THE GIRT H WITH YOUR OUTSIDE LEG – HORSE WILL MOVE AWAY FROM THE PRESSURE\, HORSE S HIND LEGS WILL MOVE IN FRONT &\; ACROSS THE OTHER HIND LEG\, THE OPPO SITE FRONT LEG TO YOUR PRESSURE LEG WILL ALSO MOVE AROUND THE OTHER FRONT LEG WILL STAY STILL \n YOUR OTHER LEG (INSIDE) SHOULD BE KEPT STEADY SO TO KEEP YOUR BALANCE AND STOP THE HORSE TRYING TO TURN TOO QUICKLY \n RE INS TO CONTROL FRONT OF HORSE – GOOD CONTROL PREVENTS YOUR HORSE MOVING FORWARDS – OUTSIDE HAND LIFT UP AND BACK TO FLEX HORSES NECK SLIGHTLY IN THE DIRECTION OF TURN\, FLEX UNTIL YOU CAN SEE CORNER OF EYE – USE OTHE R REIN FOR SUPPORT TO KEEP HORSE FROM MOVING FORWARDS\, OUTSIDE REIN CLOSE TO NECK   \n HALF HALT EACH STEP UNTIL COMPLETE TURN 180 DEGREES – POSITVIE PRAISE AFTER \n\n\n TURNING RIGHT RIGHT LEG BACK – RIGHT REIN FLEX \n TURNING LEFT LEFT LEG BACK – LEFT REIN FLEX \n\n19. Outline \nCORRECT OUTLINE IS OUTCOME OF BUILD UP OF CORRECT MUSCLE – BENEFITS OF BEING RIDDEN IN THIS FRAME\, NEEDS TO BE WORKING CORRECTLY\, MOVE FREELY IN CONTACT\, BACK RAISED &\; SUPPLE\, NECK EXTEND IN LIGHT ARCH FROM WI THER TO POLL WITH NOSE JUST IN FRONT OF THE VERTICAL.\n\nBalance\n\n Aim to maintain a light rein contact to encourage the horse to stay in balance . Horse who is unbalanced and in particular heavy on their forehand will l ean on the bit and the reins pulling the rider’s arms forward.\n\nStretc hing\n\n When the rider moves their hands in a forward direction combined with the use of their leg and seat pushing\, the horse to remain engaged through their hindquarters and light on the bit thereby allowing the rider to open out the horses neck and frame.\n Stretching can be used when ask ing for free walk on a long rein or when opening the horses stride out\, f or example when riding lengthened strides.  \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n20. Foot fall \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n21. Acute Transitions\ n22. Balance  \n23. Position\n24. Self Confidence \n25. Helping the Hor se\n26. Confidence and ALL horses within the Riding School   \n \;\n \n\n\n\n\n \;\n \n\n\n\n\nLevel Six\n1. More work on Stridcs\n\n\n\n  \n12hh\n15hh\n17hh\n\n\nTrot to Bounce\n7-8ft\n9-10ft\n11-12ft\n\n\nCant er to Bounce\n8-9ft\n10-11ft\n12-13ft\n\n\nTrot Double 1 stride\n14-16ft\n 17-19ft\n20-22ft\n\n\nCanter Double 1 stride\n17-19ft\n20-22ft\n23-25ft\n\ n\nTrot Double 2 stride \n23-25ft\n27-29ft \n31-33ft\n\n\nCanter Double 2 stride\n26-28ft\n30-32ft\n34-36ft \n\n\nTreble – usually 1st part 1 stride\, 2nd part 2 strides \n\n\n\n2. More Grid work\n3. Aids to Canter \n4. Aids on a Circle\n5. more combination work\n6. Flying Change on Figur e of 8\n7. Outline\n8. Turn on the Haunches\n9. Acute Transitions\n10. Can ter Leg Yield\n11. Balance\n12. Position\n13. Fluent over course\n14. Dril l work\n15. Flying change on straight\n16. Continue perfecting everything you have learnt over the levels – Keep going you never stop learning and improving \n17. Lunging/Groundwork\n\n\n\n\n\n\n END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:2097@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251206T100000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251206T110000 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/level-3-group-lesson-2/ SUMMARY:Level 3 Group Lesson DESCRIPTION: \;\nYou will need to Register Add your Rider(s) on https:/ /bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk\nYou will of had to of been graded to se e what level lessons you can book\nand then you will be able to see what a vailability we have\n \;\nLevel Three\n1. Explain prepare to Canter\n( CHECK POSTIION\, SHORTEN REINS SLIGHTLY\, HALF HALT BUT KEEP LEG ON\, SITT ING TROT\, ASK AS GOING IN TO THE CORNER\, INSIDE BEND FOR CORRECT CANTER LEAD)\n 2. Explain &\; Use Aids to canter\n(SITTING TROT –\n\nLITTLE BIT MORE WEIGHT ON THE INSIDE SEAT BONE YOUR SEAT DRAWS UP THE HIND LEG S TRONG RHYTHM -–\n\nINSIDE LEG ON THE GIRTH ASKS FOR MILD BEND TO PREPARE THE INSIDE LEAD &\; HELPS WITH BALANCE-\n\nINSIDE REIN DOES VERY LITTL E ACTS AS A NECK REIN IT SITS THERE AND PREVENTS HORSE DRIFTING OUT –\n\ n1 TO 3 HALF HALTS BEFORE TRANSITION TO BALANCE WEIGHT TO THE HIND END KEE P LEGS ON FOR IMPULSION AFTER THE HALF HALTS —\n\nOUTSIDE LEG SLIGHTLY B ACK BEHIND THE GIRTH TELLS THEM WHICH LEAD BEHIND\n\nOUTSIDE REIN HELP TO CONTROL SPEED AND KEEP THEM OUT ON THE TRACK)\n3. Figure of 8s\n(2 20M CIR CLES PUT TOGETHER – NO STRAIGHT LINES)\n4. Serpentines\n(NO STRAIGHT LIN ES but when starting to learn a serpentine it is best to rid the straight line then the loop will become better with practice\, LOOPS\, EACH TIME CR OSS OVER THE CENTER LINE SHOULD CHANGE DIAGONAL\, LOOPS EQUAL) (3 LOOP\, 4 LOOP\, 5 LOOPS ECT)\n\n(diagrams are 3 loops serpentine)\n5. Trot 20m cir cles from E &\; B \n6. Balance Canter\n 7. Understand &\; Explain Canter Lead\n(HORSES FRONT INSIDE LEG SHOULD STRIKE OUT FURTHER FORWARD T HAN THE OUTSIDE FRONT LEG\n\nTHEY TAKE OFF WITH THERE OUTSIDE BACK LEG AND LEAD WITH THERE INSIDE FRONT\n\n(THEY CAN BE CORRECT WITH FRONT LEGS AND INCORRECT WITH BACK LEGS WHICH IS CALLED MANY NAMES BUT WE USE THE TERM DI S-UNITED THIS USUALLY FEELS AWFUL\, BUMPY &\; OFF BALANCE. BACK TO TROT AND ASK AGAIN)\n\n(IF THE HORSE IS INCORRECT IN FRONT BACK TO TROT ASK AG AIN)\n 8. Check Canter Lead Whilst mounted\n 9. Walk without stirrups\ n 10. Trot without stirrups\n 11. Adjust Own Stirrups\n 12. Understan d beats of Pace\, Walk\, Trot &\; Canter\n\n WALK IS 4 BEAT EACH FOOT HITS THE GROUND INDEPENDENTLY\n\nThe footfall sequence is:\n\nLeft Hind – Left Front – Right Hind – Right Front.\n\n TROT IS A 2 BEAT FEET GO IN DIAGONAL PAIRS\n\nThe footfall sequence is:\n\nLeft Hind + Right Fro nt – Suspension – Right Hind + Left Front – Suspension\n\n CANTER I S A 3 BEAT 1 PAIR OF FEET STRIKE AND THE OTHER 2 LAND INDEPENDENTLY\n\nRig ht Lead Canter\n\nLeft Hind – Right Hind + Left Front – Right Front – Suspension\n\nLeft Lead Canter\n\nRight Hind – Left Hind + Right Fro nt – Left Front – Suspension\n\n DON’T NEED TO KNOW GALLOP BUT IF T HEY WANT TO KNOW IT IS 4 BEAT SEQUENCE\n\nRight Lead Gallop\n\nLeft Hind – Right Hind – Left Front – Right Front – Suspension\n\nLeft Lead Gallop\n\nRight Hind – Left Hind – Right Front – Left Front – Susp ension\n13.  Position for Level 3\n(VERTICAL LINE EAR- SHOULDER- HIP – HEEL\, EYES UP AND AHEAD\, STRAIGHT LINE FROM ELBOWS SOFT WITH SLIGHT BEND – HAND DOWN THE REIN TO THE HORSES MOUTH\, THUMBS ON TOP POINTING TOWAR DS HORSES EARS\, SIT EQUALLY ARCROSS BOTH SEAT BONES\, RELAX SEAT\, HIPS & amp\; PELVIS\, KNEE &\; THIGH REST LIGHTLY AGAINS SADDLE NOT GRIPPING)\ n 14.  Understand Aids (Natural &\; Artificial)\n\n COMMUNICATION B ETWEEN RIDERS AND HORSE)\n ARTIFICIAL AIDS- MAINLY WHIPS &\; SPURS\n NATURAL AIDS- VOICE\, HANDS\, LEGS\, BODY\, SEAT\n\n(HANDS – COMMUNICATI ON THROUGH REINS TO THE BIT\, SHOULD BE LIGHT FLEXIBLE- USE OF HAND AID MU ST BE USED WITH SEAT\, LEG AIDS- ABOVE HORSES WITHERS LEVEL WITH EACH OTHE R\n\n TURNING – GENTLE SQUEEZING THE REIN ASKS THE HORSE TO TURN HEAD I N THAT DIRECTION\n HALTING –PRESSURE ON BOTH REINS WITH SEAT AND LEG PR OVEDING ENERGY A HALT WILL PRODUCED\n\n(VOICE – WORD\, TONE &\; LENGT H OF TIME THE WORD IS HELD FOR INDICATES UPWARDS/DOWNWARDS TRANSITIONS\n\n UPWARD TRANSITION – EMPHASIS THE LETTER WITH RISE IN TONE TOWARDS END OF WORD\n DOWNWARD TRANSITION – LOWER TONE TOWRDS END OF WORD STRETCH T HE WORD OUT\n COLLECTION – CALM\n\n(SEAT – COLLECTION\, BALANCE\, STE ERING\, FORWARD MOVEMENT\, CONTROL\, STABILITY\n\n SEAT – CENTRAL IN SA DDLE\, EVEN DISTRIBUTION OF WEIGHT OFN SEAT BONES\, ALTER WHEN ASK HORSE T O MOVE DIRECTION\, DO NOT COLLAPSE THROUGH HIP\n HIPS –LEVEL AT ALL TIM ES\, SUPPLE TO ALLOW MOVEMENT ABSORBED THROUGH SEAT\n PELVIS – ABSORD M OVEMENT\, HELPS CONTROL CENTRE OF GRAVITY\, ENCOURANGES HORSE TO ACCELERAT E\n\n(LEGS – USED WITH SEAT &\; HAND TO COMMUNICATE – DIRECTION\, G AIT\, LEVEL OF ACTIVITY\, UPWARD DOWNWARD TRANSITIONS\, LATERAL MOVEMENTS\ n\n ON THE GIRTH – PRODUCES ENERGY/FORWARD MOVEMENT – BOTH LEGS ON TH E GIRTH FORWARD/STRAIGHT\, 1 LEG BEHIND THE GIRTH WILL ASK EITHER CHANGE D IRECTION OR CANTER DEPENDING ON LEVEL OF PRESSURE\n LOWER LEG BEHIND THE GIRTH – ABOUT 2-3 INCHES MORE CONTROL OVER HINDQUARTERS- FORWARD\, BACKW ARD\, DIAGONALLY OR SIDEWAYS MOVEMENTS\, UPWARD TRANSITIONS EG CANTER OR L ATERAL MOVEMENT EG LEG YIELD\, BOTH LEGS BEHIND THE GIRTH CORRECT USE WITH SEAT AND LEGS WILL AID REIN BACK\n\n(WHIP – INSIDE HAND USED TO BACK UP RIDERS LEG AND ENCOURAGE HORSE TO MOVE FORWARD)\n\n(SPURS – ON THE RIDE RS HEEL TO GIVE PRECISE LEG AID ONLY WORN BY EXPERIENCED RIDERS)\n 15. B alance\n16. Check Girth END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:2359@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251206T110000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251206T151500 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/level-1-group-lesson-3/ SUMMARY:Level 1 Group Lesson DESCRIPTION: \;\nYou will need to Register Add your Rider(s) on https:/ /bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk\nYou will of had to of been graded to se e what level lessons you can book\nand then you will be able to see what a vailability we have\nLevel One\n1. Mount correctly\n\n(Both Reins and Whi p into the Left hand and a clump of mane or on the neck\, Right hand as fa r round to the back of the saddle DO NOT HOLD ON TO THE FRONT AND BACK OF THE SADDLE\, Left foot in the stirrup\, bounce 3 times and swing right leg over\, not kicking the horses bottom on the way over and landing lightly on the saddle)\n\n2. Dismount correctly \n\n(Both feet out of stirrups\, reins and whip in to left hand right hand on the front of the saddle lean forwards slightly and swing your right leg over the back of the saddle\, l anding on the left. On landing bend both knees and you should be facing th e same way as the horse)\n\n3. Hold reins \n\n(Little finger underneath t he rein thumb on top close your fingers around your reins – and palms of your hands facing each other)\n\n4. Halt\n\n(sit up nice and tall\, heels down\, toes up\, palms of your hands facing sit on your bottom a little d eeper\, active walk\, squeeze down both reins and gently pull back slightl y\, you can use your voice and ask your horse to “HALT”)\n\n5. Walk \ n\n(sit up nice and tall\, heels down\, toes up\, palms of your hands faci ng\, keep your lower leg underneath you so you have a straight line Ear Sh oulder Hip Heel\, ride your horse through your hips and seat a little more \, active walk horses head should be bobbing up and down nice and quick\, you can use your voice and ask your horse to “WALK ON”)\n\n6. Rising t rot \n\n(sit up nice and tall\, heels down\, toes up\, palms of your hand s facing\, keep your lower leg underneath you\, standing up and down as yo ur horses’ trots\, as the outside front leg goes forwards you should sta nd and as it comes back you should sit)\n\n7.Walk without reins \n\n8. Tr ot without reins \n\n(sit up nice and tall\, heels down\, toes up\, palms of your hands facing\, keep your lower leg underneath you so you have a s traight line Ear Shoulder Hip Heel\, try not to tip forward)\n\n9. Explain an Active Walk\n\n(Horses is walking forwards with its head bobbing up an d down nice and quick\, back feet should fall where the front feet where)\ n\n10. Walk 20m Circles a and c  \n\n11. Simple Changes of Reins (A-C\, C-A\, B-E\, E-B\, M-K\, K-M\, F-H\, H-F) \n\n12. Bending in and out of co nes \n\n13. Around the world with helper  \n\n14. Balance \n\n15. Learn to Run up Stirrups \n\n16. Loosen Girth END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:10327@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251206T113000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251206T120000 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/walk-out/ SUMMARY:Walk Out DESCRIPTION: \;\nYou will need to be Registered and Added your Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk You will also of had to be gr aded to see what level you are with us and then you will be able to see wh at availability we have\n\n\n\n\n\nIF THE WEATHER IS AWFUL - WE WILL MAKE THE DECISION ON THE DAY WETHER IT IS SAFE TO GO AHEAD - IF NOT WE WILL REA RRANGE THE WALK OUT\n\nWalk out down the middlewood way\n\n\n\n\n END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:7089@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251206T120000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251206T123000 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/stable-management-sessions/ SUMMARY:Stable Management Sessions DESCRIPTION:STABLE MANAGEMENT \nYou will need to Register Add your Rider(s ) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk and then you will be able to see what availability we have\n30mins Sessions (can be booked as a month or individual dates)\nBadges will be applied on the ecpro upon completion and notes added so we are going to run the following levels together unde r a bronze\, silver and gold Ecpro Badge Scheme \nYELLOW  Level 1 &\; BLUE Level 2 Stable Management together and upon passing each you will re ceive a yellow &\; blue certificate but on EPRO you will Receive a BRO NZE BADGE \nGREEN  Level 2 &\; ORANGE Level 3 Stable Management toget her and upon passing each you will receive a green &\; orange certific ate but on EPRO you will Receive a SILVER BADGE \nPURPLE Level 5 &\; R ED Level 6 Stable Management together and upon passing each you will recei ve a red &\; purple certificate but on EPRO you will Receive a GOLD BAD GE \nBRONZE BADGE \nThings covered in the Yellow &\; Blue Syllabus's\ nName basic points of the Horse\nAssist a Rider Mounting \nGive a Leg Up  \nFit a Hat to a Rider \nAdjust Stirrups from the ground \nShow a ride r how to hold their reins \nAble to check &\; tighten a girth before m ounting\nYard Safety \nName different parts of the Bridle \nName differe nt parts of the Saddle \nName the different items of the grooming kit \n Lead a pony in-hand \nCorrect way to give a pony an apple/carrot \nAppro ach &\; Handle a pony correctly \nCatch a pony &\; Put a head colla r on \nDemonstrate awareness off safety rules &\; hazards \nTie up a pony correctly\nAble to tie a haynet up correctly \nPick up &\; pick o ut feet \nKnow the Principles of watering &\; feeding \nHow to stop a car \nHow to say 'thank-you'\nHow to cross a road \nKnow which side of the road you should ride on\nUnderstand the simple 'green cross code' \nK now it is safer to ride on the road with adults or parents \nDemonstrate Mucking Out\nBed down \nDemonstrate watering the horse \nPut on and Remo ve  Aa head collar correctly\nName &\; Describe different types of bed ding \nBe able to Put on a Saddle \nBe able to put on a Bridle \nName d ifferent horses colours \nName different Markings\nName different Rugs \ nKnow the importance of ill-fitting rugs \nKnow how to fit a rug \nKnow how to care for &\; clean saddlery \nHave knowledge of correctly fitti ng tack \nBe able to identify Poisonous Plants\nUntack correctly\nCommuni cate with Riders &\; Instructors when assisting \nHow to ride along a road\nHow to signal Right &\; Left\nShow an awareness of dangers while riding on a road\nSILVER BADGE \nCovered in the Green &\; Orange Sylla bus’s \nHorse &\; Rider 1st Aid Kit  \nField Safety (shelter\, fen cing\, poisonous plants\, maintenance) \nTreatment of minor Cuts &\; A brasions  \nCorrect handling of ponies’ legs  \nCorrect grooming of ponies’ feet &\; legs \nTack up &\; Un-tack Unaided &\; put aw ay correctly  \nBasic feeding  \nclean &\; assemble tack  \ncatch a pony &\; turn it away in the field  \nknow that water must always be available  \nknow the structure of the horse’s foot  \nknow the n ames of the farrier’s tools  \nidentify signs of ill health  \nunder stand the importance of roughage  \nrequirements to plaiting a horse   \nplaiting a horse \ndifferent mouth pieces &\; their actions  \nare na safety – rules of the arena  \nyard jobs (&\; safety) \nhow to lead a pony along a road on foot  \nhow to slow a car down  \ncare &am p\; working of a pony off grass \nelementary feeding\, watering &\; cl eanliness of the pony  \nknow when a pony needs shoeing  \nknow what t o look for in a newly shod foot  \nknow the main indications for health in the pony  \nrecognise when a pony is lame  \nknow how to load &\ ; un-load a pony  \nunderstand the importance &\; the means of protec ting les while travelling  \nput a rug\, roller\, tail bandage &\; Ne w Zealand on  \nknow what equipment is needed for lunging  \nknow reas ons for lunging  \nskeleton of the horse  \nknow different bandages &a mp\; apply them  \nknowledge of ill-fitting bandages  \nshow knowledge of hay &\; haylage  \nunderstand the importance of roughage  \nkno wledge of stabling-ventilation-lights-drainage-shelter &\; warmth  \n take a horse’s temperature  \nweigh a horse  \nunderstand the reason s for equipment a horse is wearing  \nhow to lead a pony along a road wh ile mounted\nA Parent/Guardian is to attend to drop children off for stabl e management and pick them up again\nUpon completing each syllabus you wil l receive a certificate once you receive your certificate ONCE YOU HAVE CO MPLETED THE BADGE you can then move on to the next BADGE levels \nThis me ans: if there are no badges displayed\, they are at level 1+2\, working to wards Bronze. \nIf a Bronze badge is displayed\, they have completed leve l 1+2 and now working towards Silver (level 3+4) and so on.\nTo access thi s you will have to go on to you account via web link https://bankfarmridi ngschool.ecpro.co.uk and go on to MY ACCOUNT and then on to RIDERS you wi ll see on there NOTES/PROGRESS and BADGES EARNED\, simply click on RIDER N OTES and everything will be displayed.\nThey will require\npaper\nfolder\n pens\nriding hat for when around and handling horses\ngloves for when hand ling horses\nAccess to a printer to print off SHEETS required which can be found on our google drive please follow the link https://drive.google.com /drive/folders/1gyFxnlXmtlMmrK_mIGG-8HuX6gHAEPFC?usp=sharing\nIf you have no access to a printer please let us know and we will print you a pack off at an additional charge\nNON REFUNDABLE \nIF YOU WOULD LIKE A FOLDER MAD E UP PLEASE LET LINDSEY KNOW AND THIS WILL BE AN ADDITIONAL CHARGE END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:3407@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251206T130000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251206T134500 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/level-2-group-lesson-2/ SUMMARY:Level 2 Group Lesson DESCRIPTION:Every Saturday (1pm - 1:45pm)\nYou will need to Register Add yo ur Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk\nYou will of had t o of been graded to see what level lessons you can book\nand then you will be able to see what availability we have\n \;\nLevel Two\n1. Explain Safety distances \n(½ A HORSES LENGTH BETWEEN YOU AND THE ONE IN FRONT O R YOU SHOULD BE ABLE TO SEE ½ WAY DOWN THE HORSES TAIL IN FRONT\, IF YOU GET TO CLOSE YOU CAN GET KICKED OR THE HORSES CAN HAVE A TIZZ) \n2. Able to keep horse/pony going on own\n 3. Balanced Sitting trot \n(SIT UP N ICE AND TALL\, HEELS DOWN\, TOES UP\, PALME OF YOUR HANDDS FACING\, KEEP Y OUR LOWER LEG UNDERNEATH YOU\, YOU SHOULD HAVE A STRAIGHT-LINE EAR\, SHOUL DER\, HIP\, HEEL. SIT NICE AND DEEP IN TO THE SADDLE AND DO NOT HOLD YOU S ELL UP IN YOUR STIRRUPS TO TRY AND STOP THE BOUNCE TRY TO ABSORB THE BOUNC E AND SIT DEEP FEEL FOR YOUR SEAT BONES).\n 4. Explain &\; Execute Pr epare Transitions\n(DEPENDING WHAT PACE YOU ARE GOING TO — SQUEEZE THE R EINS LIKE SPONGES WHICH IS CALLED A HALF HALT\, SITTING TROT (IF YOU ARE T ROTTING)\, ACTIVE WALK (IF YOU ARE WALKING)\, SHORTEN REINS\, POSITION- SI T UP TALL – STRAIGHT BACK- HEELS DOWN TOES UP – PALMS OF HANDS FACING\ , LEGS WRAPPED ROUND TO KEEP THEM GOING FORWARDS WETHER IT IS FORWARDS IN TO WALK OR IN TO HALT OR FORWARDS IN TROT PLUS RIDING THROUGH YOUR SEAT TO O)\n 5. Walk over poles \n(POSITION- SIT UP TALL – STRAIGHT BACK- HEE LS DOWN TOES UP – PALMS OF HANDS FACING\, LEGS WRAPPED ROUND TO KEEP THE M GOING FORWARDS AND RIDING THROUGH YOUR SEAT TOO. LOOK STRAIGHT A HEAD DO N’T LOOK DOWN SQUEEZE A LITTLE FIRMER OVER EACH POLE TO ENCOURAGE THE HO RSES TO PICK THEIR FEET UP A LITTLE HIGHER)\n 6. Trot over poles \n(POS ITION- SIT UP TALL – STRAIGHT BACK- HEELS DOWN TOES UP – PALMS OF HAND S FACING\, LEGS WRAPPED ROUND TO KEEP THEM GOING FORWARDS AND RIDING THROU GH YOUR SEAT TOO. IF RISING MAKE SURE YOU KEEP THE UP DOWN RYHTHM OVER THE POLE. LOOK STRAIGHT A HEAD DON’T LOOK DOWN SQUEEZE A LITTLE FIRMER OVER EACH POLE TO ENCOURAGE THE HORSES TO PICK THEIR FEET UP A LITTLE HIGHER)\ n 7.Understand Diagonals \n(AS THE OUTSIDE FRONT LEG GOES FORWARDS YOU S TAND UP AS IT COMES BACK YOU SIT DOWN)\n 8. Know how to change Diagonals \n(CHECK DIAGONAL\, IF INCORRECT SIT FOR 2 BEATS (NOT 3 BEATS) 2 BEATS AND RISE UP AND DOWN AGAIN THEN RE-CHECK YOUR DIAGONAL)\n9. Explain &\; Ri de with the Correct position \n(SIT UP NICE AND TALL\, HEELS DOWN\, TOES UP\, PALME OF YOUR HANDDS FACING\, KEEP YOUR LOWER LEG UNDERNEATH YOU\, \ n\nLINE 1 IS – YOU SHOULD HAVE A STRAIGHT-LINE EAR\, SHOULDER\, HIP\, HE EL\n\nLINE 2 IS – YOU SHOULD HAVE A STRAIGHT-LINE ELBOW\, HAND\, TO YOUR HORSES MOUTH).\n10. Trot 20m circles a and c\n11. More difficult changes of Reins \n(A-C\, C-A\, B-E\, E-B\, K-M\, M-K\, H-F\, F-H\, K-B\, B-K\, B -H\, H-B\, F-E\, E-F\, M-E\, E-M)\n12. Ride Independently \n13. Walk with out Stirrups \n14. Balance for Level 2\n15. Position for Level 2\n16. Ru led of the School\n(ALL RIDERS &\; HELPERS TO WEAR AN UP TO DATE STAND ARD RIDING HAT\,  USE CORRECT ENTRANCES &\; EXITS\,  RESPECT ARENA PR OPERTY &\; PROPERTY OF OTHERS\,  LEAVES ARENA AS YOU FIND IT\,  CONDU CT &\; PRACTICE GOOD HORSEMASTERSHIP\,   PICK UP MANURE\,  KEEP 1/2 HORSES LENGTH BETWEEN RIDERS\,   DOORS/GATES MUST BE CLOSES BEHIND YOU W HEN ENTERING AND LEAVING\,  BE AWARE OF OTHER RIDERS\,  DO NOT CUT ANYON E UP\,  HORSES WORKING AT A FASTER GAIT ARE GIVEN PRIORITY TO USE THE OUT SIDE TRACK\,  HORSES SHOULD PASS LEFT SHOULDER TO LEFT SHOULDER IF ON OPP OSITE REINS\,  IF YOU MUST STOP THEN MOVE TO THE CENTER OF THE ARENA\,  IF THERES A RUN AWAY HORSES ALL RIDERS MOVE TO THE CENTER &\; STOP\,  ENTER &\; LEAVE ARENA IN SINGLE FILE\,  BEWARE AT ALL TIMES OF RIDERS &\; THEIR HORSES AROUND YOU\, PUT ALL EQUIPMENT AWAY AFTER USE) END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:3145@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251206T151500 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251206T161500 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/level-3-group-lesson-3/ SUMMARY:Level 4 Group Lesson DESCRIPTION:Every Saturday (3:15pm - 4:15pm)\nYou will need to Register Add your Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk\nYou will of ha d to of been graded to see what level lessons you can book\nand then you w ill be able to see what availability we have\n \;\nLevel Four\n1. Cont inue working on Balanced Cantering \n2. Trotting Pole without stirrups \ n3. 7 phases of jumping\n\n (TURN -APPROARCH-TAKE OFF-FLIGHT-LAND-GET-AWA Y- TURN)\n REMAIN BALANCED\n IMPULSION\n POSITION – OPEN SHOULDERS ON TURN \n 1. TURN  – ACCURATELY – LINE UP WITH CENTRE – SIT UP – LOOK AHEAD – RIDE LEG TO HAND – KEEP BALANCED RHYTHM – IMPULSION \n  2. APPROACH  – CENTRE OF JUMP – SIT UP – LOOK AHEAD CHANNEL ING HORSE FORWARD – BETWEEN HAND &\; LEG TO MAINTAIN STRAIGHT LINE – MAINTAIN IMPULSION &\; BALANCE\n 3. TAKE OFF – POINT WHICH HORS E GATHERS HINDLEGS UNDERNEATH ITS BODY &\; STARTS TO LIFT FOREHAND – LOWER LEG SECURELY WRAPPED ROUND – MAINTAIN ENERGY &\; FORWARDNESS – HANDS FOLLOW MOVEMENT OF HORSES HEAD NECK BUT MAINTAIN CONTACT THROUGH REIN – LOOK AHEAD\n 4. FLIGHT – IN THE AIR – FOREHAND WELL LIFTED\ , BACK WELL ROUNDED\, FORELEGS &\; HINDLEGS TUCKED UP – FOLDED IN TO JUMPING POSITION\, UPPER BODY LOWERED\, SEAT SLIPPED TO BACK OF SADDLE – HANDS ALLOW STRETCH THE NECK\, BACK &\; BODY GIVES FREEDOM OF MOVEMENT \, WHILE MAINTAINING LIGHT CONTACT – LOWER LEG STAYS SECURELY WRAPPED AR OUND MAINTAIN BALANCE\n 5. LAND – HORSE STRETCHES OUT &\; EXTENDS FORELEGS READY TO LAND – HORSE SHOULD LAND ON FORELEG WANTING THE CANTER LEAD ON – UPPER BODY COMES BACK UP – MAINTAIN CONTACT – LEGS REMAIN IN POSTION – LOOK AHEAD\n 6. GET AWAY  ­­- MOVING AWAY FROM THE J UMP TO THE NEXT – MAKE SURE HORSE IS BALANCED\, PLENTY OF ENERGY &\; IMPULSION- CORRECT CANTER LEAD – LEGS SECURE\n 7. TURN –  TURNS AW AY FROM ONE FENCE TO ANOTHER THIS STAGE STARTS ALL OVER AGAIN OR IF SINGLE FENCE STAY STRAIGHT\n\n4/5. Able Ride A Demi Voltes &\; Reverse Demi V oltes\n\n DEMI VOLTE – ½ 10 MENTRE CIRCLE TO THE CENTRE LINE THEN A DI AGONAL LINE BACK TO THE TRACK TO CHANGE THE REIN\n REVERSE DEMI VOLTE – DIAGONAL LINE TO CENTRE LINE LETTER THEN ½ 10 METRE CIRCLE BACK TO THE T RACK TO CHANGE THE REIN \n\n6. 2X ½ 10 metre Circles to change the rein   \n7. Turn on the Forehand\n\n HALT\, TO STOP FORWARD MOVEMENT APPLY S TEADY PRESSURE ON REINS – SIT UP STRAIGHT \n PRESSURE PLACED 3-4 INCHS BEHIND THE GIRTH WITH YOUR OUTSIDE LEG – HORSE WILL MOVE AWAY FROM THE PRESSURE\, HORSES HIND LEGS WILL MOVE IN FRONT &\; ACROSS THE OTHER HIN D LEG\, THE OPPOSITE FRONT LEG TO YOUR PRESSURE LEG WILL ALSO MOVE AROUND THE OTHER FRONT LEG WILL STAY STILL \n YOUR OTHER LEG (INSIDE) SHOULD BE KEPT STEADY SO TO KEEP YOUR BALANCE AND STOP THE HORSE TRYING TO TURN TOO QUICKLY \n REINS TO CONTROL FRONT OF HORSE – GOOD CONTROL PREVENTS YO UR HORSE MOVING FORWARDS – OUTSIDE HAND LIFT UP AND BACK TO FLEX HORSES NECK SLIGHTLY IN THE DIRECTION OF TURN\, FLEX UNTIL YOU CAN SEE CORNER OF EYE – USE OTHER REIN FOR SUPPORT TO KEEP HORSE FROM MOVING FORWARDS\, OU TSIDE REIN CLOSE TO NECK   \n HALF HALT EACH STEP UNTIL COMPLETE TURN 180 DEGREES – POSITVIE PRAISE AFTER \n TURNING RIGHT RIGHT LEG BACK – RIGHT REIN FLEX \n TURNING LEFT LEFT LEG BACK – LEFT REIN FLEX\n\n 8. 15m circles in walk  (A&\;C)\n9. 10m circles in walk (A&\;C)   \n10. Lighten seat \nINVOLVES STANDING ON YOUR OWN 2 FEET WHILE WORKING YOUR HORSE – BALANCE YOURSELF\, NO LEANING\, HOLDING ON CROUCHING DOWN ON NECK – CLEARANCE BETWEEN BOTTOM AND SADDLE – ALLOWS HORSE TO MOVE M ORE FREELY – IMPROVES BALANCE\, FITNESS AND COORDINATION- FEET CORRECTLY POSITIONED IN STIRRUP\, ALLOWS ANKLES\, KNEES &\; HIPS BECOME MORE EFF ECTIVE SHOCK ABSORBERS – ENGAGE YOUR CORE (TUMMY MUSCLES) – STRAIGHT B ACK – HANDS &\; ARMS INDEPENDENT KEEP CONTACT\n11. Jumping Position  \nTHIS INVOLVES THE RIDER CENTERED OVER HIS/HER FEET – STIRRUP LEATHERS 90 DEGREE ANGLE TO THE GROUND\, CONTINUING A LINE UPWARDS FROM THE STIRRUP LEATHERS- THE HEAD\, SHOULDERS &\; KNEES FALL IN FRONT OF THE LINE – HIPS FALL BEHIND IT\n\n LEG HANG DOWNSIDE EVEN CONTACT ALONG WHOLE LENGT H – INNER THIGH\, KNEE &\; CALF – WEIGHT ALONG BACK OF LEG INTO HEE L FLEXIBLE ANKLE \n SEAT\, HIPS &\; THIGHS –WEIGHT TOWARDS PELVIS\, ENOUGH WEIGHT IN STIRRUP TO SUSPEND IN THE AIR OVER THE SADDLE – HIPS N OT TOO FAR FORWARD IT CHANGES THE BALANCE –HIPS\, FLEXIBLE\, MOVE BACKWA RDS\, BETWEEN FENCES THE THIGHS TAKE UP WEIGHT OF RIDER NOT THE SEAT BONES \n UPPER BODY\, SHOULDERS\, HEAD\, TRUNK – LOOK UP IN DIRECTION YOU ARE GOING – BACK FLAT – OPEN CHEST – SHOULDERS OPEN \n RELEASE – GR AB MANE OR SLIDE HANDS UP CREST AS TAKE OFF\n\n12. Single Fence Jumping   \n13. Be able to check &\; adjust girth while mounted  \n14. Unde rstand &\; Explain Impulsion\nMOVEMENT OF HOESE – FORWARD AND CONTROL LED POWER – EFFECTIVE USE OF POWER IN THE HIND QUARTERS – TO ACHIEVE A HORSE MUST NOT USE SPEED BUT USE MUSCLUAR CONTROL – HORSE RELAXED BACK WILL ALLOW HINDQUARTERS TO COME WELL UNDER ITS BODY AND THIS IS CALLED “ ENGAGED”.\n15. Understand Half halt &\; when Used \n(A SPONGE EFFEC T ON THE REIN(S))\n16. Trotting Poles \n17. Canter Poles\n18. Raised Trot ting Poles \nTO BUILD UP MUSCLE ON TOP LINE SHOULDERS AND BACK – MORE F LEXIBLE – ENCOURAGES LEGS TO LIFT OVER JUMPS\n19. Balance for Level 4\n2 0. Position for Level 4\n21. More Changes of Reins &\; Other Movements   \n22. Continue Perfecting school movements and changes of reins learnt in previous Levels \n23. Canter 20m Circles\n24. Start Strides\n25. 1 5m circles in Trot (A&\;C)\n26. 10m circles in Trot (A&\;C)\n27. Ca nter without Stirrups\n28. Acute Transitions\n29. Confidence END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:8496@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251207T100000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251207T110000 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/level-3-group-lesson-2/ SUMMARY:Level 3 Group Lesson DESCRIPTION: \;\nYou will need to Register Add your Rider(s) on https:/ /bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk\nYou will of had to of been graded to se e what level lessons you can book\nand then you will be able to see what a vailability we have\n \;\nLevel Three\n1. Explain prepare to Canter\n( CHECK POSTIION\, SHORTEN REINS SLIGHTLY\, HALF HALT BUT KEEP LEG ON\, SITT ING TROT\, ASK AS GOING IN TO THE CORNER\, INSIDE BEND FOR CORRECT CANTER LEAD)\n 2. Explain &\; Use Aids to canter\n(SITTING TROT –\n\nLITTLE BIT MORE WEIGHT ON THE INSIDE SEAT BONE YOUR SEAT DRAWS UP THE HIND LEG S TRONG RHYTHM -–\n\nINSIDE LEG ON THE GIRTH ASKS FOR MILD BEND TO PREPARE THE INSIDE LEAD &\; HELPS WITH BALANCE-\n\nINSIDE REIN DOES VERY LITTL E ACTS AS A NECK REIN IT SITS THERE AND PREVENTS HORSE DRIFTING OUT –\n\ n1 TO 3 HALF HALTS BEFORE TRANSITION TO BALANCE WEIGHT TO THE HIND END KEE P LEGS ON FOR IMPULSION AFTER THE HALF HALTS —\n\nOUTSIDE LEG SLIGHTLY B ACK BEHIND THE GIRTH TELLS THEM WHICH LEAD BEHIND\n\nOUTSIDE REIN HELP TO CONTROL SPEED AND KEEP THEM OUT ON THE TRACK)\n3. Figure of 8s\n(2 20M CIR CLES PUT TOGETHER – NO STRAIGHT LINES)\n4. Serpentines\n(NO STRAIGHT LIN ES but when starting to learn a serpentine it is best to rid the straight line then the loop will become better with practice\, LOOPS\, EACH TIME CR OSS OVER THE CENTER LINE SHOULD CHANGE DIAGONAL\, LOOPS EQUAL) (3 LOOP\, 4 LOOP\, 5 LOOPS ECT)\n\n(diagrams are 3 loops serpentine)\n5. Trot 20m cir cles from E &\; B \n6. Balance Canter\n 7. Understand &\; Explain Canter Lead\n(HORSES FRONT INSIDE LEG SHOULD STRIKE OUT FURTHER FORWARD T HAN THE OUTSIDE FRONT LEG\n\nTHEY TAKE OFF WITH THERE OUTSIDE BACK LEG AND LEAD WITH THERE INSIDE FRONT\n\n(THEY CAN BE CORRECT WITH FRONT LEGS AND INCORRECT WITH BACK LEGS WHICH IS CALLED MANY NAMES BUT WE USE THE TERM DI S-UNITED THIS USUALLY FEELS AWFUL\, BUMPY &\; OFF BALANCE. BACK TO TROT AND ASK AGAIN)\n\n(IF THE HORSE IS INCORRECT IN FRONT BACK TO TROT ASK AG AIN)\n 8. Check Canter Lead Whilst mounted\n 9. Walk without stirrups\ n 10. Trot without stirrups\n 11. Adjust Own Stirrups\n 12. Understan d beats of Pace\, Walk\, Trot &\; Canter\n\n WALK IS 4 BEAT EACH FOOT HITS THE GROUND INDEPENDENTLY\n\nThe footfall sequence is:\n\nLeft Hind – Left Front – Right Hind – Right Front.\n\n TROT IS A 2 BEAT FEET GO IN DIAGONAL PAIRS\n\nThe footfall sequence is:\n\nLeft Hind + Right Fro nt – Suspension – Right Hind + Left Front – Suspension\n\n CANTER I S A 3 BEAT 1 PAIR OF FEET STRIKE AND THE OTHER 2 LAND INDEPENDENTLY\n\nRig ht Lead Canter\n\nLeft Hind – Right Hind + Left Front – Right Front – Suspension\n\nLeft Lead Canter\n\nRight Hind – Left Hind + Right Fro nt – Left Front – Suspension\n\n DON’T NEED TO KNOW GALLOP BUT IF T HEY WANT TO KNOW IT IS 4 BEAT SEQUENCE\n\nRight Lead Gallop\n\nLeft Hind – Right Hind – Left Front – Right Front – Suspension\n\nLeft Lead Gallop\n\nRight Hind – Left Hind – Right Front – Left Front – Susp ension\n13.  Position for Level 3\n(VERTICAL LINE EAR- SHOULDER- HIP – HEEL\, EYES UP AND AHEAD\, STRAIGHT LINE FROM ELBOWS SOFT WITH SLIGHT BEND – HAND DOWN THE REIN TO THE HORSES MOUTH\, THUMBS ON TOP POINTING TOWAR DS HORSES EARS\, SIT EQUALLY ARCROSS BOTH SEAT BONES\, RELAX SEAT\, HIPS & amp\; PELVIS\, KNEE &\; THIGH REST LIGHTLY AGAINS SADDLE NOT GRIPPING)\ n 14.  Understand Aids (Natural &\; Artificial)\n\n COMMUNICATION B ETWEEN RIDERS AND HORSE)\n ARTIFICIAL AIDS- MAINLY WHIPS &\; SPURS\n NATURAL AIDS- VOICE\, HANDS\, LEGS\, BODY\, SEAT\n\n(HANDS – COMMUNICATI ON THROUGH REINS TO THE BIT\, SHOULD BE LIGHT FLEXIBLE- USE OF HAND AID MU ST BE USED WITH SEAT\, LEG AIDS- ABOVE HORSES WITHERS LEVEL WITH EACH OTHE R\n\n TURNING – GENTLE SQUEEZING THE REIN ASKS THE HORSE TO TURN HEAD I N THAT DIRECTION\n HALTING –PRESSURE ON BOTH REINS WITH SEAT AND LEG PR OVEDING ENERGY A HALT WILL PRODUCED\n\n(VOICE – WORD\, TONE &\; LENGT H OF TIME THE WORD IS HELD FOR INDICATES UPWARDS/DOWNWARDS TRANSITIONS\n\n UPWARD TRANSITION – EMPHASIS THE LETTER WITH RISE IN TONE TOWARDS END OF WORD\n DOWNWARD TRANSITION – LOWER TONE TOWRDS END OF WORD STRETCH T HE WORD OUT\n COLLECTION – CALM\n\n(SEAT – COLLECTION\, BALANCE\, STE ERING\, FORWARD MOVEMENT\, CONTROL\, STABILITY\n\n SEAT – CENTRAL IN SA DDLE\, EVEN DISTRIBUTION OF WEIGHT OFN SEAT BONES\, ALTER WHEN ASK HORSE T O MOVE DIRECTION\, DO NOT COLLAPSE THROUGH HIP\n HIPS –LEVEL AT ALL TIM ES\, SUPPLE TO ALLOW MOVEMENT ABSORBED THROUGH SEAT\n PELVIS – ABSORD M OVEMENT\, HELPS CONTROL CENTRE OF GRAVITY\, ENCOURANGES HORSE TO ACCELERAT E\n\n(LEGS – USED WITH SEAT &\; HAND TO COMMUNICATE – DIRECTION\, G AIT\, LEVEL OF ACTIVITY\, UPWARD DOWNWARD TRANSITIONS\, LATERAL MOVEMENTS\ n\n ON THE GIRTH – PRODUCES ENERGY/FORWARD MOVEMENT – BOTH LEGS ON TH E GIRTH FORWARD/STRAIGHT\, 1 LEG BEHIND THE GIRTH WILL ASK EITHER CHANGE D IRECTION OR CANTER DEPENDING ON LEVEL OF PRESSURE\n LOWER LEG BEHIND THE GIRTH – ABOUT 2-3 INCHES MORE CONTROL OVER HINDQUARTERS- FORWARD\, BACKW ARD\, DIAGONALLY OR SIDEWAYS MOVEMENTS\, UPWARD TRANSITIONS EG CANTER OR L ATERAL MOVEMENT EG LEG YIELD\, BOTH LEGS BEHIND THE GIRTH CORRECT USE WITH SEAT AND LEGS WILL AID REIN BACK\n\n(WHIP – INSIDE HAND USED TO BACK UP RIDERS LEG AND ENCOURAGE HORSE TO MOVE FORWARD)\n\n(SPURS – ON THE RIDE RS HEEL TO GIVE PRECISE LEG AID ONLY WORN BY EXPERIENCED RIDERS)\n 15. B alance\n16. Check Girth END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:7938@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251207T114500 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251207T124500 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/level-4-group-lesson/ SUMMARY:Level 4 Group Lesson DESCRIPTION:Every Saturday (11:30am - 12:30pm)\nYou will need to Register A dd your Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk and then you will be able to see what availability we have\n \;\nLevel Four\n1. Con tinue working on Balanced Cantering \n2. Trotting Pole without stirrups  \n3. 7 phases of jumping\n\n (TURN -APPROARCH-TAKE OFF-FLIGHT-LAND-GET-AW AY- TURN)\n REMAIN BALANCED\n IMPULSION\n POSITION – OPEN SHOULDERS O N TURN \n 1. TURN  – ACCURATELY – LINE UP WITH CENTRE – SIT UP – LOOK AHEAD – RIDE LEG TO HAND – KEEP BALANCED RHYTHM – IMPULSION \n  2. APPROACH  – CENTRE OF JUMP – SIT UP – LOOK AHEAD CHANNEL ING HORSE FORWARD – BETWEEN HAND &\; LEG TO MAINTAIN STRAIGHT LINE – MAINTAIN IMPULSION &\; BALANCE\n 3. TAKE OFF – POINT WHICH HORS E GATHERS HINDLEGS UNDERNEATH ITS BODY &\; STARTS TO LIFT FOREHAND – LOWER LEG SECURELY WRAPPED ROUND – MAINTAIN ENERGY &\; FORWARDNESS – HANDS FOLLOW MOVEMENT OF HORSES HEAD NECK BUT MAINTAIN CONTACT THROUGH REIN – LOOK AHEAD\n 4. FLIGHT – IN THE AIR – FOREHAND WELL LIFTED\ , BACK WELL ROUNDED\, FORELEGS &\; HINDLEGS TUCKED UP – FOLDED IN TO JUMPING POSITION\, UPPER BODY LOWERED\, SEAT SLIPPED TO BACK OF SADDLE – HANDS ALLOW STRETCH THE NECK\, BACK &\; BODY GIVES FREEDOM OF MOVEMENT \, WHILE MAINTAINING LIGHT CONTACT – LOWER LEG STAYS SECURELY WRAPPED AR OUND MAINTAIN BALANCE\n 5. LAND – HORSE STRETCHES OUT &\; EXTENDS FORELEGS READY TO LAND – HORSE SHOULD LAND ON FORELEG WANTING THE CANTER LEAD ON – UPPER BODY COMES BACK UP – MAINTAIN CONTACT – LEGS REMAIN IN POSTION – LOOK AHEAD\n 6. GET AWAY  ­­- MOVING AWAY FROM THE J UMP TO THE NEXT – MAKE SURE HORSE IS BALANCED\, PLENTY OF ENERGY &\; IMPULSION- CORRECT CANTER LEAD – LEGS SECURE\n 7. TURN –  TURNS AW AY FROM ONE FENCE TO ANOTHER THIS STAGE STARTS ALL OVER AGAIN OR IF SINGLE FENCE STAY STRAIGHT\n\n4/5. Able Ride A Demi Voltes &\; Reverse Demi V oltes\n\n DEMI VOLTE – ½ 10 MENTRE CIRCLE TO THE CENTRE LINE THEN A DI AGONAL LINE BACK TO THE TRACK TO CHANGE THE REIN\n REVERSE DEMI VOLTE – DIAGONAL LINE TO CENTRE LINE LETTER THEN ½ 10 METRE CIRCLE BACK TO THE T RACK TO CHANGE THE REIN \n\n6. 2X ½ 10 metre Circles to change the rein   \n7. Turn on the Forehand\n\n HALT\, TO STOP FORWARD MOVEMENT APPLY S TEADY PRESSURE ON REINS – SIT UP STRAIGHT \n PRESSURE PLACED 3-4 INCHS BEHIND THE GIRTH WITH YOUR OUTSIDE LEG – HORSE WILL MOVE AWAY FROM THE PRESSURE\, HORSES HIND LEGS WILL MOVE IN FRONT &\; ACROSS THE OTHER HIN D LEG\, THE OPPOSITE FRONT LEG TO YOUR PRESSURE LEG WILL ALSO MOVE AROUND THE OTHER FRONT LEG WILL STAY STILL \n YOUR OTHER LEG (INSIDE) SHOULD BE KEPT STEADY SO TO KEEP YOUR BALANCE AND STOP THE HORSE TRYING TO TURN TOO QUICKLY \n REINS TO CONTROL FRONT OF HORSE – GOOD CONTROL PREVENTS YO UR HORSE MOVING FORWARDS – OUTSIDE HAND LIFT UP AND BACK TO FLEX HORSES NECK SLIGHTLY IN THE DIRECTION OF TURN\, FLEX UNTIL YOU CAN SEE CORNER OF EYE – USE OTHER REIN FOR SUPPORT TO KEEP HORSE FROM MOVING FORWARDS\, OU TSIDE REIN CLOSE TO NECK   \n HALF HALT EACH STEP UNTIL COMPLETE TURN 180 DEGREES – POSITVIE PRAISE AFTER \n TURNING RIGHT RIGHT LEG BACK – RIGHT REIN FLEX \n TURNING LEFT LEFT LEG BACK – LEFT REIN FLEX\n\n 8. 15m circles in walk  (A&\;C)\n9. 10m circles in walk (A&\;C)   \n10. Lighten seat \nINVOLVES STANDING ON YOUR OWN 2 FEET WHILE WORKING YOUR HORSE – BALANCE YOURSELF\, NO LEANING\, HOLDING ON CROUCHING DOWN ON NECK – CLEARANCE BETWEEN BOTTOM AND SADDLE – ALLOWS HORSE TO MOVE M ORE FREELY – IMPROVES BALANCE\, FITNESS AND COORDINATION- FEET CORRECTLY POSITIONED IN STIRRUP\, ALLOWS ANKLES\, KNEES &\; HIPS BECOME MORE EFF ECTIVE SHOCK ABSORBERS – ENGAGE YOUR CORE (TUMMY MUSCLES) – STRAIGHT B ACK – HANDS &\; ARMS INDEPENDENT KEEP CONTACT\n11. Jumping Position  \nTHIS INVOLVES THE RIDER CENTERED OVER HIS/HER FEET – STIRRUP LEATHERS 90 DEGREE ANGLE TO THE GROUND\, CONTINUING A LINE UPWARDS FROM THE STIRRUP LEATHERS- THE HEAD\, SHOULDERS &\; KNEES FALL IN FRONT OF THE LINE – HIPS FALL BEHIND IT\n\n LEG HANG DOWNSIDE EVEN CONTACT ALONG WHOLE LENGT H – INNER THIGH\, KNEE &\; CALF – WEIGHT ALONG BACK OF LEG INTO HEE L FLEXIBLE ANKLE \n SEAT\, HIPS &\; THIGHS –WEIGHT TOWARDS PELVIS\, ENOUGH WEIGHT IN STIRRUP TO SUSPEND IN THE AIR OVER THE SADDLE – HIPS N OT TOO FAR FORWARD IT CHANGES THE BALANCE –HIPS\, FLEXIBLE\, MOVE BACKWA RDS\, BETWEEN FENCES THE THIGHS TAKE UP WEIGHT OF RIDER NOT THE SEAT BONES \n UPPER BODY\, SHOULDERS\, HEAD\, TRUNK – LOOK UP IN DIRECTION YOU ARE GOING – BACK FLAT – OPEN CHEST – SHOULDERS OPEN \n RELEASE – GR AB MANE OR SLIDE HANDS UP CREST AS TAKE OFF\n\n12. Single Fence Jumping   \n13. Be able to check &\; adjust girth while mounted  \n14. Unde rstand &\; Explain Impulsion\nMOVEMENT OF HOESE – FORWARD AND CONTROL LED POWER – EFFECTIVE USE OF POWER IN THE HIND QUARTERS – TO ACHIEVE A HORSE MUST NOT USE SPEED BUT USE MUSCLUAR CONTROL – HORSE RELAXED BACK WILL ALLOW HINDQUARTERS TO COME WELL UNDER ITS BODY AND THIS IS CALLED “ ENGAGED”.\n15. Understand Half halt &\; when Used \n(A SPONGE EFFEC T ON THE REIN(S))\n16. Trotting Poles \n17. Canter Poles\n18. Raised Trot ting Poles \nTO BUILD UP MUSCLE ON TOP LINE SHOULDERS AND BACK – MORE F LEXIBLE – ENCOURAGES LEGS TO LIFT OVER JUMPS\n19. Balance for Level 4\n2 0. Position for Level 4\n21. More Changes of Reins &\; Other Movements   \n22. Continue Perfecting school movements and changes of reins learnt in previous Levels \n23. Canter 20m Circles\n24. Start Strides\n25. 1 5m circles in Trot (A&\;C)\n26. 10m circles in Trot (A&\;C)\n27. Ca nter without Stirrups\n28. Acute Transitions\n29. Confidence END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:10589@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251207T140000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251207T143000 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/walk-out-2/ SUMMARY:Walk Out DESCRIPTION: \;\nYou will need to be Registered and Added your Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk You will also of had to be gr aded to see what level you are with us and then you will be able to see wh at availability we have\n\n\n\n\n\nIF THE WEATHER IS AWFUL - WE WILL MAKE THE DECISION ON THE DAY WETHER IT IS SAFE TO GO AHEAD - IF NOT WE WILL REA RRANGE THE WALK OUT\n\nWalk out down the middlewood way\n\n\n\n\n END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:10851@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251207T143000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251207T151500 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/hack/ SUMMARY:Hack DESCRIPTION: \;\nYou will need to be Registered and Added your Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk You will also of had to be gr aded to see what level you are with us and then you will be able to see wh at availability we have\n\n\n\n\n\nIF THE WEATHER IS AWFUL - WE WILL MAKE THE DECISION ON THE DAY WETHER IT IS SAFE TO GO AHEAD - IF NOT WE WILL REA RRANGE THE WALK OUT\n\nHack out down the middlewood way\n\n\n\n\n END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:9282@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251208T103000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251208T113000 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/little-tigers/ SUMMARY:Little Tigers DESCRIPTION: \;\nYou will need to be Registered and Added your Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk You will also of had to be gr aded to see what level you are with us and then you will be able to see wh at availability we have\n\n\n\n\nIntroducing our younger riders &\; rid ers that need additions support!\nCome along to Bank Farm Riding School an d meet our friendly ponies who just can't wait to be pampered and petted b y you.\n\nEach session lasts 1hour. The session includes a short ride on a pony\, or just a sit on\, for those that want.\n\nWork through a Little T igers Syllabus and receive a Certificate upon completion - fun way for chi ldren and adults to learn more about ponies\n\nblock booking discount same day per week Courses will be on Mondays 10.30am-11.30am\, Thursdays 1pm-2 pm &\; Fridays 10.30am-11.30am\n\nParents/carer/guardian will be requir ed to assist their rider - the instructor will go through everything with you on the day please wear a shoe\, boot or wellie with a slight heal noth ing flat soled. leggings or jogging bottoms\, no skirts or shorts\n\n\n\n\ n END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:11173@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251209T160000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251209T180000 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/horse-care-ride/ SUMMARY:Horse Care & Ride DESCRIPTION: \;\nYou will need to be Registered and Added your Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk You will also of had to be gr aded to see what level you are with us and then you will be able to see wh at availability we have\n\n\n\n\nHorse Care &\; Ride (Stable management &\; riding course)\n \;\n\n90mins Sessions (can be booked as a mo nth or individual dates) OPEN TO AGES FROM 6 YEARS OLD AND ALL ABILITIES\n \nWorking through our stable management syllabus's and riding syllabus's\n \n \;\n\nBadges will be applied on the ecpro upon completion and notes added so we are going to run the following levels together under a bronze \, silver and gold Ecpro Badge Scheme\n\n \;\n\nYELLOW  Level 1 &\ ; BLUE Level 2 Stable Management together and upon passing each you will r eceive a yellow &\; blue certificate but on EPRO you will Receive a BR ONZE BADGE\n\nGREEN  Level 2 &\; ORANGE Level 3 Stable Management toge ther and upon passing each you will receive a green &\; orange certifi cate but on EPRO you will Receive a SILVER BADGE\n\nPURPLE Level 5 &\; RED Level 6 Stable Management together and upon passing each you will rece ive a red &\; purple certificate but on EPRO you will Receive a GOLD BA DGE\n\n \;\n\nBRONZE BADGE \n\nThings covered in the Yellow &\; Bl ue Syllabus's\n\n Name basic points of the Horse\n Assist a Rider Mounti ng \n Give a Leg Up \n Fit a Hat to a Rider \n Adjust Stirrups from the ground \n Show a rider how to hold their reins \n Able to check &a mp\; tighten a girth before mounting\n Yard Safety \n Name different pa rts of the Bridle \n Name different parts of the Saddle \n Name the di fferent items of the grooming kit \n Lead a pony in-hand \n Correct wa y to give a pony an apple/carrot \n Approach &\; Handle a pony correc tly \n Catch a pony &\; Put a head collar on \n Demonstrate awarene ss off safety rules &\; hazards \n Tie up a pony correctly\n Able to tie a haynet up correctly \n Pick up &\; pick out feet \n Know the Principles of watering &\; feeding \n How to stop a car \n How to say 'thank-you'\n How to cross a road \n Know which side of the road yo u should ride on\n Understand the simple 'green cross code' \n Know it is safer to ride on the road with adults or parents \n Demonstrate Mucki ng Out\n Bed down \n Demonstrate watering the horse \n Put on and Rem ove  Aa head collar correctly\n Name &\; Describe different types of bedding \n Be able to Put on a Saddle \n Be able to put on a Bridle \ n Name different horses colours \n Name different Markings\n Name diff erent Rugs \n Know the importance of ill-fitting rugs \n Know how to f it a rug \n Know how to care for &\; clean saddlery \n Have knowled ge of correctly fitting tack \n Be able to identify Poisonous Plants\n Untack correctly\n Communicate with Riders &\; Instructors when assist ing \n How to ride along a road\n How to signal Right &\; Left\n Sh ow an awareness of dangers while riding on a road\n\n \;\n\nSILVER BAD GE\n\nCovered in the Green &\; Orange Syllabus’s\n\n Horse &\; Ri der 1st Aid Kit\n Field Safety (shelter\, fencing\, poisonous plants\, ma intenance)\n Treatment of minor Cuts &\; Abrasions\n Correct handling of ponies’ legs\n Correct grooming of ponies’ feet &\; legs\n Ta ck up &\; Un-tack Unaided &\; put away correctly\n Basic feeding\n clean &\; assemble tack\n catch a pony &\; turn it away in the fie ld\n know that water must always be available\n know the structure of th e horse’s foot\n know the names of the farrier’s tools\n identify si gns of ill health\n understand the importance of roughage\n requirements to plaiting a horse\n plaiting a horse\n different mouth pieces &\; their actions\n arena safety – rules of the arena\n yard jobs (&\; safety)\n how to lead a pony along a road on foot\n how to slow a car do wn\n care &\; working of a pony off grass\n elementary feeding\, wate ring &\; cleanliness of the pony\n know when a pony needs shoeing\n k now what to look for in a newly shod foot\n know the main indications for health in the pony\n recognise when a pony is lame\n know how to load & amp\; un-load a pony\n understand the importance &\; the means of prot ecting les while travelling\n put a rug\, roller\, tail bandage &\; Ne w Zealand on\n know what equipment is needed for lunging\n know reasons for lunging\n skeleton of the horse\n know different bandages &\; app ly them\n knowledge of ill-fitting bandages\n show knowledge of hay & \; haylage\n understand the importance of roughage\n knowledge of stabli ng-ventilation-lights-drainage-shelter &\; warmth\n take a horse’s t emperature\n weigh a horse\n understand the reasons for equipment a hors e is wearing\n how to lead a pony along a road while mounted \;\n\nA Parent/Guardian is to attend to drop children off for stable management an d pick them up again\n\nUpon completing each syllabus you will receive a c ertificate once you receive your certificate ONCE YOU HAVE COMPLETED THE B ADGE you can then move on to the next BADGE levels\n\nThis means: if there are no badges displayed\, they are at level 1+2\, working towards Bronze. \n\nIf a Bronze badge is displayed\, they have completed level 1+2 and now working towards Silver (level 3+4) and so on.\n\nTo access this you will have to go on to you account via web link https://bankfarmridingschool.ec pro.co.uk and go on to MY ACCOUNT and then on to RIDERS you will see on t here NOTES/PROGRESS and BADGES EARNED\, simply click on RIDER NOTES and ev erything will be displayed.\n\nAnyone wishing to attend the yard either af ter school or at weekend has to be actively doing our stable management se ssions and have to have of completed level 2 to continue coming on the yar d but do not have to progress to level 3 if not wishing too (However if th e child is under 12years old for insurance purposes there is a charge for them to be here for the day to stay at the yard)\n\nYOU HAVE TO BOOK ON TH E BOOKING SYSTEM FOR ANYONE WANTING TO STAY AND HELP\n\n \;\n\nThey wi ll require\npaper\nfolder\npens\nriding hat for when around and handling h orses\ngloves for when handling horses\nAccess to a printer to print off S HEETS required which can be found on our google drive please follow the li nk https://drive.google.com/drive/folders/1gyFxnlXmtlMmrK_mIGG-8HuX6gHAEPF C?usp=sharing\n\nIf you have no access to a printer please let us know and we will print you a pack off at an additional charge\n\nNON REFUNDABLE\n\ nIF YOU WOULD LIKE A FOLDER MADE UP PLEASE LET LINDSEY KNOW AND THIS WILL BE AN ADDITIONAL CHARGE\n\n \;\n\nNONE DISCOUNTABLE\n\n\n\n\n END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:9019@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251210T180000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251210T190000 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/mixed-level-group-lesson-3/ SUMMARY:Mixed Level Group Lesson DESCRIPTION: \;\nYou will need to be Registered and Added your Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk You will also of had to be gr aded to see what level you are with us and then you will be able to see wh at availability we have\nLevel Three\n1. Explain prepare to Canter\n(CHECK POSTIION\, SHORTEN REINS SLIGHTLY\, HALF HALT BUT KEEP LEG ON\, SITTING T ROT\, ASK AS GOING IN TO THE CORNER\, INSIDE BEND FOR CORRECT CANTER LEAD) \n 2. Explain &\; Use Aids to canter\n(SITTING TROT –\n\nLITTLE BIT MORE WEIGHT ON THE INSIDE SEAT BONE YOUR SEAT DRAWS UP THE HIND LEG STRONG RHYTHM -–\n\nINSIDE LEG ON THE GIRTH ASKS FOR MILD BEND TO PREPARE THE INSIDE LEAD &\; HELPS WITH BALANCE-\n\nINSIDE REIN DOES VERY LITTLE ACT S AS A NECK REIN IT SITS THERE AND PREVENTS HORSE DRIFTING OUT –\n\n1 TO 3 HALF HALTS BEFORE TRANSITION TO BALANCE WEIGHT TO THE HIND END KEEP LEG S ON FOR IMPULSION AFTER THE HALF HALTS —\n\nOUTSIDE LEG SLIGHTLY BACK B EHIND THE GIRTH TELLS THEM WHICH LEAD BEHIND\n\nOUTSIDE REIN HELP TO CONTR OL SPEED AND KEEP THEM OUT ON THE TRACK)\n3. Figure of 8s\n(2 20M CIRCLES PUT TOGETHER – NO STRAIGHT LINES)\n4. Serpentines\n(NO STRAIGHT LINES bu t when starting to learn a serpentine it is best to rid the straight line then the loop will become better with practice\, LOOPS\, EACH TIME CROSS O VER THE CENTER LINE SHOULD CHANGE DIAGONAL\, LOOPS EQUAL) (3 LOOP\, 4 LOOP \, 5 LOOPS ECT)\n\n(diagrams are 3 loops serpentine)\n5. Trot 20m circles from E &\; B \n6. Balance Canter\n 7. Understand &\; Explain Cant er Lead\n(HORSES FRONT INSIDE LEG SHOULD STRIKE OUT FURTHER FORWARD THAN T HE OUTSIDE FRONT LEG\n\nTHEY TAKE OFF WITH THERE OUTSIDE BACK LEG AND LEAD WITH THERE INSIDE FRONT\n\n(THEY CAN BE CORRECT WITH FRONT LEGS AND INCOR RECT WITH BACK LEGS WHICH IS CALLED MANY NAMES BUT WE USE THE TERM DIS-UNI TED THIS USUALLY FEELS AWFUL\, BUMPY &\; OFF BALANCE. BACK TO TROT AND ASK AGAIN)\n\n(IF THE HORSE IS INCORRECT IN FRONT BACK TO TROT ASK AGAIN)\ n 8. Check Canter Lead Whilst mounted\n 9. Walk without stirrups\n 10 . Trot without stirrups\n 11. Adjust Own Stirrups\n 12. Understand bea ts of Pace\, Walk\, Trot &\; Canter\n\n WALK IS 4 BEAT EACH FOOT HITS THE GROUND INDEPENDENTLY\n\nThe footfall sequence is:\n\nLeft Hind – Lef t Front – Right Hind – Right Front.\n\n TROT IS A 2 BEAT FEET GO IN D IAGONAL PAIRS\n\nThe footfall sequence is:\n\nLeft Hind + Right Front – Suspension – Right Hind + Left Front – Suspension\n\n CANTER IS A 3 B EAT 1 PAIR OF FEET STRIKE AND THE OTHER 2 LAND INDEPENDENTLY\n\nRight Lead Canter\n\nLeft Hind – Right Hind + Left Front – Right Front – Suspe nsion\n\nLeft Lead Canter\n\nRight Hind – Left Hind + Right Front – Le ft Front – Suspension\n\n DON’T NEED TO KNOW GALLOP BUT IF THEY WANT TO KNOW IT IS 4 BEAT SEQUENCE\n\nRight Lead Gallop\n\nLeft Hind – Right Hind – Left Front – Right Front – Suspension\n\nLeft Lead Gallop\n\n Right Hind – Left Hind – Right Front – Left Front – Suspension\n13 .  Position for Level 3\n(VERTICAL LINE EAR- SHOULDER- HIP – HEEL\, EYE S UP AND AHEAD\, STRAIGHT LINE FROM ELBOWS SOFT WITH SLIGHT BEND – HAND DOWN THE REIN TO THE HORSES MOUTH\, THUMBS ON TOP POINTING TOWARDS HORSES EARS\, SIT EQUALLY ARCROSS BOTH SEAT BONES\, RELAX SEAT\, HIPS &\; PELV IS\, KNEE &\; THIGH REST LIGHTLY AGAINS SADDLE NOT GRIPPING)\n 14.   Understand Aids (Natural &\; Artificial)\n\n COMMUNICATION BETWEEN RID ERS AND HORSE)\n ARTIFICIAL AIDS- MAINLY WHIPS &\; SPURS\n NATURAL AI DS- VOICE\, HANDS\, LEGS\, BODY\, SEAT\n\n(HANDS – COMMUNICATION THROUGH REINS TO THE BIT\, SHOULD BE LIGHT FLEXIBLE- USE OF HAND AID MUST BE USED WITH SEAT\, LEG AIDS- ABOVE HORSES WITHERS LEVEL WITH EACH OTHER\n\n TUR NING – GENTLE SQUEEZING THE REIN ASKS THE HORSE TO TURN HEAD IN THAT DIR ECTION\n HALTING –PRESSURE ON BOTH REINS WITH SEAT AND LEG PROVEDING EN ERGY A HALT WILL PRODUCED\n\n(VOICE – WORD\, TONE &\; LENGTH OF TIME THE WORD IS HELD FOR INDICATES UPWARDS/DOWNWARDS TRANSITIONS\n\n UPWARD T RANSITION – EMPHASIS THE LETTER WITH RISE IN TONE TOWARDS END OF WORD\n DOWNWARD TRANSITION – LOWER TONE TOWRDS END OF WORD STRETCH THE WORD OU T\n COLLECTION – CALM\n\n(SEAT – COLLECTION\, BALANCE\, STEERING\, FO RWARD MOVEMENT\, CONTROL\, STABILITY\n\n SEAT – CENTRAL IN SADDLE\, EVE N DISTRIBUTION OF WEIGHT OFN SEAT BONES\, ALTER WHEN ASK HORSE TO MOVE DIR ECTION\, DO NOT COLLAPSE THROUGH HIP\n HIPS –LEVEL AT ALL TIMES\, SUPPL E TO ALLOW MOVEMENT ABSORBED THROUGH SEAT\n PELVIS – ABSORD MOVEMENT\, HELPS CONTROL CENTRE OF GRAVITY\, ENCOURANGES HORSE TO ACCELERATE\n\n(LEGS – USED WITH SEAT &\; HAND TO COMMUNICATE – DIRECTION\, GAIT\, LEVE L OF ACTIVITY\, UPWARD DOWNWARD TRANSITIONS\, LATERAL MOVEMENTS\n\n ON TH E GIRTH – PRODUCES ENERGY/FORWARD MOVEMENT – BOTH LEGS ON THE GIRTH FO RWARD/STRAIGHT\, 1 LEG BEHIND THE GIRTH WILL ASK EITHER CHANGE DIRECTION O R CANTER DEPENDING ON LEVEL OF PRESSURE\n LOWER LEG BEHIND THE GIRTH – ABOUT 2-3 INCHES MORE CONTROL OVER HINDQUARTERS- FORWARD\, BACKWARD\, DIAG ONALLY OR SIDEWAYS MOVEMENTS\, UPWARD TRANSITIONS EG CANTER OR LATERAL MOV EMENT EG LEG YIELD\, BOTH LEGS BEHIND THE GIRTH CORRECT USE WITH SEAT AND LEGS WILL AID REIN BACK\n\n(WHIP – INSIDE HAND USED TO BACK UP RIDERS LE G AND ENCOURAGE HORSE TO MOVE FORWARD)\n\n(SPURS – ON THE RIDERS HEEL TO GIVE PRECISE LEG AID ONLY WORN BY EXPERIENCED RIDERS)\n 15. Balance\n16 . Check Girth\nLevel Four\n1. Continue working on Balanced Cantering \n2. Trotting Pole without stirrups \n3. 7 phases of jumping\n\n (TURN -APPR OARCH-TAKE OFF-FLIGHT-LAND-GET-AWAY- TURN)\n REMAIN BALANCED\n IMPULSION \n POSITION – OPEN SHOULDERS ON TURN \n 1. TURN  – ACCURATELY – LINE UP WITH CENTRE – SIT UP – LOOK AHEAD – RIDE LEG TO HAND – KE EP BALANCED RHYTHM – IMPULSION\n  2. APPROACH  – CENTRE OF JUMP – SIT UP – LOOK AHEAD CHANNELING HORSE FORWARD – BETWEEN HAND &\; LEG TO MAINTAIN STRAIGHT LINE – MAINTAIN IMPULSION &\; BALANCE\n 3. TAKE OFF – POINT WHICH HORSE GATHERS HINDLEGS UNDERNEATH ITS BODY & \; STARTS TO LIFT FOREHAND – LOWER LEG SECURELY WRAPPED ROUND – MAINTA IN ENERGY &\; FORWARDNESS – HANDS FOLLOW MOVEMENT OF HORSES HEAD NECK BUT MAINTAIN CONTACT THROUGH REIN – LOOK AHEAD\n 4. FLIGHT – IN THE AIR – FOREHAND WELL LIFTED\, BACK WELL ROUNDED\, FORELEGS &\; HINDLEG S TUCKED UP – FOLDED IN TO JUMPING POSITION\, UPPER BODY LOWERED\, SEAT SLIPPED TO BACK OF SADDLE – HANDS ALLOW STRETCH THE NECK\, BACK &\; B ODY GIVES FREEDOM OF MOVEMENT\, WHILE MAINTAINING LIGHT CONTACT – LOWER LEG STAYS SECURELY WRAPPED AROUND MAINTAIN BALANCE\n 5. LAND – HORSE STRETCHES OUT &\; EXTENDS FORELEGS READY TO LAND – HORSE SHOULD LAND ON FORELEG WANTING THE CANTER LEAD ON – UPPER BODY COMES BACK UP – MAI NTAIN CONTACT – LEGS REMAIN IN POSTION – LOOK AHEAD\n 6. GET AWAY   ­­- MOVING AWAY FROM THE JUMP TO THE NEXT – MAKE SURE HORSE IS BALAN CED\, PLENTY OF ENERGY &\; IMPULSION- CORRECT CANTER LEAD – LEGS SECU RE\n 7. TURN –  TURNS AWAY FROM ONE FENCE TO ANOTHER THIS STAGE STAR TS ALL OVER AGAIN OR IF SINGLE FENCE STAY STRAIGHT\n\n4/5. Able Ride A Dem i Voltes &\; Reverse Demi Voltes\n\n DEMI VOLTE – ½ 10 MENTRE CIRCL E TO THE CENTRE LINE THEN A DIAGONAL LINE BACK TO THE TRACK TO CHANGE THE REIN\n REVERSE DEMI VOLTE – DIAGONAL LINE TO CENTRE LINE LETTER THEN ½ 10 METRE CIRCLE BACK TO THE TRACK TO CHANGE THE REIN \n\n6. 2X ½ 10 met re Circles to change the rein  \n7. Turn on the Forehand\n\n HALT\, TO STOP FORWARD MOVEMENT APPLY STEADY PRESSURE ON REINS – SIT UP STRAIGHT  \n PRESSURE PLACED 3-4 INCHS BEHIND THE GIRTH WITH YOUR OUTSIDE LEG – H ORSE WILL MOVE AWAY FROM THE PRESSURE\, HORSES HIND LEGS WILL MOVE IN FRON T &\; ACROSS THE OTHER HIND LEG\, THE OPPOSITE FRONT LEG TO YOUR PRESSU RE LEG WILL ALSO MOVE AROUND THE OTHER FRONT LEG WILL STAY STILL \n YOUR OTHER LEG (INSIDE) SHOULD BE KEPT STEADY SO TO KEEP YOUR BALANCE AND STOP THE HORSE TRYING TO TURN TOO QUICKLY \n REINS TO CONTROL FRONT OF HORSE – GOOD CONTROL PREVENTS YOUR HORSE MOVING FORWARDS – OUTSIDE HAND LIF T UP AND BACK TO FLEX HORSES NECK SLIGHTLY IN THE DIRECTION OF TURN\, FLEX UNTIL YOU CAN SEE CORNER OF EYE – USE OTHER REIN FOR SUPPORT TO KEEP HO RSE FROM MOVING FORWARDS\, OUTSIDE REIN CLOSE TO NECK   \n HALF HALT E ACH STEP UNTIL COMPLETE TURN 180 DEGREES – POSITVIE PRAISE AFTER \n TU RNING RIGHT RIGHT LEG BACK – RIGHT REIN FLEX \n TURNING LEFT LEFT LEG BACK – LEFT REIN FLEX\n\n8. 15m circles in walk  (A&\;C)\n9. 10m ci rcles in walk (A&\;C)  \n10. Lighten seat \nINVOLVES STANDING ON YOU R OWN 2 FEET WHILE WORKING YOUR HORSE – BALANCE YOURSELF\, NO LEANING\, HOLDING ON CROUCHING DOWN ON NECK – CLEARANCE BETWEEN BOTTOM AND SADDLE – ALLOWS HORSE TO MOVE MORE FREELY – IMPROVES BALANCE\, FITNESS AND CO ORDINATION- FEET CORRECTLY POSITIONED IN STIRRUP\, ALLOWS ANKLES\, KNEES & amp\; HIPS BECOME MORE EFFECTIVE SHOCK ABSORBERS – ENGAGE YOUR CORE (TUM MY MUSCLES) – STRAIGHT BACK – HANDS &\; ARMS INDEPENDENT KEEP CONTA CT\n11. Jumping Position \nTHIS INVOLVES THE RIDER CENTERED OVER HIS/HER FEET – STIRRUP LEATHERS 90 DEGREE ANGLE TO THE GROUND\, CONTINUING A LIN E UPWARDS FROM THE STIRRUP LEATHERS- THE HEAD\, SHOULDERS &\; KNEES FAL L IN FRONT OF THE LINE – HIPS FALL BEHIND IT\n\n LEG HANG DOWNSIDE EVEN CONTACT ALONG WHOLE LENGTH – INNER THIGH\, KNEE &\; CALF – WEIGHT ALONG BACK OF LEG INTO HEEL FLEXIBLE ANKLE \n SEAT\, HIPS &\; THIGHS –WEIGHT TOWARDS PELVIS\, ENOUGH WEIGHT IN STIRRUP TO SUSPEND IN THE AIR OVER THE SADDLE – HIPS NOT TOO FAR FORWARD IT CHANGES THE BALANCE –HIP S\, FLEXIBLE\, MOVE BACKWARDS\, BETWEEN FENCES THE THIGHS TAKE UP WEIGHT O F RIDER NOT THE SEAT BONES\n UPPER BODY\, SHOULDERS\, HEAD\, TRUNK – LO OK UP IN DIRECTION YOU ARE GOING – BACK FLAT – OPEN CHEST – SHOULDER S OPEN \n RELEASE – GRAB MANE OR SLIDE HANDS UP CREST AS TAKE OFF\n\n1 2. Single Fence Jumping  \n13. Be able to check &\; adjust girth whi le mounted  \n14. Understand &\; Explain Impulsion\nMOVEMENT OF HOES E – FORWARD AND CONTROLLED POWER – EFFECTIVE USE OF POWER IN THE HIND QUARTERS – TO ACHIEVE A HORSE MUST NOT USE SPEED BUT USE MUSCLUAR CONTRO L – HORSE RELAXED BACK WILL ALLOW HINDQUARTERS TO COME WELL UNDER ITS BO DY AND THIS IS CALLED “ENGAGED”.\n15. Understand Half halt &\; whe n Used \n(A SPONGE EFFECT ON THE REIN(S))\n16. Trotting Poles \n17. Cant er Poles\n18. Raised Trotting Poles \nTO BUILD UP MUSCLE ON TOP LINE SHOU LDERS AND BACK – MORE FLEXIBLE – ENCOURAGES LEGS TO LIFT OVER JUMPS\n1 9. Balance for Level 4\n20. Position for Level 4\n21. More Changes of Rein s &\; Other Movements  \n22. Continue Perfecting school movements and changes of reins learnt in previous Levels \n23. Canter 20m Circles\n2 4. Start Strides\n25. 15m circles in Trot (A&\;C)\n26. 10m circles in  Trot (A&\;C)\n27. Canter without Stirrups\n28. Acute Transitions\n29. Confidence\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\ n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n&nb sp\;\nLevel Five\n1. Jump combinations \n2. Gird work \n3. Knowledge of strides &\; Jumping Strides\n \;\n4. 15m circles in trot\n \;\n 5. 10m circles in trot\n6. Shallow loops\n7. Poles in canter\n\n\n\nGait\n Feet\nBoot Lengths\nSteps\n\n\nWalk\n2.5′ – 3′\n3 – 4\n1 normal\n\ n\nTrot\n3.5′ – 4′\n4.5 – 5\n1 large\n\n\nCanter\n9′ – 12′\n 12 – 16\n3 normal steps\n(9′ stride)or4 normal steps\n(12′ stride)\n \n\n\n8. Rein Back \nESTABLISH HALT – SEAT REMAIN IMMOBILE – LEGS ASK HORSE TO KEEP CONTACT WITH BIT – KEEP REIN CONTACT SOFT – MOVE BOTH L EGS BACK FROM HIP – KEEP WEIGH DOWN THROUGH BACK AND SEAT – ASK TO MOV E BACK\, LEG\, SEAT &\; REIN – WITH SEAT PRESS BACKWARDS\, UPPER BODY STAYS TALL THIS ASKS THE HORSE TO LOWER HIS CROUP AND MOVE BACK – LEG A ND REIN WORK IN ALTERNATE PAIRS\, LEG REIN 1 SIDE ASK THEN THE OTHER SIDE\ , HORSE WILL MOVE BACK IN DIAGONAL PAIRS – RELEASE PRESSURE AND THEN ASK THEM TO MOVE FORWARDS AGAIN\n9. Aids of a circle\n\n INSIDE LEG — ON G IRTH — KEEPS IMPULSION – ENGAGES INSIDE HIND LEG – ASKS FOR BEND \n OUTSIDE LEG – SLIGHTLY BEHIND THE GIRTH – CONTROLS HINDQUARTERS STOP S THEM FALLING OUT – GENERATES FORWARD MOVEMENT \n INSIDE HAND – BEN D THROUGH HORSES NECK \n OUTSIDE HAND – CONTROLS PACE – PREVENTS NEC K OVER BENDING – PREVENTS HORSE FALLING OUT THROUGH SHOULDERS\n HIPS &a mp\; SHOULDERS PARALLEL WITH HORSES SHOULDERS – BODY UPRIGHT – LOOK AH EAD ROUND THE CIRCLE\n\n10. Canter without Stirrups \n11. Continue Perfe cting Jumping Position \n12. Continue Perfecting Lighten Seat \n13. Leg Yield\nEASIEST WAY FROM ¾ LINE BACK TO THE TRACK – HELPS DEVELOP FEEL & amp\; COORDINAITON — FORWARD &\; SIDEWAYS – BODY REMAINS STRAIGHT –INSIDE FEET STEP REGULARLY &\; EVENLY INFRONT &\; ACROSS THE OUTS IDE FEET— RIDING ON 2 TRACKS\n\n TURN ON TO ¾ LINE – FEW STEPS STRAI GHT\n MOVE WEIGHT IN TO INSIDE SEAT BONE \n\n\n INSIDE LEG SLIGHTLY BEH IND THE GIRTH –PUSH THE HORSES QAURTERS FORWARDS &\; SIDWAYS TOWARDS THE TRACK \n OUTSIDE LEG ON THE GIRTH BUT IF THE HORSE STARTS TO LEAD WI TH ITS QUARTERS MOVE THE OUTSIDE LEG BACK A LITTLE ALSO HELPS KEEP MOVING FORWARDS \n INSIDE REIN – SLIGHT FLEXION TO INSIDE \n OUTSIDE REIN K EEPS HORSE STRAIGHT – PREVENTS TOO MUCH NECK BEND – CONTROL OUTSIDE SH OULDER\n AS HIT THE TRACK – REMOVE FLEXION AND MAKE HORSE STRAIGHT  \ n\n14. Shoulder In \nHIND LEGS ON LINE OF TRAVEL\, SHOULDERS DISPLACED I NSIDE — 3 TRACKS – OUTSIDE HIND LEG TRACKS ALONG WALL\, INSIDE HIND LE G &\; OUTSIDE FORELEG ON SAME TRACK PARALLEL TO WALL\, INSIDE FORELEG O N INNER TRACK PARALLEL TO WALL — BENDING BODY AROUND RIDERS INSIDE LEG W ITH POLL FLEXED TO THE INSIDE – AWAY FROM THE DIRECTION OF TRAVEL) KEEP RHYTHMIC\, RELAXED\, CONNECTED &\; WITH SOME IMPULSION – UNDERSTANDE AIDS FOR LEG YEILDING — HORSE MUST BEND CORRECTLY ON A 10M CIRCLE ASWEL L \n\n Start with a 10-meter circle\n Inside rein leads the shoulders ( and neck) off the wall while the inside leg pushes the rib cage and inside hind into the outside rein\, which catches the shoulder and produces the half halt. The outside leg behind the girth keeps the haunches from fallin g out.\n Weight equal on both sides\,Horse follows your weight. If you si t to the inside too much\, the horse might move in that direction and off the wall.\n Your shoulders and hips should be turned inside slightly para llel to the horse’s shoulders so the outside hip and shoulder move forwa rd\n Horses shoulders should be on the wall at the end of the movement fr om the inside leg. Don’t stay in the shoulder-in for too long. There is no test that has the exercise ridden for more than half the long side (30 meters).\n\n15. Dressage tests \n16. Course work\n17. Flying Changes \ n\n\n\n\n\n\nASKING FOR LEFT FLYING CHANGE \n\n SEAT – RIGHT SEAT BONE FORWARDS TOWARDS HORSES RIGHT EAR \n RIGHT LEG – CLOSE RIGHT LEG ON G IRTH ASK HORSE TO GO FORWARDS DURING CHANGE \n LEFT LEG – MOVE LEFT LE G BEHIND THE GIRTH SIGNAL NEW OUTSIDE HIND LEG TO STRIKE OFF INTO NEW LEAD – QUICK AID \n LEFT REIN – CLOSE LEFT HAND IN A FIST TO KEEP LEFT H IND LEG ON GROUND AND MAINTAIN UPHILL BALANCE \n RIGHT REIN – SOFTEN R IGHT REIN SO NOT TO BLOCK NEW INSIDE FRONT LEG FROM COMING FORWARD\n\n18.  Turn on the Forehand\n\n HALT\, TO STOP FORWARD MOVEMENT APPLY STEADY P RESSURE ON REINS – SIT UP STRAIGHT \n PRESSURE PLACED 3-4 INCHS BEHIND THE GIRTH WITH YOUR OUTSIDE LEG – HORSE WILL MOVE AWAY FROM THE PRESSUR E\, HORSES HIND LEGS WILL MOVE IN FRONT &\; ACROSS THE OTHER HIND LEG\, THE OPPOSITE FRONT LEG TO YOUR PRESSURE LEG WILL ALSO MOVE AROUND THE OTH ER FRONT LEG WILL STAY STILL \n YOUR OTHER LEG (INSIDE) SHOULD BE KEPT S TEADY SO TO KEEP YOUR BALANCE AND STOP THE HORSE TRYING TO TURN TOO QUICKL Y \n REINS TO CONTROL FRONT OF HORSE – GOOD CONTROL PREVENTS YOUR HORS E MOVING FORWARDS – OUTSIDE HAND LIFT UP AND BACK TO FLEX HORSES NECK SL IGHTLY IN THE DIRECTION OF TURN\, FLEX UNTIL YOU CAN SEE CORNER OF EYE – USE OTHER REIN FOR SUPPORT TO KEEP HORSE FROM MOVING FORWARDS\, OUTSIDE R EIN CLOSE TO NECK   \n HALF HALT EACH STEP UNTIL COMPLETE TURN 180 DEG REES – POSITVIE PRAISE AFTER \n\n\n TURNING RIGHT RIGHT LEG BACK – R IGHT REIN FLEX \n TURNING LEFT LEFT LEG BACK – LEFT REIN FLEX \n\n19.  Outline\nCORRECT OUTLINE IS OUTCOME OF BUILD UP OF CORRECT MUSCLE – BE NEFITS OF BEING RIDDEN IN THIS FRAME\, NEEDS TO BE WORKING CORRECTLY\, MOV E FREELY IN CONTACT\, BACK RAISED &\; SUPPLE\, NECK EXTEND IN LIGHT ARC H FROM WITHER TO POLL WITH NOSE JUST IN FRONT OF THE VERTICAL.\n\nBalance\ n\n Aim to maintain a light rein contact to encourage the horse to stay i n balance. Horse who is unbalanced and in particular heavy on their foreha nd will lean on the bit and the reins pulling the rider’s arms forward.\ n\nStretching\n\n When the rider moves their hands in a forward direction combined with the use of their leg and seat pushing\, the horse to remain engaged through their hindquarters and light on the bit thereby allowing the rider to open out the horses neck and frame.\n Stretching can be used when asking for free walk on a long rein or when opening the horses strid e out\, for example when riding lengthened strides.  \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\ n\n\n20. Footfall \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n2 1. Acute Transitions\n22. Balance  \n23. Position\n24. Self Confidence  \n25. Helping the Horse\n26. Confidence and ALL horses within the Riding S chool   \n\nLevel Six\n1. More work on Strides\n\n\n\n \n12hh\n15hh\n17 hh\n\n\nTrot to Bounce\n7-8ft\n9-10ft\n11-12ft\n\n\nCanter to Bounce\n8-9f t\n10-11ft\n12-13ft\n\n\nTrot Double 1 stride\n14-16ft\n17-19ft\n20-22ft\n \n\nCanter Double 1 stride\n17-19ft\n20-22ft\n23-25ft\n\n\nTrot Double 2 s tride \n23-25ft\n27-29ft \n31-33ft\n\n\nCanter Double 2 stride\n26-28ft\ n30-32ft\n34-36ft \n\n\nTreble – usually 1st part 1 stride\, 2nd part 2 strides \n\n\n\n2. More Grid work\n3. Aids to Canter\n4. Aids on a Cir cle\n5. more combination work\n6. Flying Change on Figure of 8\n7. Outline \n8. Turn on the Haunches\n9. Acute Transitions\n10. Canter Leg Yield\n11. Balance\n12. Position\n13. Fluent over course\n14. Drill work\n15. Flying change on straight\n16. Continue perfecting everything you have learnt ov er the levels – Keep going you never stop learning and improving \n17. Lunging/Groundwork\n\n\n\n END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:9804@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251211T130000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251211T140000 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/little-tigers-2/ SUMMARY:Little Tigers DESCRIPTION: \;\nYou will need to be Registered and Added your Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk You will also of had to be gr aded to see what level you are with us and then you will be able to see wh at availability we have\n\n\n\n\nIntroducing our younger riders &\; rid ers that need additions support!\nCome along to Bank Farm Riding School an d meet our friendly ponies who just can't wait to be pampered and petted b y you.\n\nEach session lasts 1hour. The session includes a short ride on a pony\, or just a sit on\, for those that want.\n\nWork through a Little T igers Syllabus and receive a Certificate upon completion - fun way for chi ldren and adults to learn more about ponies\n\nblock booking discount same day per week Courses will be on Mondays 10.30am-11.30am\, Thursdays 1pm-2 pm &\; Fridays 10.30am-11.30am\n\nParents/carer/guardian will be requir ed to assist their rider - the instructor will go through everything with you on the day please wear a shoe\, boot or wellie with a slight heal noth ing flat soled. leggings or jogging bottoms\, no skirts or shorts\n\n\n\n\ n END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:6038@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251211T180000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251211T190000 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/mixed-level-group-lesson-3/ SUMMARY:Mixed Level Group Lesson DESCRIPTION: \;\nYou will need to be Registered and Added your Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk You will also of had to be gr aded to see what level you are with us and then you will be able to see wh at availability we have\nLevel Three\n1. Explain prepare to Canter\n(CHECK POSTIION\, SHORTEN REINS SLIGHTLY\, HALF HALT BUT KEEP LEG ON\, SITTING T ROT\, ASK AS GOING IN TO THE CORNER\, INSIDE BEND FOR CORRECT CANTER LEAD) \n 2. Explain &\; Use Aids to canter\n(SITTING TROT –\n\nLITTLE BIT MORE WEIGHT ON THE INSIDE SEAT BONE YOUR SEAT DRAWS UP THE HIND LEG STRONG RHYTHM -–\n\nINSIDE LEG ON THE GIRTH ASKS FOR MILD BEND TO PREPARE THE INSIDE LEAD &\; HELPS WITH BALANCE-\n\nINSIDE REIN DOES VERY LITTLE ACT S AS A NECK REIN IT SITS THERE AND PREVENTS HORSE DRIFTING OUT –\n\n1 TO 3 HALF HALTS BEFORE TRANSITION TO BALANCE WEIGHT TO THE HIND END KEEP LEG S ON FOR IMPULSION AFTER THE HALF HALTS —\n\nOUTSIDE LEG SLIGHTLY BACK B EHIND THE GIRTH TELLS THEM WHICH LEAD BEHIND\n\nOUTSIDE REIN HELP TO CONTR OL SPEED AND KEEP THEM OUT ON THE TRACK)\n3. Figure of 8s\n(2 20M CIRCLES PUT TOGETHER – NO STRAIGHT LINES)\n4. Serpentines\n(NO STRAIGHT LINES bu t when starting to learn a serpentine it is best to rid the straight line then the loop will become better with practice\, LOOPS\, EACH TIME CROSS O VER THE CENTER LINE SHOULD CHANGE DIAGONAL\, LOOPS EQUAL) (3 LOOP\, 4 LOOP \, 5 LOOPS ECT)\n\n(diagrams are 3 loops serpentine)\n5. Trot 20m circles from E &\; B \n6. Balance Canter\n 7. Understand &\; Explain Cant er Lead\n(HORSES FRONT INSIDE LEG SHOULD STRIKE OUT FURTHER FORWARD THAN T HE OUTSIDE FRONT LEG\n\nTHEY TAKE OFF WITH THERE OUTSIDE BACK LEG AND LEAD WITH THERE INSIDE FRONT\n\n(THEY CAN BE CORRECT WITH FRONT LEGS AND INCOR RECT WITH BACK LEGS WHICH IS CALLED MANY NAMES BUT WE USE THE TERM DIS-UNI TED THIS USUALLY FEELS AWFUL\, BUMPY &\; OFF BALANCE. BACK TO TROT AND ASK AGAIN)\n\n(IF THE HORSE IS INCORRECT IN FRONT BACK TO TROT ASK AGAIN)\ n 8. Check Canter Lead Whilst mounted\n 9. Walk without stirrups\n 10 . Trot without stirrups\n 11. Adjust Own Stirrups\n 12. Understand bea ts of Pace\, Walk\, Trot &\; Canter\n\n WALK IS 4 BEAT EACH FOOT HITS THE GROUND INDEPENDENTLY\n\nThe footfall sequence is:\n\nLeft Hind – Lef t Front – Right Hind – Right Front.\n\n TROT IS A 2 BEAT FEET GO IN D IAGONAL PAIRS\n\nThe footfall sequence is:\n\nLeft Hind + Right Front – Suspension – Right Hind + Left Front – Suspension\n\n CANTER IS A 3 B EAT 1 PAIR OF FEET STRIKE AND THE OTHER 2 LAND INDEPENDENTLY\n\nRight Lead Canter\n\nLeft Hind – Right Hind + Left Front – Right Front – Suspe nsion\n\nLeft Lead Canter\n\nRight Hind – Left Hind + Right Front – Le ft Front – Suspension\n\n DON’T NEED TO KNOW GALLOP BUT IF THEY WANT TO KNOW IT IS 4 BEAT SEQUENCE\n\nRight Lead Gallop\n\nLeft Hind – Right Hind – Left Front – Right Front – Suspension\n\nLeft Lead Gallop\n\n Right Hind – Left Hind – Right Front – Left Front – Suspension\n13 .  Position for Level 3\n(VERTICAL LINE EAR- SHOULDER- HIP – HEEL\, EYE S UP AND AHEAD\, STRAIGHT LINE FROM ELBOWS SOFT WITH SLIGHT BEND – HAND DOWN THE REIN TO THE HORSES MOUTH\, THUMBS ON TOP POINTING TOWARDS HORSES EARS\, SIT EQUALLY ARCROSS BOTH SEAT BONES\, RELAX SEAT\, HIPS &\; PELV IS\, KNEE &\; THIGH REST LIGHTLY AGAINS SADDLE NOT GRIPPING)\n 14.   Understand Aids (Natural &\; Artificial)\n\n COMMUNICATION BETWEEN RID ERS AND HORSE)\n ARTIFICIAL AIDS- MAINLY WHIPS &\; SPURS\n NATURAL AI DS- VOICE\, HANDS\, LEGS\, BODY\, SEAT\n\n(HANDS – COMMUNICATION THROUGH REINS TO THE BIT\, SHOULD BE LIGHT FLEXIBLE- USE OF HAND AID MUST BE USED WITH SEAT\, LEG AIDS- ABOVE HORSES WITHERS LEVEL WITH EACH OTHER\n\n TUR NING – GENTLE SQUEEZING THE REIN ASKS THE HORSE TO TURN HEAD IN THAT DIR ECTION\n HALTING –PRESSURE ON BOTH REINS WITH SEAT AND LEG PROVEDING EN ERGY A HALT WILL PRODUCED\n\n(VOICE – WORD\, TONE &\; LENGTH OF TIME THE WORD IS HELD FOR INDICATES UPWARDS/DOWNWARDS TRANSITIONS\n\n UPWARD T RANSITION – EMPHASIS THE LETTER WITH RISE IN TONE TOWARDS END OF WORD\n DOWNWARD TRANSITION – LOWER TONE TOWRDS END OF WORD STRETCH THE WORD OU T\n COLLECTION – CALM\n\n(SEAT – COLLECTION\, BALANCE\, STEERING\, FO RWARD MOVEMENT\, CONTROL\, STABILITY\n\n SEAT – CENTRAL IN SADDLE\, EVE N DISTRIBUTION OF WEIGHT OFN SEAT BONES\, ALTER WHEN ASK HORSE TO MOVE DIR ECTION\, DO NOT COLLAPSE THROUGH HIP\n HIPS –LEVEL AT ALL TIMES\, SUPPL E TO ALLOW MOVEMENT ABSORBED THROUGH SEAT\n PELVIS – ABSORD MOVEMENT\, HELPS CONTROL CENTRE OF GRAVITY\, ENCOURANGES HORSE TO ACCELERATE\n\n(LEGS – USED WITH SEAT &\; HAND TO COMMUNICATE – DIRECTION\, GAIT\, LEVE L OF ACTIVITY\, UPWARD DOWNWARD TRANSITIONS\, LATERAL MOVEMENTS\n\n ON TH E GIRTH – PRODUCES ENERGY/FORWARD MOVEMENT – BOTH LEGS ON THE GIRTH FO RWARD/STRAIGHT\, 1 LEG BEHIND THE GIRTH WILL ASK EITHER CHANGE DIRECTION O R CANTER DEPENDING ON LEVEL OF PRESSURE\n LOWER LEG BEHIND THE GIRTH – ABOUT 2-3 INCHES MORE CONTROL OVER HINDQUARTERS- FORWARD\, BACKWARD\, DIAG ONALLY OR SIDEWAYS MOVEMENTS\, UPWARD TRANSITIONS EG CANTER OR LATERAL MOV EMENT EG LEG YIELD\, BOTH LEGS BEHIND THE GIRTH CORRECT USE WITH SEAT AND LEGS WILL AID REIN BACK\n\n(WHIP – INSIDE HAND USED TO BACK UP RIDERS LE G AND ENCOURAGE HORSE TO MOVE FORWARD)\n\n(SPURS – ON THE RIDERS HEEL TO GIVE PRECISE LEG AID ONLY WORN BY EXPERIENCED RIDERS)\n 15. Balance\n16 . Check Girth\nLevel Four\n1. Continue working on Balanced Cantering \n2. Trotting Pole without stirrups \n3. 7 phases of jumping\n\n (TURN -APPR OARCH-TAKE OFF-FLIGHT-LAND-GET-AWAY- TURN)\n REMAIN BALANCED\n IMPULSION \n POSITION – OPEN SHOULDERS ON TURN \n 1. TURN  – ACCURATELY – LINE UP WITH CENTRE – SIT UP – LOOK AHEAD – RIDE LEG TO HAND – KE EP BALANCED RHYTHM – IMPULSION\n  2. APPROACH  – CENTRE OF JUMP – SIT UP – LOOK AHEAD CHANNELING HORSE FORWARD – BETWEEN HAND &\; LEG TO MAINTAIN STRAIGHT LINE – MAINTAIN IMPULSION &\; BALANCE\n 3. TAKE OFF – POINT WHICH HORSE GATHERS HINDLEGS UNDERNEATH ITS BODY & \; STARTS TO LIFT FOREHAND – LOWER LEG SECURELY WRAPPED ROUND – MAINTA IN ENERGY &\; FORWARDNESS – HANDS FOLLOW MOVEMENT OF HORSES HEAD NECK BUT MAINTAIN CONTACT THROUGH REIN – LOOK AHEAD\n 4. FLIGHT – IN THE AIR – FOREHAND WELL LIFTED\, BACK WELL ROUNDED\, FORELEGS &\; HINDLEG S TUCKED UP – FOLDED IN TO JUMPING POSITION\, UPPER BODY LOWERED\, SEAT SLIPPED TO BACK OF SADDLE – HANDS ALLOW STRETCH THE NECK\, BACK &\; B ODY GIVES FREEDOM OF MOVEMENT\, WHILE MAINTAINING LIGHT CONTACT – LOWER LEG STAYS SECURELY WRAPPED AROUND MAINTAIN BALANCE\n 5. LAND – HORSE STRETCHES OUT &\; EXTENDS FORELEGS READY TO LAND – HORSE SHOULD LAND ON FORELEG WANTING THE CANTER LEAD ON – UPPER BODY COMES BACK UP – MAI NTAIN CONTACT – LEGS REMAIN IN POSTION – LOOK AHEAD\n 6. GET AWAY   ­­- MOVING AWAY FROM THE JUMP TO THE NEXT – MAKE SURE HORSE IS BALAN CED\, PLENTY OF ENERGY &\; IMPULSION- CORRECT CANTER LEAD – LEGS SECU RE\n 7. TURN –  TURNS AWAY FROM ONE FENCE TO ANOTHER THIS STAGE STAR TS ALL OVER AGAIN OR IF SINGLE FENCE STAY STRAIGHT\n\n4/5. Able Ride A Dem i Voltes &\; Reverse Demi Voltes\n\n DEMI VOLTE – ½ 10 MENTRE CIRCL E TO THE CENTRE LINE THEN A DIAGONAL LINE BACK TO THE TRACK TO CHANGE THE REIN\n REVERSE DEMI VOLTE – DIAGONAL LINE TO CENTRE LINE LETTER THEN ½ 10 METRE CIRCLE BACK TO THE TRACK TO CHANGE THE REIN \n\n6. 2X ½ 10 met re Circles to change the rein  \n7. Turn on the Forehand\n\n HALT\, TO STOP FORWARD MOVEMENT APPLY STEADY PRESSURE ON REINS – SIT UP STRAIGHT  \n PRESSURE PLACED 3-4 INCHS BEHIND THE GIRTH WITH YOUR OUTSIDE LEG – H ORSE WILL MOVE AWAY FROM THE PRESSURE\, HORSES HIND LEGS WILL MOVE IN FRON T &\; ACROSS THE OTHER HIND LEG\, THE OPPOSITE FRONT LEG TO YOUR PRESSU RE LEG WILL ALSO MOVE AROUND THE OTHER FRONT LEG WILL STAY STILL \n YOUR OTHER LEG (INSIDE) SHOULD BE KEPT STEADY SO TO KEEP YOUR BALANCE AND STOP THE HORSE TRYING TO TURN TOO QUICKLY \n REINS TO CONTROL FRONT OF HORSE – GOOD CONTROL PREVENTS YOUR HORSE MOVING FORWARDS – OUTSIDE HAND LIF T UP AND BACK TO FLEX HORSES NECK SLIGHTLY IN THE DIRECTION OF TURN\, FLEX UNTIL YOU CAN SEE CORNER OF EYE – USE OTHER REIN FOR SUPPORT TO KEEP HO RSE FROM MOVING FORWARDS\, OUTSIDE REIN CLOSE TO NECK   \n HALF HALT E ACH STEP UNTIL COMPLETE TURN 180 DEGREES – POSITVIE PRAISE AFTER \n TU RNING RIGHT RIGHT LEG BACK – RIGHT REIN FLEX \n TURNING LEFT LEFT LEG BACK – LEFT REIN FLEX\n\n8. 15m circles in walk  (A&\;C)\n9. 10m ci rcles in walk (A&\;C)  \n10. Lighten seat \nINVOLVES STANDING ON YOU R OWN 2 FEET WHILE WORKING YOUR HORSE – BALANCE YOURSELF\, NO LEANING\, HOLDING ON CROUCHING DOWN ON NECK – CLEARANCE BETWEEN BOTTOM AND SADDLE – ALLOWS HORSE TO MOVE MORE FREELY – IMPROVES BALANCE\, FITNESS AND CO ORDINATION- FEET CORRECTLY POSITIONED IN STIRRUP\, ALLOWS ANKLES\, KNEES & amp\; HIPS BECOME MORE EFFECTIVE SHOCK ABSORBERS – ENGAGE YOUR CORE (TUM MY MUSCLES) – STRAIGHT BACK – HANDS &\; ARMS INDEPENDENT KEEP CONTA CT\n11. Jumping Position \nTHIS INVOLVES THE RIDER CENTERED OVER HIS/HER FEET – STIRRUP LEATHERS 90 DEGREE ANGLE TO THE GROUND\, CONTINUING A LIN E UPWARDS FROM THE STIRRUP LEATHERS- THE HEAD\, SHOULDERS &\; KNEES FAL L IN FRONT OF THE LINE – HIPS FALL BEHIND IT\n\n LEG HANG DOWNSIDE EVEN CONTACT ALONG WHOLE LENGTH – INNER THIGH\, KNEE &\; CALF – WEIGHT ALONG BACK OF LEG INTO HEEL FLEXIBLE ANKLE \n SEAT\, HIPS &\; THIGHS –WEIGHT TOWARDS PELVIS\, ENOUGH WEIGHT IN STIRRUP TO SUSPEND IN THE AIR OVER THE SADDLE – HIPS NOT TOO FAR FORWARD IT CHANGES THE BALANCE –HIP S\, FLEXIBLE\, MOVE BACKWARDS\, BETWEEN FENCES THE THIGHS TAKE UP WEIGHT O F RIDER NOT THE SEAT BONES\n UPPER BODY\, SHOULDERS\, HEAD\, TRUNK – LO OK UP IN DIRECTION YOU ARE GOING – BACK FLAT – OPEN CHEST – SHOULDER S OPEN \n RELEASE – GRAB MANE OR SLIDE HANDS UP CREST AS TAKE OFF\n\n1 2. Single Fence Jumping  \n13. Be able to check &\; adjust girth whi le mounted  \n14. Understand &\; Explain Impulsion\nMOVEMENT OF HOES E – FORWARD AND CONTROLLED POWER – EFFECTIVE USE OF POWER IN THE HIND QUARTERS – TO ACHIEVE A HORSE MUST NOT USE SPEED BUT USE MUSCLUAR CONTRO L – HORSE RELAXED BACK WILL ALLOW HINDQUARTERS TO COME WELL UNDER ITS BO DY AND THIS IS CALLED “ENGAGED”.\n15. Understand Half halt &\; whe n Used \n(A SPONGE EFFECT ON THE REIN(S))\n16. Trotting Poles \n17. Cant er Poles\n18. Raised Trotting Poles \nTO BUILD UP MUSCLE ON TOP LINE SHOU LDERS AND BACK – MORE FLEXIBLE – ENCOURAGES LEGS TO LIFT OVER JUMPS\n1 9. Balance for Level 4\n20. Position for Level 4\n21. More Changes of Rein s &\; Other Movements  \n22. Continue Perfecting school movements and changes of reins learnt in previous Levels \n23. Canter 20m Circles\n2 4. Start Strides\n25. 15m circles in Trot (A&\;C)\n26. 10m circles in  Trot (A&\;C)\n27. Canter without Stirrups\n28. Acute Transitions\n29. Confidence\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\ n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n&nb sp\;\nLevel Five\n1. Jump combinations \n2. Gird work \n3. Knowledge of strides &\; Jumping Strides\n \;\n4. 15m circles in trot\n \;\n 5. 10m circles in trot\n6. Shallow loops\n7. Poles in canter\n\n\n\nGait\n Feet\nBoot Lengths\nSteps\n\n\nWalk\n2.5′ – 3′\n3 – 4\n1 normal\n\ n\nTrot\n3.5′ – 4′\n4.5 – 5\n1 large\n\n\nCanter\n9′ – 12′\n 12 – 16\n3 normal steps\n(9′ stride)or4 normal steps\n(12′ stride)\n \n\n\n8. Rein Back \nESTABLISH HALT – SEAT REMAIN IMMOBILE – LEGS ASK HORSE TO KEEP CONTACT WITH BIT – KEEP REIN CONTACT SOFT – MOVE BOTH L EGS BACK FROM HIP – KEEP WEIGH DOWN THROUGH BACK AND SEAT – ASK TO MOV E BACK\, LEG\, SEAT &\; REIN – WITH SEAT PRESS BACKWARDS\, UPPER BODY STAYS TALL THIS ASKS THE HORSE TO LOWER HIS CROUP AND MOVE BACK – LEG A ND REIN WORK IN ALTERNATE PAIRS\, LEG REIN 1 SIDE ASK THEN THE OTHER SIDE\ , HORSE WILL MOVE BACK IN DIAGONAL PAIRS – RELEASE PRESSURE AND THEN ASK THEM TO MOVE FORWARDS AGAIN\n9. Aids of a circle\n\n INSIDE LEG — ON G IRTH — KEEPS IMPULSION – ENGAGES INSIDE HIND LEG – ASKS FOR BEND \n OUTSIDE LEG – SLIGHTLY BEHIND THE GIRTH – CONTROLS HINDQUARTERS STOP S THEM FALLING OUT – GENERATES FORWARD MOVEMENT \n INSIDE HAND – BEN D THROUGH HORSES NECK \n OUTSIDE HAND – CONTROLS PACE – PREVENTS NEC K OVER BENDING – PREVENTS HORSE FALLING OUT THROUGH SHOULDERS\n HIPS &a mp\; SHOULDERS PARALLEL WITH HORSES SHOULDERS – BODY UPRIGHT – LOOK AH EAD ROUND THE CIRCLE\n\n10. Canter without Stirrups \n11. Continue Perfe cting Jumping Position \n12. Continue Perfecting Lighten Seat \n13. Leg Yield\nEASIEST WAY FROM ¾ LINE BACK TO THE TRACK – HELPS DEVELOP FEEL & amp\; COORDINAITON — FORWARD &\; SIDEWAYS – BODY REMAINS STRAIGHT –INSIDE FEET STEP REGULARLY &\; EVENLY INFRONT &\; ACROSS THE OUTS IDE FEET— RIDING ON 2 TRACKS\n\n TURN ON TO ¾ LINE – FEW STEPS STRAI GHT\n MOVE WEIGHT IN TO INSIDE SEAT BONE \n\n\n INSIDE LEG SLIGHTLY BEH IND THE GIRTH –PUSH THE HORSES QAURTERS FORWARDS &\; SIDWAYS TOWARDS THE TRACK \n OUTSIDE LEG ON THE GIRTH BUT IF THE HORSE STARTS TO LEAD WI TH ITS QUARTERS MOVE THE OUTSIDE LEG BACK A LITTLE ALSO HELPS KEEP MOVING FORWARDS \n INSIDE REIN – SLIGHT FLEXION TO INSIDE \n OUTSIDE REIN K EEPS HORSE STRAIGHT – PREVENTS TOO MUCH NECK BEND – CONTROL OUTSIDE SH OULDER\n AS HIT THE TRACK – REMOVE FLEXION AND MAKE HORSE STRAIGHT  \ n\n14. Shoulder In \nHIND LEGS ON LINE OF TRAVEL\, SHOULDERS DISPLACED I NSIDE — 3 TRACKS – OUTSIDE HIND LEG TRACKS ALONG WALL\, INSIDE HIND LE G &\; OUTSIDE FORELEG ON SAME TRACK PARALLEL TO WALL\, INSIDE FORELEG O N INNER TRACK PARALLEL TO WALL — BENDING BODY AROUND RIDERS INSIDE LEG W ITH POLL FLEXED TO THE INSIDE – AWAY FROM THE DIRECTION OF TRAVEL) KEEP RHYTHMIC\, RELAXED\, CONNECTED &\; WITH SOME IMPULSION – UNDERSTANDE AIDS FOR LEG YEILDING — HORSE MUST BEND CORRECTLY ON A 10M CIRCLE ASWEL L \n\n Start with a 10-meter circle\n Inside rein leads the shoulders ( and neck) off the wall while the inside leg pushes the rib cage and inside hind into the outside rein\, which catches the shoulder and produces the half halt. The outside leg behind the girth keeps the haunches from fallin g out.\n Weight equal on both sides\,Horse follows your weight. If you si t to the inside too much\, the horse might move in that direction and off the wall.\n Your shoulders and hips should be turned inside slightly para llel to the horse’s shoulders so the outside hip and shoulder move forwa rd\n Horses shoulders should be on the wall at the end of the movement fr om the inside leg. Don’t stay in the shoulder-in for too long. There is no test that has the exercise ridden for more than half the long side (30 meters).\n\n15. Dressage tests \n16. Course work\n17. Flying Changes \ n\n\n\n\n\n\nASKING FOR LEFT FLYING CHANGE \n\n SEAT – RIGHT SEAT BONE FORWARDS TOWARDS HORSES RIGHT EAR \n RIGHT LEG – CLOSE RIGHT LEG ON G IRTH ASK HORSE TO GO FORWARDS DURING CHANGE \n LEFT LEG – MOVE LEFT LE G BEHIND THE GIRTH SIGNAL NEW OUTSIDE HIND LEG TO STRIKE OFF INTO NEW LEAD – QUICK AID \n LEFT REIN – CLOSE LEFT HAND IN A FIST TO KEEP LEFT H IND LEG ON GROUND AND MAINTAIN UPHILL BALANCE \n RIGHT REIN – SOFTEN R IGHT REIN SO NOT TO BLOCK NEW INSIDE FRONT LEG FROM COMING FORWARD\n\n18.  Turn on the Forehand\n\n HALT\, TO STOP FORWARD MOVEMENT APPLY STEADY P RESSURE ON REINS – SIT UP STRAIGHT \n PRESSURE PLACED 3-4 INCHS BEHIND THE GIRTH WITH YOUR OUTSIDE LEG – HORSE WILL MOVE AWAY FROM THE PRESSUR E\, HORSES HIND LEGS WILL MOVE IN FRONT &\; ACROSS THE OTHER HIND LEG\, THE OPPOSITE FRONT LEG TO YOUR PRESSURE LEG WILL ALSO MOVE AROUND THE OTH ER FRONT LEG WILL STAY STILL \n YOUR OTHER LEG (INSIDE) SHOULD BE KEPT S TEADY SO TO KEEP YOUR BALANCE AND STOP THE HORSE TRYING TO TURN TOO QUICKL Y \n REINS TO CONTROL FRONT OF HORSE – GOOD CONTROL PREVENTS YOUR HORS E MOVING FORWARDS – OUTSIDE HAND LIFT UP AND BACK TO FLEX HORSES NECK SL IGHTLY IN THE DIRECTION OF TURN\, FLEX UNTIL YOU CAN SEE CORNER OF EYE – USE OTHER REIN FOR SUPPORT TO KEEP HORSE FROM MOVING FORWARDS\, OUTSIDE R EIN CLOSE TO NECK   \n HALF HALT EACH STEP UNTIL COMPLETE TURN 180 DEG REES – POSITVIE PRAISE AFTER \n\n\n TURNING RIGHT RIGHT LEG BACK – R IGHT REIN FLEX \n TURNING LEFT LEFT LEG BACK – LEFT REIN FLEX \n\n19.  Outline\nCORRECT OUTLINE IS OUTCOME OF BUILD UP OF CORRECT MUSCLE – BE NEFITS OF BEING RIDDEN IN THIS FRAME\, NEEDS TO BE WORKING CORRECTLY\, MOV E FREELY IN CONTACT\, BACK RAISED &\; SUPPLE\, NECK EXTEND IN LIGHT ARC H FROM WITHER TO POLL WITH NOSE JUST IN FRONT OF THE VERTICAL.\n\nBalance\ n\n Aim to maintain a light rein contact to encourage the horse to stay i n balance. Horse who is unbalanced and in particular heavy on their foreha nd will lean on the bit and the reins pulling the rider’s arms forward.\ n\nStretching\n\n When the rider moves their hands in a forward direction combined with the use of their leg and seat pushing\, the horse to remain engaged through their hindquarters and light on the bit thereby allowing the rider to open out the horses neck and frame.\n Stretching can be used when asking for free walk on a long rein or when opening the horses strid e out\, for example when riding lengthened strides.  \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\ n\n\n20. Footfall \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n2 1. Acute Transitions\n22. Balance  \n23. Position\n24. Self Confidence  \n25. Helping the Horse\n26. Confidence and ALL horses within the Riding S chool   \n\nLevel Six\n1. More work on Strides\n\n\n\n \n12hh\n15hh\n17 hh\n\n\nTrot to Bounce\n7-8ft\n9-10ft\n11-12ft\n\n\nCanter to Bounce\n8-9f t\n10-11ft\n12-13ft\n\n\nTrot Double 1 stride\n14-16ft\n17-19ft\n20-22ft\n \n\nCanter Double 1 stride\n17-19ft\n20-22ft\n23-25ft\n\n\nTrot Double 2 s tride \n23-25ft\n27-29ft \n31-33ft\n\n\nCanter Double 2 stride\n26-28ft\ n30-32ft\n34-36ft \n\n\nTreble – usually 1st part 1 stride\, 2nd part 2 strides \n\n\n\n2. More Grid work\n3. Aids to Canter\n4. Aids on a Cir cle\n5. more combination work\n6. Flying Change on Figure of 8\n7. Outline \n8. Turn on the Haunches\n9. Acute Transitions\n10. Canter Leg Yield\n11. Balance\n12. Position\n13. Fluent over course\n14. Drill work\n15. Flying change on straight\n16. Continue perfecting everything you have learnt ov er the levels – Keep going you never stop learning and improving \n17. Lunging/Groundwork\n\n\n\n END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:9283@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251212T103000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251212T113000 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/little-tigers/ SUMMARY:Little Tigers DESCRIPTION: \;\nYou will need to be Registered and Added your Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk You will also of had to be gr aded to see what level you are with us and then you will be able to see wh at availability we have\n\n\n\n\nIntroducing our younger riders &\; rid ers that need additions support!\nCome along to Bank Farm Riding School an d meet our friendly ponies who just can't wait to be pampered and petted b y you.\n\nEach session lasts 1hour. The session includes a short ride on a pony\, or just a sit on\, for those that want.\n\nWork through a Little T igers Syllabus and receive a Certificate upon completion - fun way for chi ldren and adults to learn more about ponies\n\nblock booking discount same day per week Courses will be on Mondays 10.30am-11.30am\, Thursdays 1pm-2 pm &\; Fridays 10.30am-11.30am\n\nParents/carer/guardian will be requir ed to assist their rider - the instructor will go through everything with you on the day please wear a shoe\, boot or wellie with a slight heal noth ing flat soled. leggings or jogging bottoms\, no skirts or shorts\n\n\n\n\ n END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:6560@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251212T170000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251212T180000 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/jumping-lesson/ SUMMARY:Multi Discipline Lesson DESCRIPTION:Multi Discipline Lesson\n\nwill change on a weekly basis\n\ncov ering - Jumping\, Ridden &\; In Hand Showing\, Dressage &\; more\n\n different discipline from week to week\n\n(Have a Practice at jumping comb inations and having a go a fillers\, broaden you knowlegde on approach\, t urns\, landing\, get away and prep for your upcoming fence)\n\nMAX OF 5 RI DERS (if only 1 person this will change to a 30min private)\n\nThis activi ty requires a high level of teamwork between horse and rider\, while testi ng the rider’s skill and the horse or pony’s power\, scope\, speed\, a thleticism\, and carefulness.  \n\nWith training and practice\, competit ors work together with their team mate to accomplish their goals.  END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:3670@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251213T090000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251213T144500 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/level-5-6-group-lesson-2/ SUMMARY:Level 5/6 Group Lesson DESCRIPTION: \;\nLevel 5/6 Group Lesson\n\n\n\nYou will need to Registe r Add your Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk \nYou will of had to of been graded to see what level lessons you can book \nand the n you will be able to see what availability we have\n \;\n\n\n\n\n\nLe vel Five\n1. Jump combinations \n2. Gird work \n3. Knowledge of strides &\; Jumping Strides\n \;\n4. 15m circles in trot\n \;\n5. 10m c ircles in trot\n6. Shallow loops\n7. Poles in canter\n\n\n\nGait\nFeet\nBo ot Lengths\nSteps\n\n\nWalk\n2.5′ – 3′\n3 – 4\n1 normal\n\n\nTrot\ n3.5′ – 4′\n4.5 – 5\n1 large\n\n\nCanter\n9′ – 12′\n12 – 1 6\n3 normal steps\n(9′ stride)or4 normal steps\n(12′ stride)\n\n\n\n8. Rein Back \nESTABLISH HALT – SEAT REMAIN IMMOBILE – LEGS ASK HORSE T O KEEP CONTACT WITH BIT – KEEP REIN CONTACT SOFT – MOVE BOTH LEGS BACK FROM HIP – KEEP WEIGH DOWN THROUGH BACK AND SEAT – ASK TO MOVE BACK\, LEG\, SEAT &\; REIN – WITH SEAT PRESS BACKWARDS\, UPPER BODY STAYS T ALL THIS ASKS THE HORSE TO LOWER HIS CROUP AND MOVE BACK – LEG AND REIN WORK IN ALTERNATE PAIRS\, LEG REIN 1 SIDE ASK THEN THE OTHER SIDE\, HORSE WILL MOVE BACK IN DIAGONAL PAIRS – RELEASE PRESSURE AND THEN ASK THEM TO MOVE FORWARDS AGAIN\n9. Aids of a circle\n\n INSIDE LEG — ON GIRTH — KEEPS IMPULSION – ENGAGES INSIDE HIND LEG – ASKS FOR BEND \n OUTSID E LEG – SLIGHTLY BEHIND THE GIRTH – CONTROLS HINDQUARTERS STOPS THEM F ALLING OUT – GENERATES FORWARD MOVEMENT \n INSIDE HAND – BEND THROUG H HORSES NECK \n OUTSIDE HAND – CONTROLS PACE – PREVENTS NECK OVER B ENDING – PREVENTS HORSE FALLING OUT THROUGH SHOULDERS\n HIPS &\; SHO ULDERS PARALLEL WITH HORSES SHOULDERS – BODY UPRIGHT – LOOK AHEAD ROUN D THE CIRCLE\n\n10. Canter without Stirrups \n11. Continue Perfecting Ju mping Position \n12. Continue Perfecting Lighten Seat \n13. Leg Yield\nE ASIEST WAY FROM ¾ LINE BACK TO THE TRACK – HELPS DEVELOP FEEL &\; CO ORDINAITON — FORWARD &\; SIDEWAYS – BODY REMAINS STRAIGHT –INSIDE FEET STEP REGULARLY &\; EVENLY INFRONT &\; ACROSS THE OUTSIDE FEET — RIDING ON 2 TRACKS\n\n TURN ON TO ¾ LINE – FEW STEPS STRAIGHT\n M OVE WEIGHT IN TO INSIDE SEAT BONE \n\n\n INSIDE LEG SLIGHTLY BEHIND THE GIRTH –PUSH THE HORSES QAURTERS FORWARDS &\; SIDWAYS TOWARDS THE TRAC K \n OUTSIDE LEG ON THE GIRTH BUT IF THE HORSE STARTS TO LEAD WITH ITS Q UARTERS MOVE THE OUTSIDE LEG BACK A LITTLE ALSO HELPS KEEP MOVING FORWARDS  \n INSIDE REIN – SLIGHT FLEXION TO INSIDE \n OUTSIDE REIN KEEPS HOR SE STRAIGHT – PREVENTS TOO MUCH NECK BEND – CONTROL OUTSIDE SHOULDER\n AS HIT THE TRACK – REMOVE FLEXION AND MAKE HORSE STRAIGHT  \n\n14.  Shoulder In \nHIND LEGS ON LINE OF TRAVEL\, SHOULDERS DISPLACED INSIDE — 3 TRACKS – OUTSIDE HIND LEG TRACKS ALONG WALL\, INSIDE HIND LEG & \; OUTSIDE FORELEG ON SAME TRACK PARALLEL TO WALL\, INSIDE FORELEG ON INNE R TRACK PARALLEL TO WALL — BENDING BODY AROUND RIDERS INSIDE LEG WITH PO LL FLEXED TO THE INSIDE – AWAY FROM THE DIRECTION OF TRAVEL) KEEP RHYTH MIC\, RELAXED\, CONNECTED &\; WITH SOME IMPULSION – UNDERSTANDE AIDS FOR LEG YEILDING — HORSE MUST BEND CORRECTLY ON A 10M CIRCLE ASWELL \n\ n Start with a 10-meter circle\n Inside rein leads the shoulders (and ne ck) off the wall while the inside leg pushes the rib cage and inside hind into the outside rein\, which catches the shoulder and produces the half h alt. The outside leg behind the girth keeps the haunches from falling out. \n Weight equal on both sides\,Horse follows your weight. If you sit to t he inside too much\, the horse might move in that direction and off the wa ll.\n Your shoulders and hips should be turned inside slightly parallel t o the horse’s shoulders so the outside hip and shoulder move forward\n Horses shoulders should be on the wall at the end of the movement from the inside leg. Don’t stay in the shoulder-in for too long. There is no tes t that has the exercise ridden for more than half the long side (30 meters ).\n\n15. Dressage tests \n16. Course work\n17. Flying Changes \n\n\n\ n\n\nASKING FOR LEFT FLYING CHANGE \n\n SEAT – RIGHT SEAT BONE FORWARD S TOWARDS HORSES RIGHT EAR \n RIGHT LEG – CLOSE RIGHT LEG ON GIRTH ASK HORSE TO GO FORWARDS DURING CHANGE \n LEFT LEG – MOVE LEFT LEG BEHIND THE GIRTH SIGNAL NEW OUTSIDE HIND LEG TO STRIKE OFF INTO NEW LEAD – QUI CK AID \n LEFT REIN – CLOSE LEFT HAND IN A FIST TO KEEP LEFT HIND LEG ON GROUND AND MAINTAIN UPHILL BALANCE \n RIGHT REIN – SOFTEN RIGHT REI N SO NOT TO BLOCK NEW INSIDE FRONT LEG FROM COMING FORWARD\n\n18. Turn on the Forehand\n\n HALT\, TO STOP FORWARD MOVEMENT APPLY STEADY PRESSURE O N REINS – SIT UP STRAIGHT \n PRESSURE PLACED 3-4 INCHS BEHIND THE GIRT H WITH YOUR OUTSIDE LEG – HORSE WILL MOVE AWAY FROM THE PRESSURE\, HORSE S HIND LEGS WILL MOVE IN FRONT &\; ACROSS THE OTHER HIND LEG\, THE OPPO SITE FRONT LEG TO YOUR PRESSURE LEG WILL ALSO MOVE AROUND THE OTHER FRONT LEG WILL STAY STILL \n YOUR OTHER LEG (INSIDE) SHOULD BE KEPT STEADY SO TO KEEP YOUR BALANCE AND STOP THE HORSE TRYING TO TURN TOO QUICKLY \n RE INS TO CONTROL FRONT OF HORSE – GOOD CONTROL PREVENTS YOUR HORSE MOVING FORWARDS – OUTSIDE HAND LIFT UP AND BACK TO FLEX HORSES NECK SLIGHTLY IN THE DIRECTION OF TURN\, FLEX UNTIL YOU CAN SEE CORNER OF EYE – USE OTHE R REIN FOR SUPPORT TO KEEP HORSE FROM MOVING FORWARDS\, OUTSIDE REIN CLOSE TO NECK   \n HALF HALT EACH STEP UNTIL COMPLETE TURN 180 DEGREES – POSITVIE PRAISE AFTER \n\n\n TURNING RIGHT RIGHT LEG BACK – RIGHT REIN FLEX \n TURNING LEFT LEFT LEG BACK – LEFT REIN FLEX \n\n19. Outline \nCORRECT OUTLINE IS OUTCOME OF BUILD UP OF CORRECT MUSCLE – BENEFITS OF BEING RIDDEN IN THIS FRAME\, NEEDS TO BE WORKING CORRECTLY\, MOVE FREELY IN CONTACT\, BACK RAISED &\; SUPPLE\, NECK EXTEND IN LIGHT ARCH FROM WI THER TO POLL WITH NOSE JUST IN FRONT OF THE VERTICAL.\n\nBalance\n\n Aim to maintain a light rein contact to encourage the horse to stay in balance . Horse who is unbalanced and in particular heavy on their forehand will l ean on the bit and the reins pulling the rider’s arms forward.\n\nStretc hing\n\n When the rider moves their hands in a forward direction combined with the use of their leg and seat pushing\, the horse to remain engaged through their hindquarters and light on the bit thereby allowing the rider to open out the horses neck and frame.\n Stretching can be used when ask ing for free walk on a long rein or when opening the horses stride out\, f or example when riding lengthened strides.  \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n20. Foot fall \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n21. Acute Transitions\ n22. Balance  \n23. Position\n24. Self Confidence \n25. Helping the Hor se\n26. Confidence and ALL horses within the Riding School   \n \;\n \n\n\n\n\n \;\n \n\n\n\n\nLevel Six\n1. More work on Stridcs\n\n\n\n  \n12hh\n15hh\n17hh\n\n\nTrot to Bounce\n7-8ft\n9-10ft\n11-12ft\n\n\nCant er to Bounce\n8-9ft\n10-11ft\n12-13ft\n\n\nTrot Double 1 stride\n14-16ft\n 17-19ft\n20-22ft\n\n\nCanter Double 1 stride\n17-19ft\n20-22ft\n23-25ft\n\ n\nTrot Double 2 stride \n23-25ft\n27-29ft \n31-33ft\n\n\nCanter Double 2 stride\n26-28ft\n30-32ft\n34-36ft \n\n\nTreble – usually 1st part 1 stride\, 2nd part 2 strides \n\n\n\n2. More Grid work\n3. Aids to Canter \n4. Aids on a Circle\n5. more combination work\n6. Flying Change on Figur e of 8\n7. Outline\n8. Turn on the Haunches\n9. Acute Transitions\n10. Can ter Leg Yield\n11. Balance\n12. Position\n13. Fluent over course\n14. Dril l work\n15. Flying change on straight\n16. Continue perfecting everything you have learnt over the levels – Keep going you never stop learning and improving \n17. Lunging/Groundwork\n\n\n\n\n\n\n END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:2098@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251213T100000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251213T110000 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/level-3-group-lesson-2/ SUMMARY:Level 3 Group Lesson DESCRIPTION: \;\nYou will need to Register Add your Rider(s) on https:/ /bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk\nYou will of had to of been graded to se e what level lessons you can book\nand then you will be able to see what a vailability we have\n \;\nLevel Three\n1. Explain prepare to Canter\n( CHECK POSTIION\, SHORTEN REINS SLIGHTLY\, HALF HALT BUT KEEP LEG ON\, SITT ING TROT\, ASK AS GOING IN TO THE CORNER\, INSIDE BEND FOR CORRECT CANTER LEAD)\n 2. Explain &\; Use Aids to canter\n(SITTING TROT –\n\nLITTLE BIT MORE WEIGHT ON THE INSIDE SEAT BONE YOUR SEAT DRAWS UP THE HIND LEG S TRONG RHYTHM -–\n\nINSIDE LEG ON THE GIRTH ASKS FOR MILD BEND TO PREPARE THE INSIDE LEAD &\; HELPS WITH BALANCE-\n\nINSIDE REIN DOES VERY LITTL E ACTS AS A NECK REIN IT SITS THERE AND PREVENTS HORSE DRIFTING OUT –\n\ n1 TO 3 HALF HALTS BEFORE TRANSITION TO BALANCE WEIGHT TO THE HIND END KEE P LEGS ON FOR IMPULSION AFTER THE HALF HALTS —\n\nOUTSIDE LEG SLIGHTLY B ACK BEHIND THE GIRTH TELLS THEM WHICH LEAD BEHIND\n\nOUTSIDE REIN HELP TO CONTROL SPEED AND KEEP THEM OUT ON THE TRACK)\n3. Figure of 8s\n(2 20M CIR CLES PUT TOGETHER – NO STRAIGHT LINES)\n4. Serpentines\n(NO STRAIGHT LIN ES but when starting to learn a serpentine it is best to rid the straight line then the loop will become better with practice\, LOOPS\, EACH TIME CR OSS OVER THE CENTER LINE SHOULD CHANGE DIAGONAL\, LOOPS EQUAL) (3 LOOP\, 4 LOOP\, 5 LOOPS ECT)\n\n(diagrams are 3 loops serpentine)\n5. Trot 20m cir cles from E &\; B \n6. Balance Canter\n 7. Understand &\; Explain Canter Lead\n(HORSES FRONT INSIDE LEG SHOULD STRIKE OUT FURTHER FORWARD T HAN THE OUTSIDE FRONT LEG\n\nTHEY TAKE OFF WITH THERE OUTSIDE BACK LEG AND LEAD WITH THERE INSIDE FRONT\n\n(THEY CAN BE CORRECT WITH FRONT LEGS AND INCORRECT WITH BACK LEGS WHICH IS CALLED MANY NAMES BUT WE USE THE TERM DI S-UNITED THIS USUALLY FEELS AWFUL\, BUMPY &\; OFF BALANCE. BACK TO TROT AND ASK AGAIN)\n\n(IF THE HORSE IS INCORRECT IN FRONT BACK TO TROT ASK AG AIN)\n 8. Check Canter Lead Whilst mounted\n 9. Walk without stirrups\ n 10. Trot without stirrups\n 11. Adjust Own Stirrups\n 12. Understan d beats of Pace\, Walk\, Trot &\; Canter\n\n WALK IS 4 BEAT EACH FOOT HITS THE GROUND INDEPENDENTLY\n\nThe footfall sequence is:\n\nLeft Hind – Left Front – Right Hind – Right Front.\n\n TROT IS A 2 BEAT FEET GO IN DIAGONAL PAIRS\n\nThe footfall sequence is:\n\nLeft Hind + Right Fro nt – Suspension – Right Hind + Left Front – Suspension\n\n CANTER I S A 3 BEAT 1 PAIR OF FEET STRIKE AND THE OTHER 2 LAND INDEPENDENTLY\n\nRig ht Lead Canter\n\nLeft Hind – Right Hind + Left Front – Right Front – Suspension\n\nLeft Lead Canter\n\nRight Hind – Left Hind + Right Fro nt – Left Front – Suspension\n\n DON’T NEED TO KNOW GALLOP BUT IF T HEY WANT TO KNOW IT IS 4 BEAT SEQUENCE\n\nRight Lead Gallop\n\nLeft Hind – Right Hind – Left Front – Right Front – Suspension\n\nLeft Lead Gallop\n\nRight Hind – Left Hind – Right Front – Left Front – Susp ension\n13.  Position for Level 3\n(VERTICAL LINE EAR- SHOULDER- HIP – HEEL\, EYES UP AND AHEAD\, STRAIGHT LINE FROM ELBOWS SOFT WITH SLIGHT BEND – HAND DOWN THE REIN TO THE HORSES MOUTH\, THUMBS ON TOP POINTING TOWAR DS HORSES EARS\, SIT EQUALLY ARCROSS BOTH SEAT BONES\, RELAX SEAT\, HIPS & amp\; PELVIS\, KNEE &\; THIGH REST LIGHTLY AGAINS SADDLE NOT GRIPPING)\ n 14.  Understand Aids (Natural &\; Artificial)\n\n COMMUNICATION B ETWEEN RIDERS AND HORSE)\n ARTIFICIAL AIDS- MAINLY WHIPS &\; SPURS\n NATURAL AIDS- VOICE\, HANDS\, LEGS\, BODY\, SEAT\n\n(HANDS – COMMUNICATI ON THROUGH REINS TO THE BIT\, SHOULD BE LIGHT FLEXIBLE- USE OF HAND AID MU ST BE USED WITH SEAT\, LEG AIDS- ABOVE HORSES WITHERS LEVEL WITH EACH OTHE R\n\n TURNING – GENTLE SQUEEZING THE REIN ASKS THE HORSE TO TURN HEAD I N THAT DIRECTION\n HALTING –PRESSURE ON BOTH REINS WITH SEAT AND LEG PR OVEDING ENERGY A HALT WILL PRODUCED\n\n(VOICE – WORD\, TONE &\; LENGT H OF TIME THE WORD IS HELD FOR INDICATES UPWARDS/DOWNWARDS TRANSITIONS\n\n UPWARD TRANSITION – EMPHASIS THE LETTER WITH RISE IN TONE TOWARDS END OF WORD\n DOWNWARD TRANSITION – LOWER TONE TOWRDS END OF WORD STRETCH T HE WORD OUT\n COLLECTION – CALM\n\n(SEAT – COLLECTION\, BALANCE\, STE ERING\, FORWARD MOVEMENT\, CONTROL\, STABILITY\n\n SEAT – CENTRAL IN SA DDLE\, EVEN DISTRIBUTION OF WEIGHT OFN SEAT BONES\, ALTER WHEN ASK HORSE T O MOVE DIRECTION\, DO NOT COLLAPSE THROUGH HIP\n HIPS –LEVEL AT ALL TIM ES\, SUPPLE TO ALLOW MOVEMENT ABSORBED THROUGH SEAT\n PELVIS – ABSORD M OVEMENT\, HELPS CONTROL CENTRE OF GRAVITY\, ENCOURANGES HORSE TO ACCELERAT E\n\n(LEGS – USED WITH SEAT &\; HAND TO COMMUNICATE – DIRECTION\, G AIT\, LEVEL OF ACTIVITY\, UPWARD DOWNWARD TRANSITIONS\, LATERAL MOVEMENTS\ n\n ON THE GIRTH – PRODUCES ENERGY/FORWARD MOVEMENT – BOTH LEGS ON TH E GIRTH FORWARD/STRAIGHT\, 1 LEG BEHIND THE GIRTH WILL ASK EITHER CHANGE D IRECTION OR CANTER DEPENDING ON LEVEL OF PRESSURE\n LOWER LEG BEHIND THE GIRTH – ABOUT 2-3 INCHES MORE CONTROL OVER HINDQUARTERS- FORWARD\, BACKW ARD\, DIAGONALLY OR SIDEWAYS MOVEMENTS\, UPWARD TRANSITIONS EG CANTER OR L ATERAL MOVEMENT EG LEG YIELD\, BOTH LEGS BEHIND THE GIRTH CORRECT USE WITH SEAT AND LEGS WILL AID REIN BACK\n\n(WHIP – INSIDE HAND USED TO BACK UP RIDERS LEG AND ENCOURAGE HORSE TO MOVE FORWARD)\n\n(SPURS – ON THE RIDE RS HEEL TO GIVE PRECISE LEG AID ONLY WORN BY EXPERIENCED RIDERS)\n 15. B alance\n16. Check Girth END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:2360@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251213T110000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251213T151500 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/level-1-group-lesson-3/ SUMMARY:Level 1 Group Lesson DESCRIPTION: \;\nYou will need to Register Add your Rider(s) on https:/ /bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk\nYou will of had to of been graded to se e what level lessons you can book\nand then you will be able to see what a vailability we have\nLevel One\n1. Mount correctly\n\n(Both Reins and Whi p into the Left hand and a clump of mane or on the neck\, Right hand as fa r round to the back of the saddle DO NOT HOLD ON TO THE FRONT AND BACK OF THE SADDLE\, Left foot in the stirrup\, bounce 3 times and swing right leg over\, not kicking the horses bottom on the way over and landing lightly on the saddle)\n\n2. Dismount correctly \n\n(Both feet out of stirrups\, reins and whip in to left hand right hand on the front of the saddle lean forwards slightly and swing your right leg over the back of the saddle\, l anding on the left. On landing bend both knees and you should be facing th e same way as the horse)\n\n3. Hold reins \n\n(Little finger underneath t he rein thumb on top close your fingers around your reins – and palms of your hands facing each other)\n\n4. Halt\n\n(sit up nice and tall\, heels down\, toes up\, palms of your hands facing sit on your bottom a little d eeper\, active walk\, squeeze down both reins and gently pull back slightl y\, you can use your voice and ask your horse to “HALT”)\n\n5. Walk \ n\n(sit up nice and tall\, heels down\, toes up\, palms of your hands faci ng\, keep your lower leg underneath you so you have a straight line Ear Sh oulder Hip Heel\, ride your horse through your hips and seat a little more \, active walk horses head should be bobbing up and down nice and quick\, you can use your voice and ask your horse to “WALK ON”)\n\n6. Rising t rot \n\n(sit up nice and tall\, heels down\, toes up\, palms of your hand s facing\, keep your lower leg underneath you\, standing up and down as yo ur horses’ trots\, as the outside front leg goes forwards you should sta nd and as it comes back you should sit)\n\n7.Walk without reins \n\n8. Tr ot without reins \n\n(sit up nice and tall\, heels down\, toes up\, palms of your hands facing\, keep your lower leg underneath you so you have a s traight line Ear Shoulder Hip Heel\, try not to tip forward)\n\n9. Explain an Active Walk\n\n(Horses is walking forwards with its head bobbing up an d down nice and quick\, back feet should fall where the front feet where)\ n\n10. Walk 20m Circles a and c  \n\n11. Simple Changes of Reins (A-C\, C-A\, B-E\, E-B\, M-K\, K-M\, F-H\, H-F) \n\n12. Bending in and out of co nes \n\n13. Around the world with helper  \n\n14. Balance \n\n15. Learn to Run up Stirrups \n\n16. Loosen Girth END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:10328@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251213T113000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251213T120000 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/walk-out/ SUMMARY:Walk Out DESCRIPTION: \;\nYou will need to be Registered and Added your Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk You will also of had to be gr aded to see what level you are with us and then you will be able to see wh at availability we have\n\n\n\n\n\nIF THE WEATHER IS AWFUL - WE WILL MAKE THE DECISION ON THE DAY WETHER IT IS SAFE TO GO AHEAD - IF NOT WE WILL REA RRANGE THE WALK OUT\n\nWalk out down the middlewood way\n\n\n\n\n END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:7090@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251213T120000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251213T123000 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/stable-management-sessions/ SUMMARY:Stable Management Sessions DESCRIPTION:STABLE MANAGEMENT \nYou will need to Register Add your Rider(s ) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk and then you will be able to see what availability we have\n30mins Sessions (can be booked as a month or individual dates)\nBadges will be applied on the ecpro upon completion and notes added so we are going to run the following levels together unde r a bronze\, silver and gold Ecpro Badge Scheme \nYELLOW  Level 1 &\; BLUE Level 2 Stable Management together and upon passing each you will re ceive a yellow &\; blue certificate but on EPRO you will Receive a BRO NZE BADGE \nGREEN  Level 2 &\; ORANGE Level 3 Stable Management toget her and upon passing each you will receive a green &\; orange certific ate but on EPRO you will Receive a SILVER BADGE \nPURPLE Level 5 &\; R ED Level 6 Stable Management together and upon passing each you will recei ve a red &\; purple certificate but on EPRO you will Receive a GOLD BAD GE \nBRONZE BADGE \nThings covered in the Yellow &\; Blue Syllabus's\ nName basic points of the Horse\nAssist a Rider Mounting \nGive a Leg Up  \nFit a Hat to a Rider \nAdjust Stirrups from the ground \nShow a ride r how to hold their reins \nAble to check &\; tighten a girth before m ounting\nYard Safety \nName different parts of the Bridle \nName differe nt parts of the Saddle \nName the different items of the grooming kit \n Lead a pony in-hand \nCorrect way to give a pony an apple/carrot \nAppro ach &\; Handle a pony correctly \nCatch a pony &\; Put a head colla r on \nDemonstrate awareness off safety rules &\; hazards \nTie up a pony correctly\nAble to tie a haynet up correctly \nPick up &\; pick o ut feet \nKnow the Principles of watering &\; feeding \nHow to stop a car \nHow to say 'thank-you'\nHow to cross a road \nKnow which side of the road you should ride on\nUnderstand the simple 'green cross code' \nK now it is safer to ride on the road with adults or parents \nDemonstrate Mucking Out\nBed down \nDemonstrate watering the horse \nPut on and Remo ve  Aa head collar correctly\nName &\; Describe different types of bed ding \nBe able to Put on a Saddle \nBe able to put on a Bridle \nName d ifferent horses colours \nName different Markings\nName different Rugs \ nKnow the importance of ill-fitting rugs \nKnow how to fit a rug \nKnow how to care for &\; clean saddlery \nHave knowledge of correctly fitti ng tack \nBe able to identify Poisonous Plants\nUntack correctly\nCommuni cate with Riders &\; Instructors when assisting \nHow to ride along a road\nHow to signal Right &\; Left\nShow an awareness of dangers while riding on a road\nSILVER BADGE \nCovered in the Green &\; Orange Sylla bus’s \nHorse &\; Rider 1st Aid Kit  \nField Safety (shelter\, fen cing\, poisonous plants\, maintenance) \nTreatment of minor Cuts &\; A brasions  \nCorrect handling of ponies’ legs  \nCorrect grooming of ponies’ feet &\; legs \nTack up &\; Un-tack Unaided &\; put aw ay correctly  \nBasic feeding  \nclean &\; assemble tack  \ncatch a pony &\; turn it away in the field  \nknow that water must always be available  \nknow the structure of the horse’s foot  \nknow the n ames of the farrier’s tools  \nidentify signs of ill health  \nunder stand the importance of roughage  \nrequirements to plaiting a horse   \nplaiting a horse \ndifferent mouth pieces &\; their actions  \nare na safety – rules of the arena  \nyard jobs (&\; safety) \nhow to lead a pony along a road on foot  \nhow to slow a car down  \ncare &am p\; working of a pony off grass \nelementary feeding\, watering &\; cl eanliness of the pony  \nknow when a pony needs shoeing  \nknow what t o look for in a newly shod foot  \nknow the main indications for health in the pony  \nrecognise when a pony is lame  \nknow how to load &\ ; un-load a pony  \nunderstand the importance &\; the means of protec ting les while travelling  \nput a rug\, roller\, tail bandage &\; Ne w Zealand on  \nknow what equipment is needed for lunging  \nknow reas ons for lunging  \nskeleton of the horse  \nknow different bandages &a mp\; apply them  \nknowledge of ill-fitting bandages  \nshow knowledge of hay &\; haylage  \nunderstand the importance of roughage  \nkno wledge of stabling-ventilation-lights-drainage-shelter &\; warmth  \n take a horse’s temperature  \nweigh a horse  \nunderstand the reason s for equipment a horse is wearing  \nhow to lead a pony along a road wh ile mounted\nA Parent/Guardian is to attend to drop children off for stabl e management and pick them up again\nUpon completing each syllabus you wil l receive a certificate once you receive your certificate ONCE YOU HAVE CO MPLETED THE BADGE you can then move on to the next BADGE levels \nThis me ans: if there are no badges displayed\, they are at level 1+2\, working to wards Bronze. \nIf a Bronze badge is displayed\, they have completed leve l 1+2 and now working towards Silver (level 3+4) and so on.\nTo access thi s you will have to go on to you account via web link https://bankfarmridi ngschool.ecpro.co.uk and go on to MY ACCOUNT and then on to RIDERS you wi ll see on there NOTES/PROGRESS and BADGES EARNED\, simply click on RIDER N OTES and everything will be displayed.\nThey will require\npaper\nfolder\n pens\nriding hat for when around and handling horses\ngloves for when hand ling horses\nAccess to a printer to print off SHEETS required which can be found on our google drive please follow the link https://drive.google.com /drive/folders/1gyFxnlXmtlMmrK_mIGG-8HuX6gHAEPFC?usp=sharing\nIf you have no access to a printer please let us know and we will print you a pack off at an additional charge\nNON REFUNDABLE \nIF YOU WOULD LIKE A FOLDER MAD E UP PLEASE LET LINDSEY KNOW AND THIS WILL BE AN ADDITIONAL CHARGE END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:3408@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251213T130000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251213T134500 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/level-2-group-lesson-2/ SUMMARY:Level 2 Group Lesson DESCRIPTION:Every Saturday (1pm - 1:45pm)\nYou will need to Register Add yo ur Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk\nYou will of had t o of been graded to see what level lessons you can book\nand then you will be able to see what availability we have\n \;\nLevel Two\n1. Explain Safety distances \n(½ A HORSES LENGTH BETWEEN YOU AND THE ONE IN FRONT O R YOU SHOULD BE ABLE TO SEE ½ WAY DOWN THE HORSES TAIL IN FRONT\, IF YOU GET TO CLOSE YOU CAN GET KICKED OR THE HORSES CAN HAVE A TIZZ) \n2. Able to keep horse/pony going on own\n 3. Balanced Sitting trot \n(SIT UP N ICE AND TALL\, HEELS DOWN\, TOES UP\, PALME OF YOUR HANDDS FACING\, KEEP Y OUR LOWER LEG UNDERNEATH YOU\, YOU SHOULD HAVE A STRAIGHT-LINE EAR\, SHOUL DER\, HIP\, HEEL. SIT NICE AND DEEP IN TO THE SADDLE AND DO NOT HOLD YOU S ELL UP IN YOUR STIRRUPS TO TRY AND STOP THE BOUNCE TRY TO ABSORB THE BOUNC E AND SIT DEEP FEEL FOR YOUR SEAT BONES).\n 4. Explain &\; Execute Pr epare Transitions\n(DEPENDING WHAT PACE YOU ARE GOING TO — SQUEEZE THE R EINS LIKE SPONGES WHICH IS CALLED A HALF HALT\, SITTING TROT (IF YOU ARE T ROTTING)\, ACTIVE WALK (IF YOU ARE WALKING)\, SHORTEN REINS\, POSITION- SI T UP TALL – STRAIGHT BACK- HEELS DOWN TOES UP – PALMS OF HANDS FACING\ , LEGS WRAPPED ROUND TO KEEP THEM GOING FORWARDS WETHER IT IS FORWARDS IN TO WALK OR IN TO HALT OR FORWARDS IN TROT PLUS RIDING THROUGH YOUR SEAT TO O)\n 5. Walk over poles \n(POSITION- SIT UP TALL – STRAIGHT BACK- HEE LS DOWN TOES UP – PALMS OF HANDS FACING\, LEGS WRAPPED ROUND TO KEEP THE M GOING FORWARDS AND RIDING THROUGH YOUR SEAT TOO. LOOK STRAIGHT A HEAD DO N’T LOOK DOWN SQUEEZE A LITTLE FIRMER OVER EACH POLE TO ENCOURAGE THE HO RSES TO PICK THEIR FEET UP A LITTLE HIGHER)\n 6. Trot over poles \n(POS ITION- SIT UP TALL – STRAIGHT BACK- HEELS DOWN TOES UP – PALMS OF HAND S FACING\, LEGS WRAPPED ROUND TO KEEP THEM GOING FORWARDS AND RIDING THROU GH YOUR SEAT TOO. IF RISING MAKE SURE YOU KEEP THE UP DOWN RYHTHM OVER THE POLE. LOOK STRAIGHT A HEAD DON’T LOOK DOWN SQUEEZE A LITTLE FIRMER OVER EACH POLE TO ENCOURAGE THE HORSES TO PICK THEIR FEET UP A LITTLE HIGHER)\ n 7.Understand Diagonals \n(AS THE OUTSIDE FRONT LEG GOES FORWARDS YOU S TAND UP AS IT COMES BACK YOU SIT DOWN)\n 8. Know how to change Diagonals \n(CHECK DIAGONAL\, IF INCORRECT SIT FOR 2 BEATS (NOT 3 BEATS) 2 BEATS AND RISE UP AND DOWN AGAIN THEN RE-CHECK YOUR DIAGONAL)\n9. Explain &\; Ri de with the Correct position \n(SIT UP NICE AND TALL\, HEELS DOWN\, TOES UP\, PALME OF YOUR HANDDS FACING\, KEEP YOUR LOWER LEG UNDERNEATH YOU\, \ n\nLINE 1 IS – YOU SHOULD HAVE A STRAIGHT-LINE EAR\, SHOULDER\, HIP\, HE EL\n\nLINE 2 IS – YOU SHOULD HAVE A STRAIGHT-LINE ELBOW\, HAND\, TO YOUR HORSES MOUTH).\n10. Trot 20m circles a and c\n11. More difficult changes of Reins \n(A-C\, C-A\, B-E\, E-B\, K-M\, M-K\, H-F\, F-H\, K-B\, B-K\, B -H\, H-B\, F-E\, E-F\, M-E\, E-M)\n12. Ride Independently \n13. Walk with out Stirrups \n14. Balance for Level 2\n15. Position for Level 2\n16. Ru led of the School\n(ALL RIDERS &\; HELPERS TO WEAR AN UP TO DATE STAND ARD RIDING HAT\,  USE CORRECT ENTRANCES &\; EXITS\,  RESPECT ARENA PR OPERTY &\; PROPERTY OF OTHERS\,  LEAVES ARENA AS YOU FIND IT\,  CONDU CT &\; PRACTICE GOOD HORSEMASTERSHIP\,   PICK UP MANURE\,  KEEP 1/2 HORSES LENGTH BETWEEN RIDERS\,   DOORS/GATES MUST BE CLOSES BEHIND YOU W HEN ENTERING AND LEAVING\,  BE AWARE OF OTHER RIDERS\,  DO NOT CUT ANYON E UP\,  HORSES WORKING AT A FASTER GAIT ARE GIVEN PRIORITY TO USE THE OUT SIDE TRACK\,  HORSES SHOULD PASS LEFT SHOULDER TO LEFT SHOULDER IF ON OPP OSITE REINS\,  IF YOU MUST STOP THEN MOVE TO THE CENTER OF THE ARENA\,  IF THERES A RUN AWAY HORSES ALL RIDERS MOVE TO THE CENTER &\; STOP\,  ENTER &\; LEAVE ARENA IN SINGLE FILE\,  BEWARE AT ALL TIMES OF RIDERS &\; THEIR HORSES AROUND YOU\, PUT ALL EQUIPMENT AWAY AFTER USE) END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:3146@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251213T151500 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251213T161500 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/level-3-group-lesson-3/ SUMMARY:Level 4 Group Lesson DESCRIPTION:Every Saturday (3:15pm - 4:15pm)\nYou will need to Register Add your Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk\nYou will of ha d to of been graded to see what level lessons you can book\nand then you w ill be able to see what availability we have\n \;\nLevel Four\n1. Cont inue working on Balanced Cantering \n2. Trotting Pole without stirrups \ n3. 7 phases of jumping\n\n (TURN -APPROARCH-TAKE OFF-FLIGHT-LAND-GET-AWA Y- TURN)\n REMAIN BALANCED\n IMPULSION\n POSITION – OPEN SHOULDERS ON TURN \n 1. TURN  – ACCURATELY – LINE UP WITH CENTRE – SIT UP – LOOK AHEAD – RIDE LEG TO HAND – KEEP BALANCED RHYTHM – IMPULSION \n  2. APPROACH  – CENTRE OF JUMP – SIT UP – LOOK AHEAD CHANNEL ING HORSE FORWARD – BETWEEN HAND &\; LEG TO MAINTAIN STRAIGHT LINE – MAINTAIN IMPULSION &\; BALANCE\n 3. TAKE OFF – POINT WHICH HORS E GATHERS HINDLEGS UNDERNEATH ITS BODY &\; STARTS TO LIFT FOREHAND – LOWER LEG SECURELY WRAPPED ROUND – MAINTAIN ENERGY &\; FORWARDNESS – HANDS FOLLOW MOVEMENT OF HORSES HEAD NECK BUT MAINTAIN CONTACT THROUGH REIN – LOOK AHEAD\n 4. FLIGHT – IN THE AIR – FOREHAND WELL LIFTED\ , BACK WELL ROUNDED\, FORELEGS &\; HINDLEGS TUCKED UP – FOLDED IN TO JUMPING POSITION\, UPPER BODY LOWERED\, SEAT SLIPPED TO BACK OF SADDLE – HANDS ALLOW STRETCH THE NECK\, BACK &\; BODY GIVES FREEDOM OF MOVEMENT \, WHILE MAINTAINING LIGHT CONTACT – LOWER LEG STAYS SECURELY WRAPPED AR OUND MAINTAIN BALANCE\n 5. LAND – HORSE STRETCHES OUT &\; EXTENDS FORELEGS READY TO LAND – HORSE SHOULD LAND ON FORELEG WANTING THE CANTER LEAD ON – UPPER BODY COMES BACK UP – MAINTAIN CONTACT – LEGS REMAIN IN POSTION – LOOK AHEAD\n 6. GET AWAY  ­­- MOVING AWAY FROM THE J UMP TO THE NEXT – MAKE SURE HORSE IS BALANCED\, PLENTY OF ENERGY &\; IMPULSION- CORRECT CANTER LEAD – LEGS SECURE\n 7. TURN –  TURNS AW AY FROM ONE FENCE TO ANOTHER THIS STAGE STARTS ALL OVER AGAIN OR IF SINGLE FENCE STAY STRAIGHT\n\n4/5. Able Ride A Demi Voltes &\; Reverse Demi V oltes\n\n DEMI VOLTE – ½ 10 MENTRE CIRCLE TO THE CENTRE LINE THEN A DI AGONAL LINE BACK TO THE TRACK TO CHANGE THE REIN\n REVERSE DEMI VOLTE – DIAGONAL LINE TO CENTRE LINE LETTER THEN ½ 10 METRE CIRCLE BACK TO THE T RACK TO CHANGE THE REIN \n\n6. 2X ½ 10 metre Circles to change the rein   \n7. Turn on the Forehand\n\n HALT\, TO STOP FORWARD MOVEMENT APPLY S TEADY PRESSURE ON REINS – SIT UP STRAIGHT \n PRESSURE PLACED 3-4 INCHS BEHIND THE GIRTH WITH YOUR OUTSIDE LEG – HORSE WILL MOVE AWAY FROM THE PRESSURE\, HORSES HIND LEGS WILL MOVE IN FRONT &\; ACROSS THE OTHER HIN D LEG\, THE OPPOSITE FRONT LEG TO YOUR PRESSURE LEG WILL ALSO MOVE AROUND THE OTHER FRONT LEG WILL STAY STILL \n YOUR OTHER LEG (INSIDE) SHOULD BE KEPT STEADY SO TO KEEP YOUR BALANCE AND STOP THE HORSE TRYING TO TURN TOO QUICKLY \n REINS TO CONTROL FRONT OF HORSE – GOOD CONTROL PREVENTS YO UR HORSE MOVING FORWARDS – OUTSIDE HAND LIFT UP AND BACK TO FLEX HORSES NECK SLIGHTLY IN THE DIRECTION OF TURN\, FLEX UNTIL YOU CAN SEE CORNER OF EYE – USE OTHER REIN FOR SUPPORT TO KEEP HORSE FROM MOVING FORWARDS\, OU TSIDE REIN CLOSE TO NECK   \n HALF HALT EACH STEP UNTIL COMPLETE TURN 180 DEGREES – POSITVIE PRAISE AFTER \n TURNING RIGHT RIGHT LEG BACK – RIGHT REIN FLEX \n TURNING LEFT LEFT LEG BACK – LEFT REIN FLEX\n\n 8. 15m circles in walk  (A&\;C)\n9. 10m circles in walk (A&\;C)   \n10. Lighten seat \nINVOLVES STANDING ON YOUR OWN 2 FEET WHILE WORKING YOUR HORSE – BALANCE YOURSELF\, NO LEANING\, HOLDING ON CROUCHING DOWN ON NECK – CLEARANCE BETWEEN BOTTOM AND SADDLE – ALLOWS HORSE TO MOVE M ORE FREELY – IMPROVES BALANCE\, FITNESS AND COORDINATION- FEET CORRECTLY POSITIONED IN STIRRUP\, ALLOWS ANKLES\, KNEES &\; HIPS BECOME MORE EFF ECTIVE SHOCK ABSORBERS – ENGAGE YOUR CORE (TUMMY MUSCLES) – STRAIGHT B ACK – HANDS &\; ARMS INDEPENDENT KEEP CONTACT\n11. Jumping Position  \nTHIS INVOLVES THE RIDER CENTERED OVER HIS/HER FEET – STIRRUP LEATHERS 90 DEGREE ANGLE TO THE GROUND\, CONTINUING A LINE UPWARDS FROM THE STIRRUP LEATHERS- THE HEAD\, SHOULDERS &\; KNEES FALL IN FRONT OF THE LINE – HIPS FALL BEHIND IT\n\n LEG HANG DOWNSIDE EVEN CONTACT ALONG WHOLE LENGT H – INNER THIGH\, KNEE &\; CALF – WEIGHT ALONG BACK OF LEG INTO HEE L FLEXIBLE ANKLE \n SEAT\, HIPS &\; THIGHS –WEIGHT TOWARDS PELVIS\, ENOUGH WEIGHT IN STIRRUP TO SUSPEND IN THE AIR OVER THE SADDLE – HIPS N OT TOO FAR FORWARD IT CHANGES THE BALANCE –HIPS\, FLEXIBLE\, MOVE BACKWA RDS\, BETWEEN FENCES THE THIGHS TAKE UP WEIGHT OF RIDER NOT THE SEAT BONES \n UPPER BODY\, SHOULDERS\, HEAD\, TRUNK – LOOK UP IN DIRECTION YOU ARE GOING – BACK FLAT – OPEN CHEST – SHOULDERS OPEN \n RELEASE – GR AB MANE OR SLIDE HANDS UP CREST AS TAKE OFF\n\n12. Single Fence Jumping   \n13. Be able to check &\; adjust girth while mounted  \n14. Unde rstand &\; Explain Impulsion\nMOVEMENT OF HOESE – FORWARD AND CONTROL LED POWER – EFFECTIVE USE OF POWER IN THE HIND QUARTERS – TO ACHIEVE A HORSE MUST NOT USE SPEED BUT USE MUSCLUAR CONTROL – HORSE RELAXED BACK WILL ALLOW HINDQUARTERS TO COME WELL UNDER ITS BODY AND THIS IS CALLED “ ENGAGED”.\n15. Understand Half halt &\; when Used \n(A SPONGE EFFEC T ON THE REIN(S))\n16. Trotting Poles \n17. Canter Poles\n18. Raised Trot ting Poles \nTO BUILD UP MUSCLE ON TOP LINE SHOULDERS AND BACK – MORE F LEXIBLE – ENCOURAGES LEGS TO LIFT OVER JUMPS\n19. Balance for Level 4\n2 0. Position for Level 4\n21. More Changes of Reins &\; Other Movements   \n22. Continue Perfecting school movements and changes of reins learnt in previous Levels \n23. Canter 20m Circles\n24. Start Strides\n25. 1 5m circles in Trot (A&\;C)\n26. 10m circles in Trot (A&\;C)\n27. Ca nter without Stirrups\n28. Acute Transitions\n29. Confidence END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:8497@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251214T100000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251214T110000 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/level-3-group-lesson-2/ SUMMARY:Level 3 Group Lesson DESCRIPTION: \;\nYou will need to Register Add your Rider(s) on https:/ /bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk\nYou will of had to of been graded to se e what level lessons you can book\nand then you will be able to see what a vailability we have\n \;\nLevel Three\n1. Explain prepare to Canter\n( CHECK POSTIION\, SHORTEN REINS SLIGHTLY\, HALF HALT BUT KEEP LEG ON\, SITT ING TROT\, ASK AS GOING IN TO THE CORNER\, INSIDE BEND FOR CORRECT CANTER LEAD)\n 2. Explain &\; Use Aids to canter\n(SITTING TROT –\n\nLITTLE BIT MORE WEIGHT ON THE INSIDE SEAT BONE YOUR SEAT DRAWS UP THE HIND LEG S TRONG RHYTHM -–\n\nINSIDE LEG ON THE GIRTH ASKS FOR MILD BEND TO PREPARE THE INSIDE LEAD &\; HELPS WITH BALANCE-\n\nINSIDE REIN DOES VERY LITTL E ACTS AS A NECK REIN IT SITS THERE AND PREVENTS HORSE DRIFTING OUT –\n\ n1 TO 3 HALF HALTS BEFORE TRANSITION TO BALANCE WEIGHT TO THE HIND END KEE P LEGS ON FOR IMPULSION AFTER THE HALF HALTS —\n\nOUTSIDE LEG SLIGHTLY B ACK BEHIND THE GIRTH TELLS THEM WHICH LEAD BEHIND\n\nOUTSIDE REIN HELP TO CONTROL SPEED AND KEEP THEM OUT ON THE TRACK)\n3. Figure of 8s\n(2 20M CIR CLES PUT TOGETHER – NO STRAIGHT LINES)\n4. Serpentines\n(NO STRAIGHT LIN ES but when starting to learn a serpentine it is best to rid the straight line then the loop will become better with practice\, LOOPS\, EACH TIME CR OSS OVER THE CENTER LINE SHOULD CHANGE DIAGONAL\, LOOPS EQUAL) (3 LOOP\, 4 LOOP\, 5 LOOPS ECT)\n\n(diagrams are 3 loops serpentine)\n5. Trot 20m cir cles from E &\; B \n6. Balance Canter\n 7. Understand &\; Explain Canter Lead\n(HORSES FRONT INSIDE LEG SHOULD STRIKE OUT FURTHER FORWARD T HAN THE OUTSIDE FRONT LEG\n\nTHEY TAKE OFF WITH THERE OUTSIDE BACK LEG AND LEAD WITH THERE INSIDE FRONT\n\n(THEY CAN BE CORRECT WITH FRONT LEGS AND INCORRECT WITH BACK LEGS WHICH IS CALLED MANY NAMES BUT WE USE THE TERM DI S-UNITED THIS USUALLY FEELS AWFUL\, BUMPY &\; OFF BALANCE. BACK TO TROT AND ASK AGAIN)\n\n(IF THE HORSE IS INCORRECT IN FRONT BACK TO TROT ASK AG AIN)\n 8. Check Canter Lead Whilst mounted\n 9. Walk without stirrups\ n 10. Trot without stirrups\n 11. Adjust Own Stirrups\n 12. Understan d beats of Pace\, Walk\, Trot &\; Canter\n\n WALK IS 4 BEAT EACH FOOT HITS THE GROUND INDEPENDENTLY\n\nThe footfall sequence is:\n\nLeft Hind – Left Front – Right Hind – Right Front.\n\n TROT IS A 2 BEAT FEET GO IN DIAGONAL PAIRS\n\nThe footfall sequence is:\n\nLeft Hind + Right Fro nt – Suspension – Right Hind + Left Front – Suspension\n\n CANTER I S A 3 BEAT 1 PAIR OF FEET STRIKE AND THE OTHER 2 LAND INDEPENDENTLY\n\nRig ht Lead Canter\n\nLeft Hind – Right Hind + Left Front – Right Front – Suspension\n\nLeft Lead Canter\n\nRight Hind – Left Hind + Right Fro nt – Left Front – Suspension\n\n DON’T NEED TO KNOW GALLOP BUT IF T HEY WANT TO KNOW IT IS 4 BEAT SEQUENCE\n\nRight Lead Gallop\n\nLeft Hind – Right Hind – Left Front – Right Front – Suspension\n\nLeft Lead Gallop\n\nRight Hind – Left Hind – Right Front – Left Front – Susp ension\n13.  Position for Level 3\n(VERTICAL LINE EAR- SHOULDER- HIP – HEEL\, EYES UP AND AHEAD\, STRAIGHT LINE FROM ELBOWS SOFT WITH SLIGHT BEND – HAND DOWN THE REIN TO THE HORSES MOUTH\, THUMBS ON TOP POINTING TOWAR DS HORSES EARS\, SIT EQUALLY ARCROSS BOTH SEAT BONES\, RELAX SEAT\, HIPS & amp\; PELVIS\, KNEE &\; THIGH REST LIGHTLY AGAINS SADDLE NOT GRIPPING)\ n 14.  Understand Aids (Natural &\; Artificial)\n\n COMMUNICATION B ETWEEN RIDERS AND HORSE)\n ARTIFICIAL AIDS- MAINLY WHIPS &\; SPURS\n NATURAL AIDS- VOICE\, HANDS\, LEGS\, BODY\, SEAT\n\n(HANDS – COMMUNICATI ON THROUGH REINS TO THE BIT\, SHOULD BE LIGHT FLEXIBLE- USE OF HAND AID MU ST BE USED WITH SEAT\, LEG AIDS- ABOVE HORSES WITHERS LEVEL WITH EACH OTHE R\n\n TURNING – GENTLE SQUEEZING THE REIN ASKS THE HORSE TO TURN HEAD I N THAT DIRECTION\n HALTING –PRESSURE ON BOTH REINS WITH SEAT AND LEG PR OVEDING ENERGY A HALT WILL PRODUCED\n\n(VOICE – WORD\, TONE &\; LENGT H OF TIME THE WORD IS HELD FOR INDICATES UPWARDS/DOWNWARDS TRANSITIONS\n\n UPWARD TRANSITION – EMPHASIS THE LETTER WITH RISE IN TONE TOWARDS END OF WORD\n DOWNWARD TRANSITION – LOWER TONE TOWRDS END OF WORD STRETCH T HE WORD OUT\n COLLECTION – CALM\n\n(SEAT – COLLECTION\, BALANCE\, STE ERING\, FORWARD MOVEMENT\, CONTROL\, STABILITY\n\n SEAT – CENTRAL IN SA DDLE\, EVEN DISTRIBUTION OF WEIGHT OFN SEAT BONES\, ALTER WHEN ASK HORSE T O MOVE DIRECTION\, DO NOT COLLAPSE THROUGH HIP\n HIPS –LEVEL AT ALL TIM ES\, SUPPLE TO ALLOW MOVEMENT ABSORBED THROUGH SEAT\n PELVIS – ABSORD M OVEMENT\, HELPS CONTROL CENTRE OF GRAVITY\, ENCOURANGES HORSE TO ACCELERAT E\n\n(LEGS – USED WITH SEAT &\; HAND TO COMMUNICATE – DIRECTION\, G AIT\, LEVEL OF ACTIVITY\, UPWARD DOWNWARD TRANSITIONS\, LATERAL MOVEMENTS\ n\n ON THE GIRTH – PRODUCES ENERGY/FORWARD MOVEMENT – BOTH LEGS ON TH E GIRTH FORWARD/STRAIGHT\, 1 LEG BEHIND THE GIRTH WILL ASK EITHER CHANGE D IRECTION OR CANTER DEPENDING ON LEVEL OF PRESSURE\n LOWER LEG BEHIND THE GIRTH – ABOUT 2-3 INCHES MORE CONTROL OVER HINDQUARTERS- FORWARD\, BACKW ARD\, DIAGONALLY OR SIDEWAYS MOVEMENTS\, UPWARD TRANSITIONS EG CANTER OR L ATERAL MOVEMENT EG LEG YIELD\, BOTH LEGS BEHIND THE GIRTH CORRECT USE WITH SEAT AND LEGS WILL AID REIN BACK\n\n(WHIP – INSIDE HAND USED TO BACK UP RIDERS LEG AND ENCOURAGE HORSE TO MOVE FORWARD)\n\n(SPURS – ON THE RIDE RS HEEL TO GIVE PRECISE LEG AID ONLY WORN BY EXPERIENCED RIDERS)\n 15. B alance\n16. Check Girth END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:7939@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251214T114500 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251214T124500 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/level-4-group-lesson/ SUMMARY:Level 4 Group Lesson DESCRIPTION:Every Saturday (11:30am - 12:30pm)\nYou will need to Register A dd your Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk and then you will be able to see what availability we have\n \;\nLevel Four\n1. Con tinue working on Balanced Cantering \n2. Trotting Pole without stirrups  \n3. 7 phases of jumping\n\n (TURN -APPROARCH-TAKE OFF-FLIGHT-LAND-GET-AW AY- TURN)\n REMAIN BALANCED\n IMPULSION\n POSITION – OPEN SHOULDERS O N TURN \n 1. TURN  – ACCURATELY – LINE UP WITH CENTRE – SIT UP – LOOK AHEAD – RIDE LEG TO HAND – KEEP BALANCED RHYTHM – IMPULSION \n  2. APPROACH  – CENTRE OF JUMP – SIT UP – LOOK AHEAD CHANNEL ING HORSE FORWARD – BETWEEN HAND &\; LEG TO MAINTAIN STRAIGHT LINE – MAINTAIN IMPULSION &\; BALANCE\n 3. TAKE OFF – POINT WHICH HORS E GATHERS HINDLEGS UNDERNEATH ITS BODY &\; STARTS TO LIFT FOREHAND – LOWER LEG SECURELY WRAPPED ROUND – MAINTAIN ENERGY &\; FORWARDNESS – HANDS FOLLOW MOVEMENT OF HORSES HEAD NECK BUT MAINTAIN CONTACT THROUGH REIN – LOOK AHEAD\n 4. FLIGHT – IN THE AIR – FOREHAND WELL LIFTED\ , BACK WELL ROUNDED\, FORELEGS &\; HINDLEGS TUCKED UP – FOLDED IN TO JUMPING POSITION\, UPPER BODY LOWERED\, SEAT SLIPPED TO BACK OF SADDLE – HANDS ALLOW STRETCH THE NECK\, BACK &\; BODY GIVES FREEDOM OF MOVEMENT \, WHILE MAINTAINING LIGHT CONTACT – LOWER LEG STAYS SECURELY WRAPPED AR OUND MAINTAIN BALANCE\n 5. LAND – HORSE STRETCHES OUT &\; EXTENDS FORELEGS READY TO LAND – HORSE SHOULD LAND ON FORELEG WANTING THE CANTER LEAD ON – UPPER BODY COMES BACK UP – MAINTAIN CONTACT – LEGS REMAIN IN POSTION – LOOK AHEAD\n 6. GET AWAY  ­­- MOVING AWAY FROM THE J UMP TO THE NEXT – MAKE SURE HORSE IS BALANCED\, PLENTY OF ENERGY &\; IMPULSION- CORRECT CANTER LEAD – LEGS SECURE\n 7. TURN –  TURNS AW AY FROM ONE FENCE TO ANOTHER THIS STAGE STARTS ALL OVER AGAIN OR IF SINGLE FENCE STAY STRAIGHT\n\n4/5. Able Ride A Demi Voltes &\; Reverse Demi V oltes\n\n DEMI VOLTE – ½ 10 MENTRE CIRCLE TO THE CENTRE LINE THEN A DI AGONAL LINE BACK TO THE TRACK TO CHANGE THE REIN\n REVERSE DEMI VOLTE – DIAGONAL LINE TO CENTRE LINE LETTER THEN ½ 10 METRE CIRCLE BACK TO THE T RACK TO CHANGE THE REIN \n\n6. 2X ½ 10 metre Circles to change the rein   \n7. Turn on the Forehand\n\n HALT\, TO STOP FORWARD MOVEMENT APPLY S TEADY PRESSURE ON REINS – SIT UP STRAIGHT \n PRESSURE PLACED 3-4 INCHS BEHIND THE GIRTH WITH YOUR OUTSIDE LEG – HORSE WILL MOVE AWAY FROM THE PRESSURE\, HORSES HIND LEGS WILL MOVE IN FRONT &\; ACROSS THE OTHER HIN D LEG\, THE OPPOSITE FRONT LEG TO YOUR PRESSURE LEG WILL ALSO MOVE AROUND THE OTHER FRONT LEG WILL STAY STILL \n YOUR OTHER LEG (INSIDE) SHOULD BE KEPT STEADY SO TO KEEP YOUR BALANCE AND STOP THE HORSE TRYING TO TURN TOO QUICKLY \n REINS TO CONTROL FRONT OF HORSE – GOOD CONTROL PREVENTS YO UR HORSE MOVING FORWARDS – OUTSIDE HAND LIFT UP AND BACK TO FLEX HORSES NECK SLIGHTLY IN THE DIRECTION OF TURN\, FLEX UNTIL YOU CAN SEE CORNER OF EYE – USE OTHER REIN FOR SUPPORT TO KEEP HORSE FROM MOVING FORWARDS\, OU TSIDE REIN CLOSE TO NECK   \n HALF HALT EACH STEP UNTIL COMPLETE TURN 180 DEGREES – POSITVIE PRAISE AFTER \n TURNING RIGHT RIGHT LEG BACK – RIGHT REIN FLEX \n TURNING LEFT LEFT LEG BACK – LEFT REIN FLEX\n\n 8. 15m circles in walk  (A&\;C)\n9. 10m circles in walk (A&\;C)   \n10. Lighten seat \nINVOLVES STANDING ON YOUR OWN 2 FEET WHILE WORKING YOUR HORSE – BALANCE YOURSELF\, NO LEANING\, HOLDING ON CROUCHING DOWN ON NECK – CLEARANCE BETWEEN BOTTOM AND SADDLE – ALLOWS HORSE TO MOVE M ORE FREELY – IMPROVES BALANCE\, FITNESS AND COORDINATION- FEET CORRECTLY POSITIONED IN STIRRUP\, ALLOWS ANKLES\, KNEES &\; HIPS BECOME MORE EFF ECTIVE SHOCK ABSORBERS – ENGAGE YOUR CORE (TUMMY MUSCLES) – STRAIGHT B ACK – HANDS &\; ARMS INDEPENDENT KEEP CONTACT\n11. Jumping Position  \nTHIS INVOLVES THE RIDER CENTERED OVER HIS/HER FEET – STIRRUP LEATHERS 90 DEGREE ANGLE TO THE GROUND\, CONTINUING A LINE UPWARDS FROM THE STIRRUP LEATHERS- THE HEAD\, SHOULDERS &\; KNEES FALL IN FRONT OF THE LINE – HIPS FALL BEHIND IT\n\n LEG HANG DOWNSIDE EVEN CONTACT ALONG WHOLE LENGT H – INNER THIGH\, KNEE &\; CALF – WEIGHT ALONG BACK OF LEG INTO HEE L FLEXIBLE ANKLE \n SEAT\, HIPS &\; THIGHS –WEIGHT TOWARDS PELVIS\, ENOUGH WEIGHT IN STIRRUP TO SUSPEND IN THE AIR OVER THE SADDLE – HIPS N OT TOO FAR FORWARD IT CHANGES THE BALANCE –HIPS\, FLEXIBLE\, MOVE BACKWA RDS\, BETWEEN FENCES THE THIGHS TAKE UP WEIGHT OF RIDER NOT THE SEAT BONES \n UPPER BODY\, SHOULDERS\, HEAD\, TRUNK – LOOK UP IN DIRECTION YOU ARE GOING – BACK FLAT – OPEN CHEST – SHOULDERS OPEN \n RELEASE – GR AB MANE OR SLIDE HANDS UP CREST AS TAKE OFF\n\n12. Single Fence Jumping   \n13. Be able to check &\; adjust girth while mounted  \n14. Unde rstand &\; Explain Impulsion\nMOVEMENT OF HOESE – FORWARD AND CONTROL LED POWER – EFFECTIVE USE OF POWER IN THE HIND QUARTERS – TO ACHIEVE A HORSE MUST NOT USE SPEED BUT USE MUSCLUAR CONTROL – HORSE RELAXED BACK WILL ALLOW HINDQUARTERS TO COME WELL UNDER ITS BODY AND THIS IS CALLED “ ENGAGED”.\n15. Understand Half halt &\; when Used \n(A SPONGE EFFEC T ON THE REIN(S))\n16. Trotting Poles \n17. Canter Poles\n18. Raised Trot ting Poles \nTO BUILD UP MUSCLE ON TOP LINE SHOULDERS AND BACK – MORE F LEXIBLE – ENCOURAGES LEGS TO LIFT OVER JUMPS\n19. Balance for Level 4\n2 0. Position for Level 4\n21. More Changes of Reins &\; Other Movements   \n22. Continue Perfecting school movements and changes of reins learnt in previous Levels \n23. Canter 20m Circles\n24. Start Strides\n25. 1 5m circles in Trot (A&\;C)\n26. 10m circles in Trot (A&\;C)\n27. Ca nter without Stirrups\n28. Acute Transitions\n29. Confidence END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:10590@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251214T140000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251214T143000 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/walk-out-2/ SUMMARY:Walk Out DESCRIPTION: \;\nYou will need to be Registered and Added your Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk You will also of had to be gr aded to see what level you are with us and then you will be able to see wh at availability we have\n\n\n\n\n\nIF THE WEATHER IS AWFUL - WE WILL MAKE THE DECISION ON THE DAY WETHER IT IS SAFE TO GO AHEAD - IF NOT WE WILL REA RRANGE THE WALK OUT\n\nWalk out down the middlewood way\n\n\n\n\n END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:10852@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251214T143000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251214T151500 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/hack/ SUMMARY:Hack DESCRIPTION: \;\nYou will need to be Registered and Added your Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk You will also of had to be gr aded to see what level you are with us and then you will be able to see wh at availability we have\n\n\n\n\n\nIF THE WEATHER IS AWFUL - WE WILL MAKE THE DECISION ON THE DAY WETHER IT IS SAFE TO GO AHEAD - IF NOT WE WILL REA RRANGE THE WALK OUT\n\nHack out down the middlewood way\n\n\n\n\n END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:9284@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251215T103000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251215T113000 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/little-tigers/ SUMMARY:Little Tigers DESCRIPTION: \;\nYou will need to be Registered and Added your Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk You will also of had to be gr aded to see what level you are with us and then you will be able to see wh at availability we have\n\n\n\n\nIntroducing our younger riders &\; rid ers that need additions support!\nCome along to Bank Farm Riding School an d meet our friendly ponies who just can't wait to be pampered and petted b y you.\n\nEach session lasts 1hour. The session includes a short ride on a pony\, or just a sit on\, for those that want.\n\nWork through a Little T igers Syllabus and receive a Certificate upon completion - fun way for chi ldren and adults to learn more about ponies\n\nblock booking discount same day per week Courses will be on Mondays 10.30am-11.30am\, Thursdays 1pm-2 pm &\; Fridays 10.30am-11.30am\n\nParents/carer/guardian will be requir ed to assist their rider - the instructor will go through everything with you on the day please wear a shoe\, boot or wellie with a slight heal noth ing flat soled. leggings or jogging bottoms\, no skirts or shorts\n\n\n\n\ n END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:11174@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251216T160000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251216T180000 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/horse-care-ride/ SUMMARY:Horse Care & Ride DESCRIPTION: \;\nYou will need to be Registered and Added your Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk You will also of had to be gr aded to see what level you are with us and then you will be able to see wh at availability we have\n\n\n\n\nHorse Care &\; Ride (Stable management &\; riding course)\n \;\n\n90mins Sessions (can be booked as a mo nth or individual dates) OPEN TO AGES FROM 6 YEARS OLD AND ALL ABILITIES\n \nWorking through our stable management syllabus's and riding syllabus's\n \n \;\n\nBadges will be applied on the ecpro upon completion and notes added so we are going to run the following levels together under a bronze \, silver and gold Ecpro Badge Scheme\n\n \;\n\nYELLOW  Level 1 &\ ; BLUE Level 2 Stable Management together and upon passing each you will r eceive a yellow &\; blue certificate but on EPRO you will Receive a BR ONZE BADGE\n\nGREEN  Level 2 &\; ORANGE Level 3 Stable Management toge ther and upon passing each you will receive a green &\; orange certifi cate but on EPRO you will Receive a SILVER BADGE\n\nPURPLE Level 5 &\; RED Level 6 Stable Management together and upon passing each you will rece ive a red &\; purple certificate but on EPRO you will Receive a GOLD BA DGE\n\n \;\n\nBRONZE BADGE \n\nThings covered in the Yellow &\; Bl ue Syllabus's\n\n Name basic points of the Horse\n Assist a Rider Mounti ng \n Give a Leg Up \n Fit a Hat to a Rider \n Adjust Stirrups from the ground \n Show a rider how to hold their reins \n Able to check &a mp\; tighten a girth before mounting\n Yard Safety \n Name different pa rts of the Bridle \n Name different parts of the Saddle \n Name the di fferent items of the grooming kit \n Lead a pony in-hand \n Correct wa y to give a pony an apple/carrot \n Approach &\; Handle a pony correc tly \n Catch a pony &\; Put a head collar on \n Demonstrate awarene ss off safety rules &\; hazards \n Tie up a pony correctly\n Able to tie a haynet up correctly \n Pick up &\; pick out feet \n Know the Principles of watering &\; feeding \n How to stop a car \n How to say 'thank-you'\n How to cross a road \n Know which side of the road yo u should ride on\n Understand the simple 'green cross code' \n Know it is safer to ride on the road with adults or parents \n Demonstrate Mucki ng Out\n Bed down \n Demonstrate watering the horse \n Put on and Rem ove  Aa head collar correctly\n Name &\; Describe different types of bedding \n Be able to Put on a Saddle \n Be able to put on a Bridle \ n Name different horses colours \n Name different Markings\n Name diff erent Rugs \n Know the importance of ill-fitting rugs \n Know how to f it a rug \n Know how to care for &\; clean saddlery \n Have knowled ge of correctly fitting tack \n Be able to identify Poisonous Plants\n Untack correctly\n Communicate with Riders &\; Instructors when assist ing \n How to ride along a road\n How to signal Right &\; Left\n Sh ow an awareness of dangers while riding on a road\n\n \;\n\nSILVER BAD GE\n\nCovered in the Green &\; Orange Syllabus’s\n\n Horse &\; Ri der 1st Aid Kit\n Field Safety (shelter\, fencing\, poisonous plants\, ma intenance)\n Treatment of minor Cuts &\; Abrasions\n Correct handling of ponies’ legs\n Correct grooming of ponies’ feet &\; legs\n Ta ck up &\; Un-tack Unaided &\; put away correctly\n Basic feeding\n clean &\; assemble tack\n catch a pony &\; turn it away in the fie ld\n know that water must always be available\n know the structure of th e horse’s foot\n know the names of the farrier’s tools\n identify si gns of ill health\n understand the importance of roughage\n requirements to plaiting a horse\n plaiting a horse\n different mouth pieces &\; their actions\n arena safety – rules of the arena\n yard jobs (&\; safety)\n how to lead a pony along a road on foot\n how to slow a car do wn\n care &\; working of a pony off grass\n elementary feeding\, wate ring &\; cleanliness of the pony\n know when a pony needs shoeing\n k now what to look for in a newly shod foot\n know the main indications for health in the pony\n recognise when a pony is lame\n know how to load & amp\; un-load a pony\n understand the importance &\; the means of prot ecting les while travelling\n put a rug\, roller\, tail bandage &\; Ne w Zealand on\n know what equipment is needed for lunging\n know reasons for lunging\n skeleton of the horse\n know different bandages &\; app ly them\n knowledge of ill-fitting bandages\n show knowledge of hay & \; haylage\n understand the importance of roughage\n knowledge of stabli ng-ventilation-lights-drainage-shelter &\; warmth\n take a horse’s t emperature\n weigh a horse\n understand the reasons for equipment a hors e is wearing\n how to lead a pony along a road while mounted \;\n\nA Parent/Guardian is to attend to drop children off for stable management an d pick them up again\n\nUpon completing each syllabus you will receive a c ertificate once you receive your certificate ONCE YOU HAVE COMPLETED THE B ADGE you can then move on to the next BADGE levels\n\nThis means: if there are no badges displayed\, they are at level 1+2\, working towards Bronze. \n\nIf a Bronze badge is displayed\, they have completed level 1+2 and now working towards Silver (level 3+4) and so on.\n\nTo access this you will have to go on to you account via web link https://bankfarmridingschool.ec pro.co.uk and go on to MY ACCOUNT and then on to RIDERS you will see on t here NOTES/PROGRESS and BADGES EARNED\, simply click on RIDER NOTES and ev erything will be displayed.\n\nAnyone wishing to attend the yard either af ter school or at weekend has to be actively doing our stable management se ssions and have to have of completed level 2 to continue coming on the yar d but do not have to progress to level 3 if not wishing too (However if th e child is under 12years old for insurance purposes there is a charge for them to be here for the day to stay at the yard)\n\nYOU HAVE TO BOOK ON TH E BOOKING SYSTEM FOR ANYONE WANTING TO STAY AND HELP\n\n \;\n\nThey wi ll require\npaper\nfolder\npens\nriding hat for when around and handling h orses\ngloves for when handling horses\nAccess to a printer to print off S HEETS required which can be found on our google drive please follow the li nk https://drive.google.com/drive/folders/1gyFxnlXmtlMmrK_mIGG-8HuX6gHAEPF C?usp=sharing\n\nIf you have no access to a printer please let us know and we will print you a pack off at an additional charge\n\nNON REFUNDABLE\n\ nIF YOU WOULD LIKE A FOLDER MADE UP PLEASE LET LINDSEY KNOW AND THIS WILL BE AN ADDITIONAL CHARGE\n\n \;\n\nNONE DISCOUNTABLE\n\n\n\n\n END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:9020@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251217T180000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251217T190000 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/mixed-level-group-lesson-3/ SUMMARY:Mixed Level Group Lesson DESCRIPTION: \;\nYou will need to be Registered and Added your Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk You will also of had to be gr aded to see what level you are with us and then you will be able to see wh at availability we have\nLevel Three\n1. Explain prepare to Canter\n(CHECK POSTIION\, SHORTEN REINS SLIGHTLY\, HALF HALT BUT KEEP LEG ON\, SITTING T ROT\, ASK AS GOING IN TO THE CORNER\, INSIDE BEND FOR CORRECT CANTER LEAD) \n 2. Explain &\; Use Aids to canter\n(SITTING TROT –\n\nLITTLE BIT MORE WEIGHT ON THE INSIDE SEAT BONE YOUR SEAT DRAWS UP THE HIND LEG STRONG RHYTHM -–\n\nINSIDE LEG ON THE GIRTH ASKS FOR MILD BEND TO PREPARE THE INSIDE LEAD &\; HELPS WITH BALANCE-\n\nINSIDE REIN DOES VERY LITTLE ACT S AS A NECK REIN IT SITS THERE AND PREVENTS HORSE DRIFTING OUT –\n\n1 TO 3 HALF HALTS BEFORE TRANSITION TO BALANCE WEIGHT TO THE HIND END KEEP LEG S ON FOR IMPULSION AFTER THE HALF HALTS —\n\nOUTSIDE LEG SLIGHTLY BACK B EHIND THE GIRTH TELLS THEM WHICH LEAD BEHIND\n\nOUTSIDE REIN HELP TO CONTR OL SPEED AND KEEP THEM OUT ON THE TRACK)\n3. Figure of 8s\n(2 20M CIRCLES PUT TOGETHER – NO STRAIGHT LINES)\n4. Serpentines\n(NO STRAIGHT LINES bu t when starting to learn a serpentine it is best to rid the straight line then the loop will become better with practice\, LOOPS\, EACH TIME CROSS O VER THE CENTER LINE SHOULD CHANGE DIAGONAL\, LOOPS EQUAL) (3 LOOP\, 4 LOOP \, 5 LOOPS ECT)\n\n(diagrams are 3 loops serpentine)\n5. Trot 20m circles from E &\; B \n6. Balance Canter\n 7. Understand &\; Explain Cant er Lead\n(HORSES FRONT INSIDE LEG SHOULD STRIKE OUT FURTHER FORWARD THAN T HE OUTSIDE FRONT LEG\n\nTHEY TAKE OFF WITH THERE OUTSIDE BACK LEG AND LEAD WITH THERE INSIDE FRONT\n\n(THEY CAN BE CORRECT WITH FRONT LEGS AND INCOR RECT WITH BACK LEGS WHICH IS CALLED MANY NAMES BUT WE USE THE TERM DIS-UNI TED THIS USUALLY FEELS AWFUL\, BUMPY &\; OFF BALANCE. BACK TO TROT AND ASK AGAIN)\n\n(IF THE HORSE IS INCORRECT IN FRONT BACK TO TROT ASK AGAIN)\ n 8. Check Canter Lead Whilst mounted\n 9. Walk without stirrups\n 10 . Trot without stirrups\n 11. Adjust Own Stirrups\n 12. Understand bea ts of Pace\, Walk\, Trot &\; Canter\n\n WALK IS 4 BEAT EACH FOOT HITS THE GROUND INDEPENDENTLY\n\nThe footfall sequence is:\n\nLeft Hind – Lef t Front – Right Hind – Right Front.\n\n TROT IS A 2 BEAT FEET GO IN D IAGONAL PAIRS\n\nThe footfall sequence is:\n\nLeft Hind + Right Front – Suspension – Right Hind + Left Front – Suspension\n\n CANTER IS A 3 B EAT 1 PAIR OF FEET STRIKE AND THE OTHER 2 LAND INDEPENDENTLY\n\nRight Lead Canter\n\nLeft Hind – Right Hind + Left Front – Right Front – Suspe nsion\n\nLeft Lead Canter\n\nRight Hind – Left Hind + Right Front – Le ft Front – Suspension\n\n DON’T NEED TO KNOW GALLOP BUT IF THEY WANT TO KNOW IT IS 4 BEAT SEQUENCE\n\nRight Lead Gallop\n\nLeft Hind – Right Hind – Left Front – Right Front – Suspension\n\nLeft Lead Gallop\n\n Right Hind – Left Hind – Right Front – Left Front – Suspension\n13 .  Position for Level 3\n(VERTICAL LINE EAR- SHOULDER- HIP – HEEL\, EYE S UP AND AHEAD\, STRAIGHT LINE FROM ELBOWS SOFT WITH SLIGHT BEND – HAND DOWN THE REIN TO THE HORSES MOUTH\, THUMBS ON TOP POINTING TOWARDS HORSES EARS\, SIT EQUALLY ARCROSS BOTH SEAT BONES\, RELAX SEAT\, HIPS &\; PELV IS\, KNEE &\; THIGH REST LIGHTLY AGAINS SADDLE NOT GRIPPING)\n 14.   Understand Aids (Natural &\; Artificial)\n\n COMMUNICATION BETWEEN RID ERS AND HORSE)\n ARTIFICIAL AIDS- MAINLY WHIPS &\; SPURS\n NATURAL AI DS- VOICE\, HANDS\, LEGS\, BODY\, SEAT\n\n(HANDS – COMMUNICATION THROUGH REINS TO THE BIT\, SHOULD BE LIGHT FLEXIBLE- USE OF HAND AID MUST BE USED WITH SEAT\, LEG AIDS- ABOVE HORSES WITHERS LEVEL WITH EACH OTHER\n\n TUR NING – GENTLE SQUEEZING THE REIN ASKS THE HORSE TO TURN HEAD IN THAT DIR ECTION\n HALTING –PRESSURE ON BOTH REINS WITH SEAT AND LEG PROVEDING EN ERGY A HALT WILL PRODUCED\n\n(VOICE – WORD\, TONE &\; LENGTH OF TIME THE WORD IS HELD FOR INDICATES UPWARDS/DOWNWARDS TRANSITIONS\n\n UPWARD T RANSITION – EMPHASIS THE LETTER WITH RISE IN TONE TOWARDS END OF WORD\n DOWNWARD TRANSITION – LOWER TONE TOWRDS END OF WORD STRETCH THE WORD OU T\n COLLECTION – CALM\n\n(SEAT – COLLECTION\, BALANCE\, STEERING\, FO RWARD MOVEMENT\, CONTROL\, STABILITY\n\n SEAT – CENTRAL IN SADDLE\, EVE N DISTRIBUTION OF WEIGHT OFN SEAT BONES\, ALTER WHEN ASK HORSE TO MOVE DIR ECTION\, DO NOT COLLAPSE THROUGH HIP\n HIPS –LEVEL AT ALL TIMES\, SUPPL E TO ALLOW MOVEMENT ABSORBED THROUGH SEAT\n PELVIS – ABSORD MOVEMENT\, HELPS CONTROL CENTRE OF GRAVITY\, ENCOURANGES HORSE TO ACCELERATE\n\n(LEGS – USED WITH SEAT &\; HAND TO COMMUNICATE – DIRECTION\, GAIT\, LEVE L OF ACTIVITY\, UPWARD DOWNWARD TRANSITIONS\, LATERAL MOVEMENTS\n\n ON TH E GIRTH – PRODUCES ENERGY/FORWARD MOVEMENT – BOTH LEGS ON THE GIRTH FO RWARD/STRAIGHT\, 1 LEG BEHIND THE GIRTH WILL ASK EITHER CHANGE DIRECTION O R CANTER DEPENDING ON LEVEL OF PRESSURE\n LOWER LEG BEHIND THE GIRTH – ABOUT 2-3 INCHES MORE CONTROL OVER HINDQUARTERS- FORWARD\, BACKWARD\, DIAG ONALLY OR SIDEWAYS MOVEMENTS\, UPWARD TRANSITIONS EG CANTER OR LATERAL MOV EMENT EG LEG YIELD\, BOTH LEGS BEHIND THE GIRTH CORRECT USE WITH SEAT AND LEGS WILL AID REIN BACK\n\n(WHIP – INSIDE HAND USED TO BACK UP RIDERS LE G AND ENCOURAGE HORSE TO MOVE FORWARD)\n\n(SPURS – ON THE RIDERS HEEL TO GIVE PRECISE LEG AID ONLY WORN BY EXPERIENCED RIDERS)\n 15. Balance\n16 . Check Girth\nLevel Four\n1. Continue working on Balanced Cantering \n2. Trotting Pole without stirrups \n3. 7 phases of jumping\n\n (TURN -APPR OARCH-TAKE OFF-FLIGHT-LAND-GET-AWAY- TURN)\n REMAIN BALANCED\n IMPULSION \n POSITION – OPEN SHOULDERS ON TURN \n 1. TURN  – ACCURATELY – LINE UP WITH CENTRE – SIT UP – LOOK AHEAD – RIDE LEG TO HAND – KE EP BALANCED RHYTHM – IMPULSION\n  2. APPROACH  – CENTRE OF JUMP – SIT UP – LOOK AHEAD CHANNELING HORSE FORWARD – BETWEEN HAND &\; LEG TO MAINTAIN STRAIGHT LINE – MAINTAIN IMPULSION &\; BALANCE\n 3. TAKE OFF – POINT WHICH HORSE GATHERS HINDLEGS UNDERNEATH ITS BODY & \; STARTS TO LIFT FOREHAND – LOWER LEG SECURELY WRAPPED ROUND – MAINTA IN ENERGY &\; FORWARDNESS – HANDS FOLLOW MOVEMENT OF HORSES HEAD NECK BUT MAINTAIN CONTACT THROUGH REIN – LOOK AHEAD\n 4. FLIGHT – IN THE AIR – FOREHAND WELL LIFTED\, BACK WELL ROUNDED\, FORELEGS &\; HINDLEG S TUCKED UP – FOLDED IN TO JUMPING POSITION\, UPPER BODY LOWERED\, SEAT SLIPPED TO BACK OF SADDLE – HANDS ALLOW STRETCH THE NECK\, BACK &\; B ODY GIVES FREEDOM OF MOVEMENT\, WHILE MAINTAINING LIGHT CONTACT – LOWER LEG STAYS SECURELY WRAPPED AROUND MAINTAIN BALANCE\n 5. LAND – HORSE STRETCHES OUT &\; EXTENDS FORELEGS READY TO LAND – HORSE SHOULD LAND ON FORELEG WANTING THE CANTER LEAD ON – UPPER BODY COMES BACK UP – MAI NTAIN CONTACT – LEGS REMAIN IN POSTION – LOOK AHEAD\n 6. GET AWAY   ­­- MOVING AWAY FROM THE JUMP TO THE NEXT – MAKE SURE HORSE IS BALAN CED\, PLENTY OF ENERGY &\; IMPULSION- CORRECT CANTER LEAD – LEGS SECU RE\n 7. TURN –  TURNS AWAY FROM ONE FENCE TO ANOTHER THIS STAGE STAR TS ALL OVER AGAIN OR IF SINGLE FENCE STAY STRAIGHT\n\n4/5. Able Ride A Dem i Voltes &\; Reverse Demi Voltes\n\n DEMI VOLTE – ½ 10 MENTRE CIRCL E TO THE CENTRE LINE THEN A DIAGONAL LINE BACK TO THE TRACK TO CHANGE THE REIN\n REVERSE DEMI VOLTE – DIAGONAL LINE TO CENTRE LINE LETTER THEN ½ 10 METRE CIRCLE BACK TO THE TRACK TO CHANGE THE REIN \n\n6. 2X ½ 10 met re Circles to change the rein  \n7. Turn on the Forehand\n\n HALT\, TO STOP FORWARD MOVEMENT APPLY STEADY PRESSURE ON REINS – SIT UP STRAIGHT  \n PRESSURE PLACED 3-4 INCHS BEHIND THE GIRTH WITH YOUR OUTSIDE LEG – H ORSE WILL MOVE AWAY FROM THE PRESSURE\, HORSES HIND LEGS WILL MOVE IN FRON T &\; ACROSS THE OTHER HIND LEG\, THE OPPOSITE FRONT LEG TO YOUR PRESSU RE LEG WILL ALSO MOVE AROUND THE OTHER FRONT LEG WILL STAY STILL \n YOUR OTHER LEG (INSIDE) SHOULD BE KEPT STEADY SO TO KEEP YOUR BALANCE AND STOP THE HORSE TRYING TO TURN TOO QUICKLY \n REINS TO CONTROL FRONT OF HORSE – GOOD CONTROL PREVENTS YOUR HORSE MOVING FORWARDS – OUTSIDE HAND LIF T UP AND BACK TO FLEX HORSES NECK SLIGHTLY IN THE DIRECTION OF TURN\, FLEX UNTIL YOU CAN SEE CORNER OF EYE – USE OTHER REIN FOR SUPPORT TO KEEP HO RSE FROM MOVING FORWARDS\, OUTSIDE REIN CLOSE TO NECK   \n HALF HALT E ACH STEP UNTIL COMPLETE TURN 180 DEGREES – POSITVIE PRAISE AFTER \n TU RNING RIGHT RIGHT LEG BACK – RIGHT REIN FLEX \n TURNING LEFT LEFT LEG BACK – LEFT REIN FLEX\n\n8. 15m circles in walk  (A&\;C)\n9. 10m ci rcles in walk (A&\;C)  \n10. Lighten seat \nINVOLVES STANDING ON YOU R OWN 2 FEET WHILE WORKING YOUR HORSE – BALANCE YOURSELF\, NO LEANING\, HOLDING ON CROUCHING DOWN ON NECK – CLEARANCE BETWEEN BOTTOM AND SADDLE – ALLOWS HORSE TO MOVE MORE FREELY – IMPROVES BALANCE\, FITNESS AND CO ORDINATION- FEET CORRECTLY POSITIONED IN STIRRUP\, ALLOWS ANKLES\, KNEES & amp\; HIPS BECOME MORE EFFECTIVE SHOCK ABSORBERS – ENGAGE YOUR CORE (TUM MY MUSCLES) – STRAIGHT BACK – HANDS &\; ARMS INDEPENDENT KEEP CONTA CT\n11. Jumping Position \nTHIS INVOLVES THE RIDER CENTERED OVER HIS/HER FEET – STIRRUP LEATHERS 90 DEGREE ANGLE TO THE GROUND\, CONTINUING A LIN E UPWARDS FROM THE STIRRUP LEATHERS- THE HEAD\, SHOULDERS &\; KNEES FAL L IN FRONT OF THE LINE – HIPS FALL BEHIND IT\n\n LEG HANG DOWNSIDE EVEN CONTACT ALONG WHOLE LENGTH – INNER THIGH\, KNEE &\; CALF – WEIGHT ALONG BACK OF LEG INTO HEEL FLEXIBLE ANKLE \n SEAT\, HIPS &\; THIGHS –WEIGHT TOWARDS PELVIS\, ENOUGH WEIGHT IN STIRRUP TO SUSPEND IN THE AIR OVER THE SADDLE – HIPS NOT TOO FAR FORWARD IT CHANGES THE BALANCE –HIP S\, FLEXIBLE\, MOVE BACKWARDS\, BETWEEN FENCES THE THIGHS TAKE UP WEIGHT O F RIDER NOT THE SEAT BONES\n UPPER BODY\, SHOULDERS\, HEAD\, TRUNK – LO OK UP IN DIRECTION YOU ARE GOING – BACK FLAT – OPEN CHEST – SHOULDER S OPEN \n RELEASE – GRAB MANE OR SLIDE HANDS UP CREST AS TAKE OFF\n\n1 2. Single Fence Jumping  \n13. Be able to check &\; adjust girth whi le mounted  \n14. Understand &\; Explain Impulsion\nMOVEMENT OF HOES E – FORWARD AND CONTROLLED POWER – EFFECTIVE USE OF POWER IN THE HIND QUARTERS – TO ACHIEVE A HORSE MUST NOT USE SPEED BUT USE MUSCLUAR CONTRO L – HORSE RELAXED BACK WILL ALLOW HINDQUARTERS TO COME WELL UNDER ITS BO DY AND THIS IS CALLED “ENGAGED”.\n15. Understand Half halt &\; whe n Used \n(A SPONGE EFFECT ON THE REIN(S))\n16. Trotting Poles \n17. Cant er Poles\n18. Raised Trotting Poles \nTO BUILD UP MUSCLE ON TOP LINE SHOU LDERS AND BACK – MORE FLEXIBLE – ENCOURAGES LEGS TO LIFT OVER JUMPS\n1 9. Balance for Level 4\n20. Position for Level 4\n21. More Changes of Rein s &\; Other Movements  \n22. Continue Perfecting school movements and changes of reins learnt in previous Levels \n23. Canter 20m Circles\n2 4. Start Strides\n25. 15m circles in Trot (A&\;C)\n26. 10m circles in  Trot (A&\;C)\n27. Canter without Stirrups\n28. Acute Transitions\n29. Confidence\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\ n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n&nb sp\;\nLevel Five\n1. Jump combinations \n2. Gird work \n3. Knowledge of strides &\; Jumping Strides\n \;\n4. 15m circles in trot\n \;\n 5. 10m circles in trot\n6. Shallow loops\n7. Poles in canter\n\n\n\nGait\n Feet\nBoot Lengths\nSteps\n\n\nWalk\n2.5′ – 3′\n3 – 4\n1 normal\n\ n\nTrot\n3.5′ – 4′\n4.5 – 5\n1 large\n\n\nCanter\n9′ – 12′\n 12 – 16\n3 normal steps\n(9′ stride)or4 normal steps\n(12′ stride)\n \n\n\n8. Rein Back \nESTABLISH HALT – SEAT REMAIN IMMOBILE – LEGS ASK HORSE TO KEEP CONTACT WITH BIT – KEEP REIN CONTACT SOFT – MOVE BOTH L EGS BACK FROM HIP – KEEP WEIGH DOWN THROUGH BACK AND SEAT – ASK TO MOV E BACK\, LEG\, SEAT &\; REIN – WITH SEAT PRESS BACKWARDS\, UPPER BODY STAYS TALL THIS ASKS THE HORSE TO LOWER HIS CROUP AND MOVE BACK – LEG A ND REIN WORK IN ALTERNATE PAIRS\, LEG REIN 1 SIDE ASK THEN THE OTHER SIDE\ , HORSE WILL MOVE BACK IN DIAGONAL PAIRS – RELEASE PRESSURE AND THEN ASK THEM TO MOVE FORWARDS AGAIN\n9. Aids of a circle\n\n INSIDE LEG — ON G IRTH — KEEPS IMPULSION – ENGAGES INSIDE HIND LEG – ASKS FOR BEND \n OUTSIDE LEG – SLIGHTLY BEHIND THE GIRTH – CONTROLS HINDQUARTERS STOP S THEM FALLING OUT – GENERATES FORWARD MOVEMENT \n INSIDE HAND – BEN D THROUGH HORSES NECK \n OUTSIDE HAND – CONTROLS PACE – PREVENTS NEC K OVER BENDING – PREVENTS HORSE FALLING OUT THROUGH SHOULDERS\n HIPS &a mp\; SHOULDERS PARALLEL WITH HORSES SHOULDERS – BODY UPRIGHT – LOOK AH EAD ROUND THE CIRCLE\n\n10. Canter without Stirrups \n11. Continue Perfe cting Jumping Position \n12. Continue Perfecting Lighten Seat \n13. Leg Yield\nEASIEST WAY FROM ¾ LINE BACK TO THE TRACK – HELPS DEVELOP FEEL & amp\; COORDINAITON — FORWARD &\; SIDEWAYS – BODY REMAINS STRAIGHT –INSIDE FEET STEP REGULARLY &\; EVENLY INFRONT &\; ACROSS THE OUTS IDE FEET— RIDING ON 2 TRACKS\n\n TURN ON TO ¾ LINE – FEW STEPS STRAI GHT\n MOVE WEIGHT IN TO INSIDE SEAT BONE \n\n\n INSIDE LEG SLIGHTLY BEH IND THE GIRTH –PUSH THE HORSES QAURTERS FORWARDS &\; SIDWAYS TOWARDS THE TRACK \n OUTSIDE LEG ON THE GIRTH BUT IF THE HORSE STARTS TO LEAD WI TH ITS QUARTERS MOVE THE OUTSIDE LEG BACK A LITTLE ALSO HELPS KEEP MOVING FORWARDS \n INSIDE REIN – SLIGHT FLEXION TO INSIDE \n OUTSIDE REIN K EEPS HORSE STRAIGHT – PREVENTS TOO MUCH NECK BEND – CONTROL OUTSIDE SH OULDER\n AS HIT THE TRACK – REMOVE FLEXION AND MAKE HORSE STRAIGHT  \ n\n14. Shoulder In \nHIND LEGS ON LINE OF TRAVEL\, SHOULDERS DISPLACED I NSIDE — 3 TRACKS – OUTSIDE HIND LEG TRACKS ALONG WALL\, INSIDE HIND LE G &\; OUTSIDE FORELEG ON SAME TRACK PARALLEL TO WALL\, INSIDE FORELEG O N INNER TRACK PARALLEL TO WALL — BENDING BODY AROUND RIDERS INSIDE LEG W ITH POLL FLEXED TO THE INSIDE – AWAY FROM THE DIRECTION OF TRAVEL) KEEP RHYTHMIC\, RELAXED\, CONNECTED &\; WITH SOME IMPULSION – UNDERSTANDE AIDS FOR LEG YEILDING — HORSE MUST BEND CORRECTLY ON A 10M CIRCLE ASWEL L \n\n Start with a 10-meter circle\n Inside rein leads the shoulders ( and neck) off the wall while the inside leg pushes the rib cage and inside hind into the outside rein\, which catches the shoulder and produces the half halt. The outside leg behind the girth keeps the haunches from fallin g out.\n Weight equal on both sides\,Horse follows your weight. If you si t to the inside too much\, the horse might move in that direction and off the wall.\n Your shoulders and hips should be turned inside slightly para llel to the horse’s shoulders so the outside hip and shoulder move forwa rd\n Horses shoulders should be on the wall at the end of the movement fr om the inside leg. Don’t stay in the shoulder-in for too long. There is no test that has the exercise ridden for more than half the long side (30 meters).\n\n15. Dressage tests \n16. Course work\n17. Flying Changes \ n\n\n\n\n\n\nASKING FOR LEFT FLYING CHANGE \n\n SEAT – RIGHT SEAT BONE FORWARDS TOWARDS HORSES RIGHT EAR \n RIGHT LEG – CLOSE RIGHT LEG ON G IRTH ASK HORSE TO GO FORWARDS DURING CHANGE \n LEFT LEG – MOVE LEFT LE G BEHIND THE GIRTH SIGNAL NEW OUTSIDE HIND LEG TO STRIKE OFF INTO NEW LEAD – QUICK AID \n LEFT REIN – CLOSE LEFT HAND IN A FIST TO KEEP LEFT H IND LEG ON GROUND AND MAINTAIN UPHILL BALANCE \n RIGHT REIN – SOFTEN R IGHT REIN SO NOT TO BLOCK NEW INSIDE FRONT LEG FROM COMING FORWARD\n\n18.  Turn on the Forehand\n\n HALT\, TO STOP FORWARD MOVEMENT APPLY STEADY P RESSURE ON REINS – SIT UP STRAIGHT \n PRESSURE PLACED 3-4 INCHS BEHIND THE GIRTH WITH YOUR OUTSIDE LEG – HORSE WILL MOVE AWAY FROM THE PRESSUR E\, HORSES HIND LEGS WILL MOVE IN FRONT &\; ACROSS THE OTHER HIND LEG\, THE OPPOSITE FRONT LEG TO YOUR PRESSURE LEG WILL ALSO MOVE AROUND THE OTH ER FRONT LEG WILL STAY STILL \n YOUR OTHER LEG (INSIDE) SHOULD BE KEPT S TEADY SO TO KEEP YOUR BALANCE AND STOP THE HORSE TRYING TO TURN TOO QUICKL Y \n REINS TO CONTROL FRONT OF HORSE – GOOD CONTROL PREVENTS YOUR HORS E MOVING FORWARDS – OUTSIDE HAND LIFT UP AND BACK TO FLEX HORSES NECK SL IGHTLY IN THE DIRECTION OF TURN\, FLEX UNTIL YOU CAN SEE CORNER OF EYE – USE OTHER REIN FOR SUPPORT TO KEEP HORSE FROM MOVING FORWARDS\, OUTSIDE R EIN CLOSE TO NECK   \n HALF HALT EACH STEP UNTIL COMPLETE TURN 180 DEG REES – POSITVIE PRAISE AFTER \n\n\n TURNING RIGHT RIGHT LEG BACK – R IGHT REIN FLEX \n TURNING LEFT LEFT LEG BACK – LEFT REIN FLEX \n\n19.  Outline\nCORRECT OUTLINE IS OUTCOME OF BUILD UP OF CORRECT MUSCLE – BE NEFITS OF BEING RIDDEN IN THIS FRAME\, NEEDS TO BE WORKING CORRECTLY\, MOV E FREELY IN CONTACT\, BACK RAISED &\; SUPPLE\, NECK EXTEND IN LIGHT ARC H FROM WITHER TO POLL WITH NOSE JUST IN FRONT OF THE VERTICAL.\n\nBalance\ n\n Aim to maintain a light rein contact to encourage the horse to stay i n balance. Horse who is unbalanced and in particular heavy on their foreha nd will lean on the bit and the reins pulling the rider’s arms forward.\ n\nStretching\n\n When the rider moves their hands in a forward direction combined with the use of their leg and seat pushing\, the horse to remain engaged through their hindquarters and light on the bit thereby allowing the rider to open out the horses neck and frame.\n Stretching can be used when asking for free walk on a long rein or when opening the horses strid e out\, for example when riding lengthened strides.  \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\ n\n\n20. Footfall \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n2 1. Acute Transitions\n22. Balance  \n23. Position\n24. Self Confidence  \n25. Helping the Horse\n26. Confidence and ALL horses within the Riding S chool   \n\nLevel Six\n1. More work on Strides\n\n\n\n \n12hh\n15hh\n17 hh\n\n\nTrot to Bounce\n7-8ft\n9-10ft\n11-12ft\n\n\nCanter to Bounce\n8-9f t\n10-11ft\n12-13ft\n\n\nTrot Double 1 stride\n14-16ft\n17-19ft\n20-22ft\n \n\nCanter Double 1 stride\n17-19ft\n20-22ft\n23-25ft\n\n\nTrot Double 2 s tride \n23-25ft\n27-29ft \n31-33ft\n\n\nCanter Double 2 stride\n26-28ft\ n30-32ft\n34-36ft \n\n\nTreble – usually 1st part 1 stride\, 2nd part 2 strides \n\n\n\n2. More Grid work\n3. Aids to Canter\n4. Aids on a Cir cle\n5. more combination work\n6. Flying Change on Figure of 8\n7. Outline \n8. Turn on the Haunches\n9. Acute Transitions\n10. Canter Leg Yield\n11. Balance\n12. Position\n13. Fluent over course\n14. Drill work\n15. Flying change on straight\n16. Continue perfecting everything you have learnt ov er the levels – Keep going you never stop learning and improving \n17. Lunging/Groundwork\n\n\n\n END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:9805@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251218T130000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251218T140000 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/little-tigers-2/ SUMMARY:Little Tigers DESCRIPTION: \;\nYou will need to be Registered and Added your Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk You will also of had to be gr aded to see what level you are with us and then you will be able to see wh at availability we have\n\n\n\n\nIntroducing our younger riders &\; rid ers that need additions support!\nCome along to Bank Farm Riding School an d meet our friendly ponies who just can't wait to be pampered and petted b y you.\n\nEach session lasts 1hour. The session includes a short ride on a pony\, or just a sit on\, for those that want.\n\nWork through a Little T igers Syllabus and receive a Certificate upon completion - fun way for chi ldren and adults to learn more about ponies\n\nblock booking discount same day per week Courses will be on Mondays 10.30am-11.30am\, Thursdays 1pm-2 pm &\; Fridays 10.30am-11.30am\n\nParents/carer/guardian will be requir ed to assist their rider - the instructor will go through everything with you on the day please wear a shoe\, boot or wellie with a slight heal noth ing flat soled. leggings or jogging bottoms\, no skirts or shorts\n\n\n\n\ n END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:6040@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251218T180000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251218T190000 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/mixed-level-group-lesson-3/ SUMMARY:Mixed Level Group Lesson DESCRIPTION: \;\nYou will need to be Registered and Added your Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk You will also of had to be gr aded to see what level you are with us and then you will be able to see wh at availability we have\nLevel Three\n1. Explain prepare to Canter\n(CHECK POSTIION\, SHORTEN REINS SLIGHTLY\, HALF HALT BUT KEEP LEG ON\, SITTING T ROT\, ASK AS GOING IN TO THE CORNER\, INSIDE BEND FOR CORRECT CANTER LEAD) \n 2. Explain &\; Use Aids to canter\n(SITTING TROT –\n\nLITTLE BIT MORE WEIGHT ON THE INSIDE SEAT BONE YOUR SEAT DRAWS UP THE HIND LEG STRONG RHYTHM -–\n\nINSIDE LEG ON THE GIRTH ASKS FOR MILD BEND TO PREPARE THE INSIDE LEAD &\; HELPS WITH BALANCE-\n\nINSIDE REIN DOES VERY LITTLE ACT S AS A NECK REIN IT SITS THERE AND PREVENTS HORSE DRIFTING OUT –\n\n1 TO 3 HALF HALTS BEFORE TRANSITION TO BALANCE WEIGHT TO THE HIND END KEEP LEG S ON FOR IMPULSION AFTER THE HALF HALTS —\n\nOUTSIDE LEG SLIGHTLY BACK B EHIND THE GIRTH TELLS THEM WHICH LEAD BEHIND\n\nOUTSIDE REIN HELP TO CONTR OL SPEED AND KEEP THEM OUT ON THE TRACK)\n3. Figure of 8s\n(2 20M CIRCLES PUT TOGETHER – NO STRAIGHT LINES)\n4. Serpentines\n(NO STRAIGHT LINES bu t when starting to learn a serpentine it is best to rid the straight line then the loop will become better with practice\, LOOPS\, EACH TIME CROSS O VER THE CENTER LINE SHOULD CHANGE DIAGONAL\, LOOPS EQUAL) (3 LOOP\, 4 LOOP \, 5 LOOPS ECT)\n\n(diagrams are 3 loops serpentine)\n5. Trot 20m circles from E &\; B \n6. Balance Canter\n 7. Understand &\; Explain Cant er Lead\n(HORSES FRONT INSIDE LEG SHOULD STRIKE OUT FURTHER FORWARD THAN T HE OUTSIDE FRONT LEG\n\nTHEY TAKE OFF WITH THERE OUTSIDE BACK LEG AND LEAD WITH THERE INSIDE FRONT\n\n(THEY CAN BE CORRECT WITH FRONT LEGS AND INCOR RECT WITH BACK LEGS WHICH IS CALLED MANY NAMES BUT WE USE THE TERM DIS-UNI TED THIS USUALLY FEELS AWFUL\, BUMPY &\; OFF BALANCE. BACK TO TROT AND ASK AGAIN)\n\n(IF THE HORSE IS INCORRECT IN FRONT BACK TO TROT ASK AGAIN)\ n 8. Check Canter Lead Whilst mounted\n 9. Walk without stirrups\n 10 . Trot without stirrups\n 11. Adjust Own Stirrups\n 12. Understand bea ts of Pace\, Walk\, Trot &\; Canter\n\n WALK IS 4 BEAT EACH FOOT HITS THE GROUND INDEPENDENTLY\n\nThe footfall sequence is:\n\nLeft Hind – Lef t Front – Right Hind – Right Front.\n\n TROT IS A 2 BEAT FEET GO IN D IAGONAL PAIRS\n\nThe footfall sequence is:\n\nLeft Hind + Right Front – Suspension – Right Hind + Left Front – Suspension\n\n CANTER IS A 3 B EAT 1 PAIR OF FEET STRIKE AND THE OTHER 2 LAND INDEPENDENTLY\n\nRight Lead Canter\n\nLeft Hind – Right Hind + Left Front – Right Front – Suspe nsion\n\nLeft Lead Canter\n\nRight Hind – Left Hind + Right Front – Le ft Front – Suspension\n\n DON’T NEED TO KNOW GALLOP BUT IF THEY WANT TO KNOW IT IS 4 BEAT SEQUENCE\n\nRight Lead Gallop\n\nLeft Hind – Right Hind – Left Front – Right Front – Suspension\n\nLeft Lead Gallop\n\n Right Hind – Left Hind – Right Front – Left Front – Suspension\n13 .  Position for Level 3\n(VERTICAL LINE EAR- SHOULDER- HIP – HEEL\, EYE S UP AND AHEAD\, STRAIGHT LINE FROM ELBOWS SOFT WITH SLIGHT BEND – HAND DOWN THE REIN TO THE HORSES MOUTH\, THUMBS ON TOP POINTING TOWARDS HORSES EARS\, SIT EQUALLY ARCROSS BOTH SEAT BONES\, RELAX SEAT\, HIPS &\; PELV IS\, KNEE &\; THIGH REST LIGHTLY AGAINS SADDLE NOT GRIPPING)\n 14.   Understand Aids (Natural &\; Artificial)\n\n COMMUNICATION BETWEEN RID ERS AND HORSE)\n ARTIFICIAL AIDS- MAINLY WHIPS &\; SPURS\n NATURAL AI DS- VOICE\, HANDS\, LEGS\, BODY\, SEAT\n\n(HANDS – COMMUNICATION THROUGH REINS TO THE BIT\, SHOULD BE LIGHT FLEXIBLE- USE OF HAND AID MUST BE USED WITH SEAT\, LEG AIDS- ABOVE HORSES WITHERS LEVEL WITH EACH OTHER\n\n TUR NING – GENTLE SQUEEZING THE REIN ASKS THE HORSE TO TURN HEAD IN THAT DIR ECTION\n HALTING –PRESSURE ON BOTH REINS WITH SEAT AND LEG PROVEDING EN ERGY A HALT WILL PRODUCED\n\n(VOICE – WORD\, TONE &\; LENGTH OF TIME THE WORD IS HELD FOR INDICATES UPWARDS/DOWNWARDS TRANSITIONS\n\n UPWARD T RANSITION – EMPHASIS THE LETTER WITH RISE IN TONE TOWARDS END OF WORD\n DOWNWARD TRANSITION – LOWER TONE TOWRDS END OF WORD STRETCH THE WORD OU T\n COLLECTION – CALM\n\n(SEAT – COLLECTION\, BALANCE\, STEERING\, FO RWARD MOVEMENT\, CONTROL\, STABILITY\n\n SEAT – CENTRAL IN SADDLE\, EVE N DISTRIBUTION OF WEIGHT OFN SEAT BONES\, ALTER WHEN ASK HORSE TO MOVE DIR ECTION\, DO NOT COLLAPSE THROUGH HIP\n HIPS –LEVEL AT ALL TIMES\, SUPPL E TO ALLOW MOVEMENT ABSORBED THROUGH SEAT\n PELVIS – ABSORD MOVEMENT\, HELPS CONTROL CENTRE OF GRAVITY\, ENCOURANGES HORSE TO ACCELERATE\n\n(LEGS – USED WITH SEAT &\; HAND TO COMMUNICATE – DIRECTION\, GAIT\, LEVE L OF ACTIVITY\, UPWARD DOWNWARD TRANSITIONS\, LATERAL MOVEMENTS\n\n ON TH E GIRTH – PRODUCES ENERGY/FORWARD MOVEMENT – BOTH LEGS ON THE GIRTH FO RWARD/STRAIGHT\, 1 LEG BEHIND THE GIRTH WILL ASK EITHER CHANGE DIRECTION O R CANTER DEPENDING ON LEVEL OF PRESSURE\n LOWER LEG BEHIND THE GIRTH – ABOUT 2-3 INCHES MORE CONTROL OVER HINDQUARTERS- FORWARD\, BACKWARD\, DIAG ONALLY OR SIDEWAYS MOVEMENTS\, UPWARD TRANSITIONS EG CANTER OR LATERAL MOV EMENT EG LEG YIELD\, BOTH LEGS BEHIND THE GIRTH CORRECT USE WITH SEAT AND LEGS WILL AID REIN BACK\n\n(WHIP – INSIDE HAND USED TO BACK UP RIDERS LE G AND ENCOURAGE HORSE TO MOVE FORWARD)\n\n(SPURS – ON THE RIDERS HEEL TO GIVE PRECISE LEG AID ONLY WORN BY EXPERIENCED RIDERS)\n 15. Balance\n16 . Check Girth\nLevel Four\n1. Continue working on Balanced Cantering \n2. Trotting Pole without stirrups \n3. 7 phases of jumping\n\n (TURN -APPR OARCH-TAKE OFF-FLIGHT-LAND-GET-AWAY- TURN)\n REMAIN BALANCED\n IMPULSION \n POSITION – OPEN SHOULDERS ON TURN \n 1. TURN  – ACCURATELY – LINE UP WITH CENTRE – SIT UP – LOOK AHEAD – RIDE LEG TO HAND – KE EP BALANCED RHYTHM – IMPULSION\n  2. APPROACH  – CENTRE OF JUMP – SIT UP – LOOK AHEAD CHANNELING HORSE FORWARD – BETWEEN HAND &\; LEG TO MAINTAIN STRAIGHT LINE – MAINTAIN IMPULSION &\; BALANCE\n 3. TAKE OFF – POINT WHICH HORSE GATHERS HINDLEGS UNDERNEATH ITS BODY & \; STARTS TO LIFT FOREHAND – LOWER LEG SECURELY WRAPPED ROUND – MAINTA IN ENERGY &\; FORWARDNESS – HANDS FOLLOW MOVEMENT OF HORSES HEAD NECK BUT MAINTAIN CONTACT THROUGH REIN – LOOK AHEAD\n 4. FLIGHT – IN THE AIR – FOREHAND WELL LIFTED\, BACK WELL ROUNDED\, FORELEGS &\; HINDLEG S TUCKED UP – FOLDED IN TO JUMPING POSITION\, UPPER BODY LOWERED\, SEAT SLIPPED TO BACK OF SADDLE – HANDS ALLOW STRETCH THE NECK\, BACK &\; B ODY GIVES FREEDOM OF MOVEMENT\, WHILE MAINTAINING LIGHT CONTACT – LOWER LEG STAYS SECURELY WRAPPED AROUND MAINTAIN BALANCE\n 5. LAND – HORSE STRETCHES OUT &\; EXTENDS FORELEGS READY TO LAND – HORSE SHOULD LAND ON FORELEG WANTING THE CANTER LEAD ON – UPPER BODY COMES BACK UP – MAI NTAIN CONTACT – LEGS REMAIN IN POSTION – LOOK AHEAD\n 6. GET AWAY   ­­- MOVING AWAY FROM THE JUMP TO THE NEXT – MAKE SURE HORSE IS BALAN CED\, PLENTY OF ENERGY &\; IMPULSION- CORRECT CANTER LEAD – LEGS SECU RE\n 7. TURN –  TURNS AWAY FROM ONE FENCE TO ANOTHER THIS STAGE STAR TS ALL OVER AGAIN OR IF SINGLE FENCE STAY STRAIGHT\n\n4/5. Able Ride A Dem i Voltes &\; Reverse Demi Voltes\n\n DEMI VOLTE – ½ 10 MENTRE CIRCL E TO THE CENTRE LINE THEN A DIAGONAL LINE BACK TO THE TRACK TO CHANGE THE REIN\n REVERSE DEMI VOLTE – DIAGONAL LINE TO CENTRE LINE LETTER THEN ½ 10 METRE CIRCLE BACK TO THE TRACK TO CHANGE THE REIN \n\n6. 2X ½ 10 met re Circles to change the rein  \n7. Turn on the Forehand\n\n HALT\, TO STOP FORWARD MOVEMENT APPLY STEADY PRESSURE ON REINS – SIT UP STRAIGHT  \n PRESSURE PLACED 3-4 INCHS BEHIND THE GIRTH WITH YOUR OUTSIDE LEG – H ORSE WILL MOVE AWAY FROM THE PRESSURE\, HORSES HIND LEGS WILL MOVE IN FRON T &\; ACROSS THE OTHER HIND LEG\, THE OPPOSITE FRONT LEG TO YOUR PRESSU RE LEG WILL ALSO MOVE AROUND THE OTHER FRONT LEG WILL STAY STILL \n YOUR OTHER LEG (INSIDE) SHOULD BE KEPT STEADY SO TO KEEP YOUR BALANCE AND STOP THE HORSE TRYING TO TURN TOO QUICKLY \n REINS TO CONTROL FRONT OF HORSE – GOOD CONTROL PREVENTS YOUR HORSE MOVING FORWARDS – OUTSIDE HAND LIF T UP AND BACK TO FLEX HORSES NECK SLIGHTLY IN THE DIRECTION OF TURN\, FLEX UNTIL YOU CAN SEE CORNER OF EYE – USE OTHER REIN FOR SUPPORT TO KEEP HO RSE FROM MOVING FORWARDS\, OUTSIDE REIN CLOSE TO NECK   \n HALF HALT E ACH STEP UNTIL COMPLETE TURN 180 DEGREES – POSITVIE PRAISE AFTER \n TU RNING RIGHT RIGHT LEG BACK – RIGHT REIN FLEX \n TURNING LEFT LEFT LEG BACK – LEFT REIN FLEX\n\n8. 15m circles in walk  (A&\;C)\n9. 10m ci rcles in walk (A&\;C)  \n10. Lighten seat \nINVOLVES STANDING ON YOU R OWN 2 FEET WHILE WORKING YOUR HORSE – BALANCE YOURSELF\, NO LEANING\, HOLDING ON CROUCHING DOWN ON NECK – CLEARANCE BETWEEN BOTTOM AND SADDLE – ALLOWS HORSE TO MOVE MORE FREELY – IMPROVES BALANCE\, FITNESS AND CO ORDINATION- FEET CORRECTLY POSITIONED IN STIRRUP\, ALLOWS ANKLES\, KNEES & amp\; HIPS BECOME MORE EFFECTIVE SHOCK ABSORBERS – ENGAGE YOUR CORE (TUM MY MUSCLES) – STRAIGHT BACK – HANDS &\; ARMS INDEPENDENT KEEP CONTA CT\n11. Jumping Position \nTHIS INVOLVES THE RIDER CENTERED OVER HIS/HER FEET – STIRRUP LEATHERS 90 DEGREE ANGLE TO THE GROUND\, CONTINUING A LIN E UPWARDS FROM THE STIRRUP LEATHERS- THE HEAD\, SHOULDERS &\; KNEES FAL L IN FRONT OF THE LINE – HIPS FALL BEHIND IT\n\n LEG HANG DOWNSIDE EVEN CONTACT ALONG WHOLE LENGTH – INNER THIGH\, KNEE &\; CALF – WEIGHT ALONG BACK OF LEG INTO HEEL FLEXIBLE ANKLE \n SEAT\, HIPS &\; THIGHS –WEIGHT TOWARDS PELVIS\, ENOUGH WEIGHT IN STIRRUP TO SUSPEND IN THE AIR OVER THE SADDLE – HIPS NOT TOO FAR FORWARD IT CHANGES THE BALANCE –HIP S\, FLEXIBLE\, MOVE BACKWARDS\, BETWEEN FENCES THE THIGHS TAKE UP WEIGHT O F RIDER NOT THE SEAT BONES\n UPPER BODY\, SHOULDERS\, HEAD\, TRUNK – LO OK UP IN DIRECTION YOU ARE GOING – BACK FLAT – OPEN CHEST – SHOULDER S OPEN \n RELEASE – GRAB MANE OR SLIDE HANDS UP CREST AS TAKE OFF\n\n1 2. Single Fence Jumping  \n13. Be able to check &\; adjust girth whi le mounted  \n14. Understand &\; Explain Impulsion\nMOVEMENT OF HOES E – FORWARD AND CONTROLLED POWER – EFFECTIVE USE OF POWER IN THE HIND QUARTERS – TO ACHIEVE A HORSE MUST NOT USE SPEED BUT USE MUSCLUAR CONTRO L – HORSE RELAXED BACK WILL ALLOW HINDQUARTERS TO COME WELL UNDER ITS BO DY AND THIS IS CALLED “ENGAGED”.\n15. Understand Half halt &\; whe n Used \n(A SPONGE EFFECT ON THE REIN(S))\n16. Trotting Poles \n17. Cant er Poles\n18. Raised Trotting Poles \nTO BUILD UP MUSCLE ON TOP LINE SHOU LDERS AND BACK – MORE FLEXIBLE – ENCOURAGES LEGS TO LIFT OVER JUMPS\n1 9. Balance for Level 4\n20. Position for Level 4\n21. More Changes of Rein s &\; Other Movements  \n22. Continue Perfecting school movements and changes of reins learnt in previous Levels \n23. Canter 20m Circles\n2 4. Start Strides\n25. 15m circles in Trot (A&\;C)\n26. 10m circles in  Trot (A&\;C)\n27. Canter without Stirrups\n28. Acute Transitions\n29. Confidence\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\ n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n&nb sp\;\nLevel Five\n1. Jump combinations \n2. Gird work \n3. Knowledge of strides &\; Jumping Strides\n \;\n4. 15m circles in trot\n \;\n 5. 10m circles in trot\n6. Shallow loops\n7. Poles in canter\n\n\n\nGait\n Feet\nBoot Lengths\nSteps\n\n\nWalk\n2.5′ – 3′\n3 – 4\n1 normal\n\ n\nTrot\n3.5′ – 4′\n4.5 – 5\n1 large\n\n\nCanter\n9′ – 12′\n 12 – 16\n3 normal steps\n(9′ stride)or4 normal steps\n(12′ stride)\n \n\n\n8. Rein Back \nESTABLISH HALT – SEAT REMAIN IMMOBILE – LEGS ASK HORSE TO KEEP CONTACT WITH BIT – KEEP REIN CONTACT SOFT – MOVE BOTH L EGS BACK FROM HIP – KEEP WEIGH DOWN THROUGH BACK AND SEAT – ASK TO MOV E BACK\, LEG\, SEAT &\; REIN – WITH SEAT PRESS BACKWARDS\, UPPER BODY STAYS TALL THIS ASKS THE HORSE TO LOWER HIS CROUP AND MOVE BACK – LEG A ND REIN WORK IN ALTERNATE PAIRS\, LEG REIN 1 SIDE ASK THEN THE OTHER SIDE\ , HORSE WILL MOVE BACK IN DIAGONAL PAIRS – RELEASE PRESSURE AND THEN ASK THEM TO MOVE FORWARDS AGAIN\n9. Aids of a circle\n\n INSIDE LEG — ON G IRTH — KEEPS IMPULSION – ENGAGES INSIDE HIND LEG – ASKS FOR BEND \n OUTSIDE LEG – SLIGHTLY BEHIND THE GIRTH – CONTROLS HINDQUARTERS STOP S THEM FALLING OUT – GENERATES FORWARD MOVEMENT \n INSIDE HAND – BEN D THROUGH HORSES NECK \n OUTSIDE HAND – CONTROLS PACE – PREVENTS NEC K OVER BENDING – PREVENTS HORSE FALLING OUT THROUGH SHOULDERS\n HIPS &a mp\; SHOULDERS PARALLEL WITH HORSES SHOULDERS – BODY UPRIGHT – LOOK AH EAD ROUND THE CIRCLE\n\n10. Canter without Stirrups \n11. Continue Perfe cting Jumping Position \n12. Continue Perfecting Lighten Seat \n13. Leg Yield\nEASIEST WAY FROM ¾ LINE BACK TO THE TRACK – HELPS DEVELOP FEEL & amp\; COORDINAITON — FORWARD &\; SIDEWAYS – BODY REMAINS STRAIGHT –INSIDE FEET STEP REGULARLY &\; EVENLY INFRONT &\; ACROSS THE OUTS IDE FEET— RIDING ON 2 TRACKS\n\n TURN ON TO ¾ LINE – FEW STEPS STRAI GHT\n MOVE WEIGHT IN TO INSIDE SEAT BONE \n\n\n INSIDE LEG SLIGHTLY BEH IND THE GIRTH –PUSH THE HORSES QAURTERS FORWARDS &\; SIDWAYS TOWARDS THE TRACK \n OUTSIDE LEG ON THE GIRTH BUT IF THE HORSE STARTS TO LEAD WI TH ITS QUARTERS MOVE THE OUTSIDE LEG BACK A LITTLE ALSO HELPS KEEP MOVING FORWARDS \n INSIDE REIN – SLIGHT FLEXION TO INSIDE \n OUTSIDE REIN K EEPS HORSE STRAIGHT – PREVENTS TOO MUCH NECK BEND – CONTROL OUTSIDE SH OULDER\n AS HIT THE TRACK – REMOVE FLEXION AND MAKE HORSE STRAIGHT  \ n\n14. Shoulder In \nHIND LEGS ON LINE OF TRAVEL\, SHOULDERS DISPLACED I NSIDE — 3 TRACKS – OUTSIDE HIND LEG TRACKS ALONG WALL\, INSIDE HIND LE G &\; OUTSIDE FORELEG ON SAME TRACK PARALLEL TO WALL\, INSIDE FORELEG O N INNER TRACK PARALLEL TO WALL — BENDING BODY AROUND RIDERS INSIDE LEG W ITH POLL FLEXED TO THE INSIDE – AWAY FROM THE DIRECTION OF TRAVEL) KEEP RHYTHMIC\, RELAXED\, CONNECTED &\; WITH SOME IMPULSION – UNDERSTANDE AIDS FOR LEG YEILDING — HORSE MUST BEND CORRECTLY ON A 10M CIRCLE ASWEL L \n\n Start with a 10-meter circle\n Inside rein leads the shoulders ( and neck) off the wall while the inside leg pushes the rib cage and inside hind into the outside rein\, which catches the shoulder and produces the half halt. The outside leg behind the girth keeps the haunches from fallin g out.\n Weight equal on both sides\,Horse follows your weight. If you si t to the inside too much\, the horse might move in that direction and off the wall.\n Your shoulders and hips should be turned inside slightly para llel to the horse’s shoulders so the outside hip and shoulder move forwa rd\n Horses shoulders should be on the wall at the end of the movement fr om the inside leg. Don’t stay in the shoulder-in for too long. There is no test that has the exercise ridden for more than half the long side (30 meters).\n\n15. Dressage tests \n16. Course work\n17. Flying Changes \ n\n\n\n\n\n\nASKING FOR LEFT FLYING CHANGE \n\n SEAT – RIGHT SEAT BONE FORWARDS TOWARDS HORSES RIGHT EAR \n RIGHT LEG – CLOSE RIGHT LEG ON G IRTH ASK HORSE TO GO FORWARDS DURING CHANGE \n LEFT LEG – MOVE LEFT LE G BEHIND THE GIRTH SIGNAL NEW OUTSIDE HIND LEG TO STRIKE OFF INTO NEW LEAD – QUICK AID \n LEFT REIN – CLOSE LEFT HAND IN A FIST TO KEEP LEFT H IND LEG ON GROUND AND MAINTAIN UPHILL BALANCE \n RIGHT REIN – SOFTEN R IGHT REIN SO NOT TO BLOCK NEW INSIDE FRONT LEG FROM COMING FORWARD\n\n18.  Turn on the Forehand\n\n HALT\, TO STOP FORWARD MOVEMENT APPLY STEADY P RESSURE ON REINS – SIT UP STRAIGHT \n PRESSURE PLACED 3-4 INCHS BEHIND THE GIRTH WITH YOUR OUTSIDE LEG – HORSE WILL MOVE AWAY FROM THE PRESSUR E\, HORSES HIND LEGS WILL MOVE IN FRONT &\; ACROSS THE OTHER HIND LEG\, THE OPPOSITE FRONT LEG TO YOUR PRESSURE LEG WILL ALSO MOVE AROUND THE OTH ER FRONT LEG WILL STAY STILL \n YOUR OTHER LEG (INSIDE) SHOULD BE KEPT S TEADY SO TO KEEP YOUR BALANCE AND STOP THE HORSE TRYING TO TURN TOO QUICKL Y \n REINS TO CONTROL FRONT OF HORSE – GOOD CONTROL PREVENTS YOUR HORS E MOVING FORWARDS – OUTSIDE HAND LIFT UP AND BACK TO FLEX HORSES NECK SL IGHTLY IN THE DIRECTION OF TURN\, FLEX UNTIL YOU CAN SEE CORNER OF EYE – USE OTHER REIN FOR SUPPORT TO KEEP HORSE FROM MOVING FORWARDS\, OUTSIDE R EIN CLOSE TO NECK   \n HALF HALT EACH STEP UNTIL COMPLETE TURN 180 DEG REES – POSITVIE PRAISE AFTER \n\n\n TURNING RIGHT RIGHT LEG BACK – R IGHT REIN FLEX \n TURNING LEFT LEFT LEG BACK – LEFT REIN FLEX \n\n19.  Outline\nCORRECT OUTLINE IS OUTCOME OF BUILD UP OF CORRECT MUSCLE – BE NEFITS OF BEING RIDDEN IN THIS FRAME\, NEEDS TO BE WORKING CORRECTLY\, MOV E FREELY IN CONTACT\, BACK RAISED &\; SUPPLE\, NECK EXTEND IN LIGHT ARC H FROM WITHER TO POLL WITH NOSE JUST IN FRONT OF THE VERTICAL.\n\nBalance\ n\n Aim to maintain a light rein contact to encourage the horse to stay i n balance. Horse who is unbalanced and in particular heavy on their foreha nd will lean on the bit and the reins pulling the rider’s arms forward.\ n\nStretching\n\n When the rider moves their hands in a forward direction combined with the use of their leg and seat pushing\, the horse to remain engaged through their hindquarters and light on the bit thereby allowing the rider to open out the horses neck and frame.\n Stretching can be used when asking for free walk on a long rein or when opening the horses strid e out\, for example when riding lengthened strides.  \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\ n\n\n20. Footfall \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n2 1. Acute Transitions\n22. Balance  \n23. Position\n24. Self Confidence  \n25. Helping the Horse\n26. Confidence and ALL horses within the Riding S chool   \n\nLevel Six\n1. More work on Strides\n\n\n\n \n12hh\n15hh\n17 hh\n\n\nTrot to Bounce\n7-8ft\n9-10ft\n11-12ft\n\n\nCanter to Bounce\n8-9f t\n10-11ft\n12-13ft\n\n\nTrot Double 1 stride\n14-16ft\n17-19ft\n20-22ft\n \n\nCanter Double 1 stride\n17-19ft\n20-22ft\n23-25ft\n\n\nTrot Double 2 s tride \n23-25ft\n27-29ft \n31-33ft\n\n\nCanter Double 2 stride\n26-28ft\ n30-32ft\n34-36ft \n\n\nTreble – usually 1st part 1 stride\, 2nd part 2 strides \n\n\n\n2. More Grid work\n3. Aids to Canter\n4. Aids on a Cir cle\n5. more combination work\n6. Flying Change on Figure of 8\n7. Outline \n8. Turn on the Haunches\n9. Acute Transitions\n10. Canter Leg Yield\n11. Balance\n12. Position\n13. Fluent over course\n14. Drill work\n15. Flying change on straight\n16. Continue perfecting everything you have learnt ov er the levels – Keep going you never stop learning and improving \n17. Lunging/Groundwork\n\n\n\n END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:9285@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251219T103000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251219T113000 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/little-tigers/ SUMMARY:Little Tigers DESCRIPTION: \;\nYou will need to be Registered and Added your Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk You will also of had to be gr aded to see what level you are with us and then you will be able to see wh at availability we have\n\n\n\n\nIntroducing our younger riders &\; rid ers that need additions support!\nCome along to Bank Farm Riding School an d meet our friendly ponies who just can't wait to be pampered and petted b y you.\n\nEach session lasts 1hour. The session includes a short ride on a pony\, or just a sit on\, for those that want.\n\nWork through a Little T igers Syllabus and receive a Certificate upon completion - fun way for chi ldren and adults to learn more about ponies\n\nblock booking discount same day per week Courses will be on Mondays 10.30am-11.30am\, Thursdays 1pm-2 pm &\; Fridays 10.30am-11.30am\n\nParents/carer/guardian will be requir ed to assist their rider - the instructor will go through everything with you on the day please wear a shoe\, boot or wellie with a slight heal noth ing flat soled. leggings or jogging bottoms\, no skirts or shorts\n\n\n\n\ n END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:6561@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251219T170000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251219T180000 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/jumping-lesson/ SUMMARY:Multi Discipline Lesson DESCRIPTION:Multi Discipline Lesson\n\nwill change on a weekly basis\n\ncov ering - Jumping\, Ridden &\; In Hand Showing\, Dressage &\; more\n\n different discipline from week to week\n\n(Have a Practice at jumping comb inations and having a go a fillers\, broaden you knowlegde on approach\, t urns\, landing\, get away and prep for your upcoming fence)\n\nMAX OF 5 RI DERS (if only 1 person this will change to a 30min private)\n\nThis activi ty requires a high level of teamwork between horse and rider\, while testi ng the rider’s skill and the horse or pony’s power\, scope\, speed\, a thleticism\, and carefulness.  \n\nWith training and practice\, competit ors work together with their team mate to accomplish their goals.  END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:3671@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251220T090000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251220T144500 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/level-5-6-group-lesson-2/ SUMMARY:Level 5/6 Group Lesson DESCRIPTION: \;\nLevel 5/6 Group Lesson\n\n\n\nYou will need to Registe r Add your Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk \nYou will of had to of been graded to see what level lessons you can book \nand the n you will be able to see what availability we have\n \;\n\n\n\n\n\nLe vel Five\n1. Jump combinations \n2. Gird work \n3. Knowledge of strides &\; Jumping Strides\n \;\n4. 15m circles in trot\n \;\n5. 10m c ircles in trot\n6. Shallow loops\n7. Poles in canter\n\n\n\nGait\nFeet\nBo ot Lengths\nSteps\n\n\nWalk\n2.5′ – 3′\n3 – 4\n1 normal\n\n\nTrot\ n3.5′ – 4′\n4.5 – 5\n1 large\n\n\nCanter\n9′ – 12′\n12 – 1 6\n3 normal steps\n(9′ stride)or4 normal steps\n(12′ stride)\n\n\n\n8. Rein Back \nESTABLISH HALT – SEAT REMAIN IMMOBILE – LEGS ASK HORSE T O KEEP CONTACT WITH BIT – KEEP REIN CONTACT SOFT – MOVE BOTH LEGS BACK FROM HIP – KEEP WEIGH DOWN THROUGH BACK AND SEAT – ASK TO MOVE BACK\, LEG\, SEAT &\; REIN – WITH SEAT PRESS BACKWARDS\, UPPER BODY STAYS T ALL THIS ASKS THE HORSE TO LOWER HIS CROUP AND MOVE BACK – LEG AND REIN WORK IN ALTERNATE PAIRS\, LEG REIN 1 SIDE ASK THEN THE OTHER SIDE\, HORSE WILL MOVE BACK IN DIAGONAL PAIRS – RELEASE PRESSURE AND THEN ASK THEM TO MOVE FORWARDS AGAIN\n9. Aids of a circle\n\n INSIDE LEG — ON GIRTH — KEEPS IMPULSION – ENGAGES INSIDE HIND LEG – ASKS FOR BEND \n OUTSID E LEG – SLIGHTLY BEHIND THE GIRTH – CONTROLS HINDQUARTERS STOPS THEM F ALLING OUT – GENERATES FORWARD MOVEMENT \n INSIDE HAND – BEND THROUG H HORSES NECK \n OUTSIDE HAND – CONTROLS PACE – PREVENTS NECK OVER B ENDING – PREVENTS HORSE FALLING OUT THROUGH SHOULDERS\n HIPS &\; SHO ULDERS PARALLEL WITH HORSES SHOULDERS – BODY UPRIGHT – LOOK AHEAD ROUN D THE CIRCLE\n\n10. Canter without Stirrups \n11. Continue Perfecting Ju mping Position \n12. Continue Perfecting Lighten Seat \n13. Leg Yield\nE ASIEST WAY FROM ¾ LINE BACK TO THE TRACK – HELPS DEVELOP FEEL &\; CO ORDINAITON — FORWARD &\; SIDEWAYS – BODY REMAINS STRAIGHT –INSIDE FEET STEP REGULARLY &\; EVENLY INFRONT &\; ACROSS THE OUTSIDE FEET — RIDING ON 2 TRACKS\n\n TURN ON TO ¾ LINE – FEW STEPS STRAIGHT\n M OVE WEIGHT IN TO INSIDE SEAT BONE \n\n\n INSIDE LEG SLIGHTLY BEHIND THE GIRTH –PUSH THE HORSES QAURTERS FORWARDS &\; SIDWAYS TOWARDS THE TRAC K \n OUTSIDE LEG ON THE GIRTH BUT IF THE HORSE STARTS TO LEAD WITH ITS Q UARTERS MOVE THE OUTSIDE LEG BACK A LITTLE ALSO HELPS KEEP MOVING FORWARDS  \n INSIDE REIN – SLIGHT FLEXION TO INSIDE \n OUTSIDE REIN KEEPS HOR SE STRAIGHT – PREVENTS TOO MUCH NECK BEND – CONTROL OUTSIDE SHOULDER\n AS HIT THE TRACK – REMOVE FLEXION AND MAKE HORSE STRAIGHT  \n\n14.  Shoulder In \nHIND LEGS ON LINE OF TRAVEL\, SHOULDERS DISPLACED INSIDE — 3 TRACKS – OUTSIDE HIND LEG TRACKS ALONG WALL\, INSIDE HIND LEG & \; OUTSIDE FORELEG ON SAME TRACK PARALLEL TO WALL\, INSIDE FORELEG ON INNE R TRACK PARALLEL TO WALL — BENDING BODY AROUND RIDERS INSIDE LEG WITH PO LL FLEXED TO THE INSIDE – AWAY FROM THE DIRECTION OF TRAVEL) KEEP RHYTH MIC\, RELAXED\, CONNECTED &\; WITH SOME IMPULSION – UNDERSTANDE AIDS FOR LEG YEILDING — HORSE MUST BEND CORRECTLY ON A 10M CIRCLE ASWELL \n\ n Start with a 10-meter circle\n Inside rein leads the shoulders (and ne ck) off the wall while the inside leg pushes the rib cage and inside hind into the outside rein\, which catches the shoulder and produces the half h alt. The outside leg behind the girth keeps the haunches from falling out. \n Weight equal on both sides\,Horse follows your weight. If you sit to t he inside too much\, the horse might move in that direction and off the wa ll.\n Your shoulders and hips should be turned inside slightly parallel t o the horse’s shoulders so the outside hip and shoulder move forward\n Horses shoulders should be on the wall at the end of the movement from the inside leg. Don’t stay in the shoulder-in for too long. There is no tes t that has the exercise ridden for more than half the long side (30 meters ).\n\n15. Dressage tests \n16. Course work\n17. Flying Changes \n\n\n\ n\n\nASKING FOR LEFT FLYING CHANGE \n\n SEAT – RIGHT SEAT BONE FORWARD S TOWARDS HORSES RIGHT EAR \n RIGHT LEG – CLOSE RIGHT LEG ON GIRTH ASK HORSE TO GO FORWARDS DURING CHANGE \n LEFT LEG – MOVE LEFT LEG BEHIND THE GIRTH SIGNAL NEW OUTSIDE HIND LEG TO STRIKE OFF INTO NEW LEAD – QUI CK AID \n LEFT REIN – CLOSE LEFT HAND IN A FIST TO KEEP LEFT HIND LEG ON GROUND AND MAINTAIN UPHILL BALANCE \n RIGHT REIN – SOFTEN RIGHT REI N SO NOT TO BLOCK NEW INSIDE FRONT LEG FROM COMING FORWARD\n\n18. Turn on the Forehand\n\n HALT\, TO STOP FORWARD MOVEMENT APPLY STEADY PRESSURE O N REINS – SIT UP STRAIGHT \n PRESSURE PLACED 3-4 INCHS BEHIND THE GIRT H WITH YOUR OUTSIDE LEG – HORSE WILL MOVE AWAY FROM THE PRESSURE\, HORSE S HIND LEGS WILL MOVE IN FRONT &\; ACROSS THE OTHER HIND LEG\, THE OPPO SITE FRONT LEG TO YOUR PRESSURE LEG WILL ALSO MOVE AROUND THE OTHER FRONT LEG WILL STAY STILL \n YOUR OTHER LEG (INSIDE) SHOULD BE KEPT STEADY SO TO KEEP YOUR BALANCE AND STOP THE HORSE TRYING TO TURN TOO QUICKLY \n RE INS TO CONTROL FRONT OF HORSE – GOOD CONTROL PREVENTS YOUR HORSE MOVING FORWARDS – OUTSIDE HAND LIFT UP AND BACK TO FLEX HORSES NECK SLIGHTLY IN THE DIRECTION OF TURN\, FLEX UNTIL YOU CAN SEE CORNER OF EYE – USE OTHE R REIN FOR SUPPORT TO KEEP HORSE FROM MOVING FORWARDS\, OUTSIDE REIN CLOSE TO NECK   \n HALF HALT EACH STEP UNTIL COMPLETE TURN 180 DEGREES – POSITVIE PRAISE AFTER \n\n\n TURNING RIGHT RIGHT LEG BACK – RIGHT REIN FLEX \n TURNING LEFT LEFT LEG BACK – LEFT REIN FLEX \n\n19. Outline \nCORRECT OUTLINE IS OUTCOME OF BUILD UP OF CORRECT MUSCLE – BENEFITS OF BEING RIDDEN IN THIS FRAME\, NEEDS TO BE WORKING CORRECTLY\, MOVE FREELY IN CONTACT\, BACK RAISED &\; SUPPLE\, NECK EXTEND IN LIGHT ARCH FROM WI THER TO POLL WITH NOSE JUST IN FRONT OF THE VERTICAL.\n\nBalance\n\n Aim to maintain a light rein contact to encourage the horse to stay in balance . Horse who is unbalanced and in particular heavy on their forehand will l ean on the bit and the reins pulling the rider’s arms forward.\n\nStretc hing\n\n When the rider moves their hands in a forward direction combined with the use of their leg and seat pushing\, the horse to remain engaged through their hindquarters and light on the bit thereby allowing the rider to open out the horses neck and frame.\n Stretching can be used when ask ing for free walk on a long rein or when opening the horses stride out\, f or example when riding lengthened strides.  \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n20. Foot fall \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n21. Acute Transitions\ n22. Balance  \n23. Position\n24. Self Confidence \n25. Helping the Hor se\n26. Confidence and ALL horses within the Riding School   \n \;\n \n\n\n\n\n \;\n \n\n\n\n\nLevel Six\n1. More work on Stridcs\n\n\n\n  \n12hh\n15hh\n17hh\n\n\nTrot to Bounce\n7-8ft\n9-10ft\n11-12ft\n\n\nCant er to Bounce\n8-9ft\n10-11ft\n12-13ft\n\n\nTrot Double 1 stride\n14-16ft\n 17-19ft\n20-22ft\n\n\nCanter Double 1 stride\n17-19ft\n20-22ft\n23-25ft\n\ n\nTrot Double 2 stride \n23-25ft\n27-29ft \n31-33ft\n\n\nCanter Double 2 stride\n26-28ft\n30-32ft\n34-36ft \n\n\nTreble – usually 1st part 1 stride\, 2nd part 2 strides \n\n\n\n2. More Grid work\n3. Aids to Canter \n4. Aids on a Circle\n5. more combination work\n6. Flying Change on Figur e of 8\n7. Outline\n8. Turn on the Haunches\n9. Acute Transitions\n10. Can ter Leg Yield\n11. Balance\n12. Position\n13. Fluent over course\n14. Dril l work\n15. Flying change on straight\n16. Continue perfecting everything you have learnt over the levels – Keep going you never stop learning and improving \n17. Lunging/Groundwork\n\n\n\n\n\n\n END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:2099@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251220T100000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251220T110000 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/level-3-group-lesson-2/ SUMMARY:Level 3 Group Lesson DESCRIPTION: \;\nYou will need to Register Add your Rider(s) on https:/ /bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk\nYou will of had to of been graded to se e what level lessons you can book\nand then you will be able to see what a vailability we have\n \;\nLevel Three\n1. Explain prepare to Canter\n( CHECK POSTIION\, SHORTEN REINS SLIGHTLY\, HALF HALT BUT KEEP LEG ON\, SITT ING TROT\, ASK AS GOING IN TO THE CORNER\, INSIDE BEND FOR CORRECT CANTER LEAD)\n 2. Explain &\; Use Aids to canter\n(SITTING TROT –\n\nLITTLE BIT MORE WEIGHT ON THE INSIDE SEAT BONE YOUR SEAT DRAWS UP THE HIND LEG S TRONG RHYTHM -–\n\nINSIDE LEG ON THE GIRTH ASKS FOR MILD BEND TO PREPARE THE INSIDE LEAD &\; HELPS WITH BALANCE-\n\nINSIDE REIN DOES VERY LITTL E ACTS AS A NECK REIN IT SITS THERE AND PREVENTS HORSE DRIFTING OUT –\n\ n1 TO 3 HALF HALTS BEFORE TRANSITION TO BALANCE WEIGHT TO THE HIND END KEE P LEGS ON FOR IMPULSION AFTER THE HALF HALTS —\n\nOUTSIDE LEG SLIGHTLY B ACK BEHIND THE GIRTH TELLS THEM WHICH LEAD BEHIND\n\nOUTSIDE REIN HELP TO CONTROL SPEED AND KEEP THEM OUT ON THE TRACK)\n3. Figure of 8s\n(2 20M CIR CLES PUT TOGETHER – NO STRAIGHT LINES)\n4. Serpentines\n(NO STRAIGHT LIN ES but when starting to learn a serpentine it is best to rid the straight line then the loop will become better with practice\, LOOPS\, EACH TIME CR OSS OVER THE CENTER LINE SHOULD CHANGE DIAGONAL\, LOOPS EQUAL) (3 LOOP\, 4 LOOP\, 5 LOOPS ECT)\n\n(diagrams are 3 loops serpentine)\n5. Trot 20m cir cles from E &\; B \n6. Balance Canter\n 7. Understand &\; Explain Canter Lead\n(HORSES FRONT INSIDE LEG SHOULD STRIKE OUT FURTHER FORWARD T HAN THE OUTSIDE FRONT LEG\n\nTHEY TAKE OFF WITH THERE OUTSIDE BACK LEG AND LEAD WITH THERE INSIDE FRONT\n\n(THEY CAN BE CORRECT WITH FRONT LEGS AND INCORRECT WITH BACK LEGS WHICH IS CALLED MANY NAMES BUT WE USE THE TERM DI S-UNITED THIS USUALLY FEELS AWFUL\, BUMPY &\; OFF BALANCE. BACK TO TROT AND ASK AGAIN)\n\n(IF THE HORSE IS INCORRECT IN FRONT BACK TO TROT ASK AG AIN)\n 8. Check Canter Lead Whilst mounted\n 9. Walk without stirrups\ n 10. Trot without stirrups\n 11. Adjust Own Stirrups\n 12. Understan d beats of Pace\, Walk\, Trot &\; Canter\n\n WALK IS 4 BEAT EACH FOOT HITS THE GROUND INDEPENDENTLY\n\nThe footfall sequence is:\n\nLeft Hind – Left Front – Right Hind – Right Front.\n\n TROT IS A 2 BEAT FEET GO IN DIAGONAL PAIRS\n\nThe footfall sequence is:\n\nLeft Hind + Right Fro nt – Suspension – Right Hind + Left Front – Suspension\n\n CANTER I S A 3 BEAT 1 PAIR OF FEET STRIKE AND THE OTHER 2 LAND INDEPENDENTLY\n\nRig ht Lead Canter\n\nLeft Hind – Right Hind + Left Front – Right Front – Suspension\n\nLeft Lead Canter\n\nRight Hind – Left Hind + Right Fro nt – Left Front – Suspension\n\n DON’T NEED TO KNOW GALLOP BUT IF T HEY WANT TO KNOW IT IS 4 BEAT SEQUENCE\n\nRight Lead Gallop\n\nLeft Hind – Right Hind – Left Front – Right Front – Suspension\n\nLeft Lead Gallop\n\nRight Hind – Left Hind – Right Front – Left Front – Susp ension\n13.  Position for Level 3\n(VERTICAL LINE EAR- SHOULDER- HIP – HEEL\, EYES UP AND AHEAD\, STRAIGHT LINE FROM ELBOWS SOFT WITH SLIGHT BEND – HAND DOWN THE REIN TO THE HORSES MOUTH\, THUMBS ON TOP POINTING TOWAR DS HORSES EARS\, SIT EQUALLY ARCROSS BOTH SEAT BONES\, RELAX SEAT\, HIPS & amp\; PELVIS\, KNEE &\; THIGH REST LIGHTLY AGAINS SADDLE NOT GRIPPING)\ n 14.  Understand Aids (Natural &\; Artificial)\n\n COMMUNICATION B ETWEEN RIDERS AND HORSE)\n ARTIFICIAL AIDS- MAINLY WHIPS &\; SPURS\n NATURAL AIDS- VOICE\, HANDS\, LEGS\, BODY\, SEAT\n\n(HANDS – COMMUNICATI ON THROUGH REINS TO THE BIT\, SHOULD BE LIGHT FLEXIBLE- USE OF HAND AID MU ST BE USED WITH SEAT\, LEG AIDS- ABOVE HORSES WITHERS LEVEL WITH EACH OTHE R\n\n TURNING – GENTLE SQUEEZING THE REIN ASKS THE HORSE TO TURN HEAD I N THAT DIRECTION\n HALTING –PRESSURE ON BOTH REINS WITH SEAT AND LEG PR OVEDING ENERGY A HALT WILL PRODUCED\n\n(VOICE – WORD\, TONE &\; LENGT H OF TIME THE WORD IS HELD FOR INDICATES UPWARDS/DOWNWARDS TRANSITIONS\n\n UPWARD TRANSITION – EMPHASIS THE LETTER WITH RISE IN TONE TOWARDS END OF WORD\n DOWNWARD TRANSITION – LOWER TONE TOWRDS END OF WORD STRETCH T HE WORD OUT\n COLLECTION – CALM\n\n(SEAT – COLLECTION\, BALANCE\, STE ERING\, FORWARD MOVEMENT\, CONTROL\, STABILITY\n\n SEAT – CENTRAL IN SA DDLE\, EVEN DISTRIBUTION OF WEIGHT OFN SEAT BONES\, ALTER WHEN ASK HORSE T O MOVE DIRECTION\, DO NOT COLLAPSE THROUGH HIP\n HIPS –LEVEL AT ALL TIM ES\, SUPPLE TO ALLOW MOVEMENT ABSORBED THROUGH SEAT\n PELVIS – ABSORD M OVEMENT\, HELPS CONTROL CENTRE OF GRAVITY\, ENCOURANGES HORSE TO ACCELERAT E\n\n(LEGS – USED WITH SEAT &\; HAND TO COMMUNICATE – DIRECTION\, G AIT\, LEVEL OF ACTIVITY\, UPWARD DOWNWARD TRANSITIONS\, LATERAL MOVEMENTS\ n\n ON THE GIRTH – PRODUCES ENERGY/FORWARD MOVEMENT – BOTH LEGS ON TH E GIRTH FORWARD/STRAIGHT\, 1 LEG BEHIND THE GIRTH WILL ASK EITHER CHANGE D IRECTION OR CANTER DEPENDING ON LEVEL OF PRESSURE\n LOWER LEG BEHIND THE GIRTH – ABOUT 2-3 INCHES MORE CONTROL OVER HINDQUARTERS- FORWARD\, BACKW ARD\, DIAGONALLY OR SIDEWAYS MOVEMENTS\, UPWARD TRANSITIONS EG CANTER OR L ATERAL MOVEMENT EG LEG YIELD\, BOTH LEGS BEHIND THE GIRTH CORRECT USE WITH SEAT AND LEGS WILL AID REIN BACK\n\n(WHIP – INSIDE HAND USED TO BACK UP RIDERS LEG AND ENCOURAGE HORSE TO MOVE FORWARD)\n\n(SPURS – ON THE RIDE RS HEEL TO GIVE PRECISE LEG AID ONLY WORN BY EXPERIENCED RIDERS)\n 15. B alance\n16. Check Girth END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:2361@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251220T110000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251220T151500 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/level-1-group-lesson-3/ SUMMARY:Level 1 Group Lesson DESCRIPTION: \;\nYou will need to Register Add your Rider(s) on https:/ /bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk\nYou will of had to of been graded to se e what level lessons you can book\nand then you will be able to see what a vailability we have\nLevel One\n1. Mount correctly\n\n(Both Reins and Whi p into the Left hand and a clump of mane or on the neck\, Right hand as fa r round to the back of the saddle DO NOT HOLD ON TO THE FRONT AND BACK OF THE SADDLE\, Left foot in the stirrup\, bounce 3 times and swing right leg over\, not kicking the horses bottom on the way over and landing lightly on the saddle)\n\n2. Dismount correctly \n\n(Both feet out of stirrups\, reins and whip in to left hand right hand on the front of the saddle lean forwards slightly and swing your right leg over the back of the saddle\, l anding on the left. On landing bend both knees and you should be facing th e same way as the horse)\n\n3. Hold reins \n\n(Little finger underneath t he rein thumb on top close your fingers around your reins – and palms of your hands facing each other)\n\n4. Halt\n\n(sit up nice and tall\, heels down\, toes up\, palms of your hands facing sit on your bottom a little d eeper\, active walk\, squeeze down both reins and gently pull back slightl y\, you can use your voice and ask your horse to “HALT”)\n\n5. Walk \ n\n(sit up nice and tall\, heels down\, toes up\, palms of your hands faci ng\, keep your lower leg underneath you so you have a straight line Ear Sh oulder Hip Heel\, ride your horse through your hips and seat a little more \, active walk horses head should be bobbing up and down nice and quick\, you can use your voice and ask your horse to “WALK ON”)\n\n6. Rising t rot \n\n(sit up nice and tall\, heels down\, toes up\, palms of your hand s facing\, keep your lower leg underneath you\, standing up and down as yo ur horses’ trots\, as the outside front leg goes forwards you should sta nd and as it comes back you should sit)\n\n7.Walk without reins \n\n8. Tr ot without reins \n\n(sit up nice and tall\, heels down\, toes up\, palms of your hands facing\, keep your lower leg underneath you so you have a s traight line Ear Shoulder Hip Heel\, try not to tip forward)\n\n9. Explain an Active Walk\n\n(Horses is walking forwards with its head bobbing up an d down nice and quick\, back feet should fall where the front feet where)\ n\n10. Walk 20m Circles a and c  \n\n11. Simple Changes of Reins (A-C\, C-A\, B-E\, E-B\, M-K\, K-M\, F-H\, H-F) \n\n12. Bending in and out of co nes \n\n13. Around the world with helper  \n\n14. Balance \n\n15. Learn to Run up Stirrups \n\n16. Loosen Girth END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:10329@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251220T113000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251220T120000 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/walk-out/ SUMMARY:Walk Out DESCRIPTION: \;\nYou will need to be Registered and Added your Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk You will also of had to be gr aded to see what level you are with us and then you will be able to see wh at availability we have\n\n\n\n\n\nIF THE WEATHER IS AWFUL - WE WILL MAKE THE DECISION ON THE DAY WETHER IT IS SAFE TO GO AHEAD - IF NOT WE WILL REA RRANGE THE WALK OUT\n\nWalk out down the middlewood way\n\n\n\n\n END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:7091@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251220T120000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251220T123000 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/stable-management-sessions/ SUMMARY:Stable Management Sessions DESCRIPTION:STABLE MANAGEMENT \nYou will need to Register Add your Rider(s ) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk and then you will be able to see what availability we have\n30mins Sessions (can be booked as a month or individual dates)\nBadges will be applied on the ecpro upon completion and notes added so we are going to run the following levels together unde r a bronze\, silver and gold Ecpro Badge Scheme \nYELLOW  Level 1 &\; BLUE Level 2 Stable Management together and upon passing each you will re ceive a yellow &\; blue certificate but on EPRO you will Receive a BRO NZE BADGE \nGREEN  Level 2 &\; ORANGE Level 3 Stable Management toget her and upon passing each you will receive a green &\; orange certific ate but on EPRO you will Receive a SILVER BADGE \nPURPLE Level 5 &\; R ED Level 6 Stable Management together and upon passing each you will recei ve a red &\; purple certificate but on EPRO you will Receive a GOLD BAD GE \nBRONZE BADGE \nThings covered in the Yellow &\; Blue Syllabus's\ nName basic points of the Horse\nAssist a Rider Mounting \nGive a Leg Up  \nFit a Hat to a Rider \nAdjust Stirrups from the ground \nShow a ride r how to hold their reins \nAble to check &\; tighten a girth before m ounting\nYard Safety \nName different parts of the Bridle \nName differe nt parts of the Saddle \nName the different items of the grooming kit \n Lead a pony in-hand \nCorrect way to give a pony an apple/carrot \nAppro ach &\; Handle a pony correctly \nCatch a pony &\; Put a head colla r on \nDemonstrate awareness off safety rules &\; hazards \nTie up a pony correctly\nAble to tie a haynet up correctly \nPick up &\; pick o ut feet \nKnow the Principles of watering &\; feeding \nHow to stop a car \nHow to say 'thank-you'\nHow to cross a road \nKnow which side of the road you should ride on\nUnderstand the simple 'green cross code' \nK now it is safer to ride on the road with adults or parents \nDemonstrate Mucking Out\nBed down \nDemonstrate watering the horse \nPut on and Remo ve  Aa head collar correctly\nName &\; Describe different types of bed ding \nBe able to Put on a Saddle \nBe able to put on a Bridle \nName d ifferent horses colours \nName different Markings\nName different Rugs \ nKnow the importance of ill-fitting rugs \nKnow how to fit a rug \nKnow how to care for &\; clean saddlery \nHave knowledge of correctly fitti ng tack \nBe able to identify Poisonous Plants\nUntack correctly\nCommuni cate with Riders &\; Instructors when assisting \nHow to ride along a road\nHow to signal Right &\; Left\nShow an awareness of dangers while riding on a road\nSILVER BADGE \nCovered in the Green &\; Orange Sylla bus’s \nHorse &\; Rider 1st Aid Kit  \nField Safety (shelter\, fen cing\, poisonous plants\, maintenance) \nTreatment of minor Cuts &\; A brasions  \nCorrect handling of ponies’ legs  \nCorrect grooming of ponies’ feet &\; legs \nTack up &\; Un-tack Unaided &\; put aw ay correctly  \nBasic feeding  \nclean &\; assemble tack  \ncatch a pony &\; turn it away in the field  \nknow that water must always be available  \nknow the structure of the horse’s foot  \nknow the n ames of the farrier’s tools  \nidentify signs of ill health  \nunder stand the importance of roughage  \nrequirements to plaiting a horse   \nplaiting a horse \ndifferent mouth pieces &\; their actions  \nare na safety – rules of the arena  \nyard jobs (&\; safety) \nhow to lead a pony along a road on foot  \nhow to slow a car down  \ncare &am p\; working of a pony off grass \nelementary feeding\, watering &\; cl eanliness of the pony  \nknow when a pony needs shoeing  \nknow what t o look for in a newly shod foot  \nknow the main indications for health in the pony  \nrecognise when a pony is lame  \nknow how to load &\ ; un-load a pony  \nunderstand the importance &\; the means of protec ting les while travelling  \nput a rug\, roller\, tail bandage &\; Ne w Zealand on  \nknow what equipment is needed for lunging  \nknow reas ons for lunging  \nskeleton of the horse  \nknow different bandages &a mp\; apply them  \nknowledge of ill-fitting bandages  \nshow knowledge of hay &\; haylage  \nunderstand the importance of roughage  \nkno wledge of stabling-ventilation-lights-drainage-shelter &\; warmth  \n take a horse’s temperature  \nweigh a horse  \nunderstand the reason s for equipment a horse is wearing  \nhow to lead a pony along a road wh ile mounted\nA Parent/Guardian is to attend to drop children off for stabl e management and pick them up again\nUpon completing each syllabus you wil l receive a certificate once you receive your certificate ONCE YOU HAVE CO MPLETED THE BADGE you can then move on to the next BADGE levels \nThis me ans: if there are no badges displayed\, they are at level 1+2\, working to wards Bronze. \nIf a Bronze badge is displayed\, they have completed leve l 1+2 and now working towards Silver (level 3+4) and so on.\nTo access thi s you will have to go on to you account via web link https://bankfarmridi ngschool.ecpro.co.uk and go on to MY ACCOUNT and then on to RIDERS you wi ll see on there NOTES/PROGRESS and BADGES EARNED\, simply click on RIDER N OTES and everything will be displayed.\nThey will require\npaper\nfolder\n pens\nriding hat for when around and handling horses\ngloves for when hand ling horses\nAccess to a printer to print off SHEETS required which can be found on our google drive please follow the link https://drive.google.com /drive/folders/1gyFxnlXmtlMmrK_mIGG-8HuX6gHAEPFC?usp=sharing\nIf you have no access to a printer please let us know and we will print you a pack off at an additional charge\nNON REFUNDABLE \nIF YOU WOULD LIKE A FOLDER MAD E UP PLEASE LET LINDSEY KNOW AND THIS WILL BE AN ADDITIONAL CHARGE END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:3409@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251220T130000 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251220T134500 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/level-2-group-lesson-2/ SUMMARY:Level 2 Group Lesson DESCRIPTION:Every Saturday (1pm - 1:45pm)\nYou will need to Register Add yo ur Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk\nYou will of had t o of been graded to see what level lessons you can book\nand then you will be able to see what availability we have\n \;\nLevel Two\n1. Explain Safety distances \n(½ A HORSES LENGTH BETWEEN YOU AND THE ONE IN FRONT O R YOU SHOULD BE ABLE TO SEE ½ WAY DOWN THE HORSES TAIL IN FRONT\, IF YOU GET TO CLOSE YOU CAN GET KICKED OR THE HORSES CAN HAVE A TIZZ) \n2. Able to keep horse/pony going on own\n 3. Balanced Sitting trot \n(SIT UP N ICE AND TALL\, HEELS DOWN\, TOES UP\, PALME OF YOUR HANDDS FACING\, KEEP Y OUR LOWER LEG UNDERNEATH YOU\, YOU SHOULD HAVE A STRAIGHT-LINE EAR\, SHOUL DER\, HIP\, HEEL. SIT NICE AND DEEP IN TO THE SADDLE AND DO NOT HOLD YOU S ELL UP IN YOUR STIRRUPS TO TRY AND STOP THE BOUNCE TRY TO ABSORB THE BOUNC E AND SIT DEEP FEEL FOR YOUR SEAT BONES).\n 4. Explain &\; Execute Pr epare Transitions\n(DEPENDING WHAT PACE YOU ARE GOING TO — SQUEEZE THE R EINS LIKE SPONGES WHICH IS CALLED A HALF HALT\, SITTING TROT (IF YOU ARE T ROTTING)\, ACTIVE WALK (IF YOU ARE WALKING)\, SHORTEN REINS\, POSITION- SI T UP TALL – STRAIGHT BACK- HEELS DOWN TOES UP – PALMS OF HANDS FACING\ , LEGS WRAPPED ROUND TO KEEP THEM GOING FORWARDS WETHER IT IS FORWARDS IN TO WALK OR IN TO HALT OR FORWARDS IN TROT PLUS RIDING THROUGH YOUR SEAT TO O)\n 5. Walk over poles \n(POSITION- SIT UP TALL – STRAIGHT BACK- HEE LS DOWN TOES UP – PALMS OF HANDS FACING\, LEGS WRAPPED ROUND TO KEEP THE M GOING FORWARDS AND RIDING THROUGH YOUR SEAT TOO. LOOK STRAIGHT A HEAD DO N’T LOOK DOWN SQUEEZE A LITTLE FIRMER OVER EACH POLE TO ENCOURAGE THE HO RSES TO PICK THEIR FEET UP A LITTLE HIGHER)\n 6. Trot over poles \n(POS ITION- SIT UP TALL – STRAIGHT BACK- HEELS DOWN TOES UP – PALMS OF HAND S FACING\, LEGS WRAPPED ROUND TO KEEP THEM GOING FORWARDS AND RIDING THROU GH YOUR SEAT TOO. IF RISING MAKE SURE YOU KEEP THE UP DOWN RYHTHM OVER THE POLE. LOOK STRAIGHT A HEAD DON’T LOOK DOWN SQUEEZE A LITTLE FIRMER OVER EACH POLE TO ENCOURAGE THE HORSES TO PICK THEIR FEET UP A LITTLE HIGHER)\ n 7.Understand Diagonals \n(AS THE OUTSIDE FRONT LEG GOES FORWARDS YOU S TAND UP AS IT COMES BACK YOU SIT DOWN)\n 8. Know how to change Diagonals \n(CHECK DIAGONAL\, IF INCORRECT SIT FOR 2 BEATS (NOT 3 BEATS) 2 BEATS AND RISE UP AND DOWN AGAIN THEN RE-CHECK YOUR DIAGONAL)\n9. Explain &\; Ri de with the Correct position \n(SIT UP NICE AND TALL\, HEELS DOWN\, TOES UP\, PALME OF YOUR HANDDS FACING\, KEEP YOUR LOWER LEG UNDERNEATH YOU\, \ n\nLINE 1 IS – YOU SHOULD HAVE A STRAIGHT-LINE EAR\, SHOULDER\, HIP\, HE EL\n\nLINE 2 IS – YOU SHOULD HAVE A STRAIGHT-LINE ELBOW\, HAND\, TO YOUR HORSES MOUTH).\n10. Trot 20m circles a and c\n11. More difficult changes of Reins \n(A-C\, C-A\, B-E\, E-B\, K-M\, M-K\, H-F\, F-H\, K-B\, B-K\, B -H\, H-B\, F-E\, E-F\, M-E\, E-M)\n12. Ride Independently \n13. Walk with out Stirrups \n14. Balance for Level 2\n15. Position for Level 2\n16. Ru led of the School\n(ALL RIDERS &\; HELPERS TO WEAR AN UP TO DATE STAND ARD RIDING HAT\,  USE CORRECT ENTRANCES &\; EXITS\,  RESPECT ARENA PR OPERTY &\; PROPERTY OF OTHERS\,  LEAVES ARENA AS YOU FIND IT\,  CONDU CT &\; PRACTICE GOOD HORSEMASTERSHIP\,   PICK UP MANURE\,  KEEP 1/2 HORSES LENGTH BETWEEN RIDERS\,   DOORS/GATES MUST BE CLOSES BEHIND YOU W HEN ENTERING AND LEAVING\,  BE AWARE OF OTHER RIDERS\,  DO NOT CUT ANYON E UP\,  HORSES WORKING AT A FASTER GAIT ARE GIVEN PRIORITY TO USE THE OUT SIDE TRACK\,  HORSES SHOULD PASS LEFT SHOULDER TO LEFT SHOULDER IF ON OPP OSITE REINS\,  IF YOU MUST STOP THEN MOVE TO THE CENTER OF THE ARENA\,  IF THERES A RUN AWAY HORSES ALL RIDERS MOVE TO THE CENTER &\; STOP\,  ENTER &\; LEAVE ARENA IN SINGLE FILE\,  BEWARE AT ALL TIMES OF RIDERS &\; THEIR HORSES AROUND YOU\, PUT ALL EQUIPMENT AWAY AFTER USE) END:VEVENT BEGIN:VEVENT UID:3147@bankfarmridingschool.co.uk DTSTART;TZID=Europe/London:20251220T151500 DTEND;TZID=Europe/London:20251220T161500 DTSTAMP:20260520T184558Z URL:https://bankfarmridingschool.co.uk/events/level-3-group-lesson-3/ SUMMARY:Level 4 Group Lesson DESCRIPTION:Every Saturday (3:15pm - 4:15pm)\nYou will need to Register Add your Rider(s) on https://bankfarmridingschool.ecpro.co.uk\nYou will of ha d to of been graded to see what level lessons you can book\nand then you w ill be able to see what availability we have\n \;\nLevel Four\n1. Cont inue working on Balanced Cantering \n2. Trotting Pole without stirrups \ n3. 7 phases of jumping\n\n (TURN -APPROARCH-TAKE OFF-FLIGHT-LAND-GET-AWA Y- TURN)\n REMAIN BALANCED\n IMPULSION\n POSITION – OPEN SHOULDERS ON TURN \n 1. TURN  – ACCURATELY – LINE UP WITH CENTRE – SIT UP – LOOK AHEAD – RIDE LEG TO HAND – KEEP BALANCED RHYTHM – IMPULSION \n  2. APPROACH  – CENTRE OF JUMP – SIT UP – LOOK AHEAD CHANNEL ING HORSE FORWARD – BETWEEN HAND &\; LEG TO MAINTAIN STRAIGHT LINE – MAINTAIN IMPULSION &\; BALANCE\n 3. TAKE OFF – POINT WHICH HORS E GATHERS HINDLEGS UNDERNEATH ITS BODY &\; STARTS TO LIFT FOREHAND – LOWER LEG SECURELY WRAPPED ROUND – MAINTAIN ENERGY &\; FORWARDNESS – HANDS FOLLOW MOVEMENT OF HORSES HEAD NECK BUT MAINTAIN CONTACT THROUGH REIN – LOOK AHEAD\n 4. FLIGHT – IN THE AIR – FOREHAND WELL LIFTED\ , BACK WELL ROUNDED\, FORELEGS &\; HINDLEGS TUCKED UP – FOLDED IN TO JUMPING POSITION\, UPPER BODY LOWERED\, SEAT SLIPPED TO BACK OF SADDLE – HANDS ALLOW STRETCH THE NECK\, BACK &\; BODY GIVES FREEDOM OF MOVEMENT \, WHILE MAINTAINING LIGHT CONTACT – LOWER LEG STAYS SECURELY WRAPPED AR OUND MAINTAIN BALANCE\n 5. LAND – HORSE STRETCHES OUT &\; EXTENDS FORELEGS READY TO LAND – HORSE SHOULD LAND ON FORELEG WANTING THE CANTER LEAD ON – UPPER BODY COMES BACK UP – MAINTAIN CONTACT – LEGS REMAIN IN POSTION – LOOK AHEAD\n 6. GET AWAY  ­­- MOVING AWAY FROM THE J UMP TO THE NEXT – MAKE SURE HORSE IS BALANCED\, PLENTY OF ENERGY &\; IMPULSION- CORRECT CANTER LEAD – LEGS SECURE\n 7. TURN –  TURNS AW AY FROM ONE FENCE TO ANOTHER THIS STAGE STARTS ALL OVER AGAIN OR IF SINGLE FENCE STAY STRAIGHT\n\n4/5. Able Ride A Demi Voltes &\; Reverse Demi V oltes\n\n DEMI VOLTE – ½ 10 MENTRE CIRCLE TO THE CENTRE LINE THEN A DI AGONAL LINE BACK TO THE TRACK TO CHANGE THE REIN\n REVERSE DEMI VOLTE – DIAGONAL LINE TO CENTRE LINE LETTER THEN ½ 10 METRE CIRCLE BACK TO THE T RACK TO CHANGE THE REIN \n\n6. 2X ½ 10 metre Circles to change the rein   \n7. Turn on the Forehand\n\n HALT\, TO STOP FORWARD MOVEMENT APPLY S TEADY PRESSURE ON REINS – SIT UP STRAIGHT \n PRESSURE PLACED 3-4 INCHS BEHIND THE GIRTH WITH YOUR OUTSIDE LEG – HORSE WILL MOVE AWAY FROM THE PRESSURE\, HORSES HIND LEGS WILL MOVE IN FRONT &\; ACROSS THE OTHER HIN D LEG\, THE OPPOSITE FRONT LEG TO YOUR PRESSURE LEG WILL ALSO MOVE AROUND THE OTHER FRONT LEG WILL STAY STILL \n YOUR OTHER LEG (INSIDE) SHOULD BE KEPT STEADY SO TO KEEP YOUR BALANCE AND STOP THE HORSE TRYING TO TURN TOO QUICKLY \n REINS TO CONTROL FRONT OF HORSE – GOOD CONTROL PREVENTS YO UR HORSE MOVING FORWARDS – OUTSIDE HAND LIFT UP AND BACK TO FLEX HORSES NECK SLIGHTLY IN THE DIRECTION OF TURN\, FLEX UNTIL YOU CAN SEE CORNER OF EYE – USE OTHER REIN FOR SUPPORT TO KEEP HORSE FROM MOVING FORWARDS\, OU TSIDE REIN CLOSE TO NECK   \n HALF HALT EACH STEP UNTIL COMPLETE TURN 180 DEGREES – POSITVIE PRAISE AFTER \n TURNING RIGHT RIGHT LEG BACK – RIGHT REIN FLEX \n TURNING LEFT LEFT LEG BACK – LEFT REIN FLEX\n\n 8. 15m circles in walk  (A&\;C)\n9. 10m circles in walk (A&\;C)   \n10. Lighten seat \nINVOLVES STANDING ON YOUR OWN 2 FEET WHILE WORKING YOUR HORSE – BALANCE YOURSELF\, NO LEANING\, HOLDING ON CROUCHING DOWN ON NECK – CLEARANCE BETWEEN BOTTOM AND SADDLE – ALLOWS HORSE TO MOVE M ORE FREELY – IMPROVES BALANCE\, FITNESS AND COORDINATION- FEET CORRECTLY POSITIONED IN STIRRUP\, ALLOWS ANKLES\, KNEES &\; HIPS BECOME MORE EFF ECTIVE SHOCK ABSORBERS – ENGAGE YOUR CORE (TUMMY MUSCLES) – STRAIGHT B ACK – HANDS &\; ARMS INDEPENDENT KEEP CONTACT\n11. Jumping Position  \nTHIS INVOLVES THE RIDER CENTERED OVER HIS/HER FEET – STIRRUP LEATHERS 90 DEGREE ANGLE TO THE GROUND\, CONTINUING A LINE UPWARDS FROM THE STIRRUP LEATHERS- THE HEAD\, SHOULDERS &\; KNEES FALL IN FRONT OF THE LINE – HIPS FALL BEHIND IT\n\n LEG HANG DOWNSIDE EVEN CONTACT ALONG WHOLE LENGT H – INNER THIGH\, KNEE &\; CALF – WEIGHT ALONG BACK OF LEG INTO HEE L FLEXIBLE ANKLE \n SEAT\, HIPS &\; THIGHS –WEIGHT TOWARDS PELVIS\, ENOUGH WEIGHT IN STIRRUP TO SUSPEND IN THE AIR OVER THE SADDLE – HIPS N OT TOO FAR FORWARD IT CHANGES THE BALANCE –HIPS\, FLEXIBLE\, MOVE BACKWA RDS\, BETWEEN FENCES THE THIGHS TAKE UP WEIGHT OF RIDER NOT THE SEAT BONES \n UPPER BODY\, SHOULDERS\, HEAD\, TRUNK – LOOK UP IN DIRECTION YOU ARE GOING – BACK FLAT – OPEN CHEST – SHOULDERS OPEN \n RELEASE – GR AB MANE OR SLIDE HANDS UP CREST AS TAKE OFF\n\n12. Single Fence Jumping   \n13. Be able to check &\; adjust girth while mounted  \n14. Unde rstand &\; Explain Impulsion\nMOVEMENT OF HOESE – FORWARD AND CONTROL LED POWER – EFFECTIVE USE OF POWER IN THE HIND QUARTERS – TO ACHIEVE A HORSE MUST NOT USE SPEED BUT USE MUSCLUAR CONTROL – HORSE RELAXED BACK WILL ALLOW HINDQUARTERS TO COME WELL UNDER ITS BODY AND THIS IS CALLED “ ENGAGED”.\n15. Understand Half halt &\; when Used \n(A SPONGE EFFEC T ON THE REIN(S))\n16. Trotting Poles \n17. Canter Poles\n18. Raised Trot ting Poles \nTO BUILD UP MUSCLE ON TOP LINE SHOULDERS AND BACK – MORE F LEXIBLE – ENCOURAGES LEGS TO LIFT OVER JUMPS\n19. Balance for Level 4\n2 0. Position for Level 4\n21. More Changes of Reins &\; Other Movements   \n22. Continue Perfecting school movements and changes of reins learnt in previous Levels \n23. Canter 20m Circles\n24. Start Strides\n25. 1 5m circles in Trot (A&\;C)\n26. 10m circles in Trot (A&\;C)\n27. Ca nter without Stirrups\n28. Acute Transitions\n29. Confidence END:VEVENT BEGIN:VTIMEZONE TZID:Europe/London X-LIC-LOCATION:Europe/London BEGIN:STANDARD DTSTART:20251026T010000 TZOFFSETFROM:+0100 TZOFFSETTO:+0000 TZNAME:GMT END:STANDARD END:VTIMEZONE END:VCALENDAR